Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Eplan-p8-Manual-1700 Pages PDF
Eplan-p8-Manual-1700 Pages PDF
EPLAN Training 1
Starting and Exiting EPLAN
2 Exiting EPLAN...............................................................................................5
EPLAN Training 2
Starting and Exiting EPLAN
1 Starting EPLAN
After installation, you can start EPLAN via the Windows Start menu.
Precondition:
You have the required software protection dongle for EPLAN and the required
license.
2. Open the EPLAN program group and click the icon for your EPLAN version.
1. The EPLAN main window will open. By default EPLAN opens the Tip of the
Day dialog.
3. Deselect the Show tips at startup check box if you do not wish for it to
appear every time the program is started.
EPLAN Training 3
Starting and Exiting EPLAN
4. Click [Close].
Notes:
You can set up EPLAN such that after the program is started the most recently
opened project, or the most recently opened page, appears. The settings for
this can be changed via the menu items Options > Settings > User >
Display > User interface.
If you use EPLAN Rights management you may (depending on the operating
mode) have to log on via Logon dialog before you can work in EPLAN.
EPLAN Training 4
Starting and Exiting EPLAN
2 Exiting EPLAN
You can exit EPLAN at any time. All of the data and settings, including those relating
to the user interface (i.e. open dialogs, displayed toolbars, etc.), are saved and used
again when the program is restarted.
Precondition:
You have closed all of the dialogs in the foreground using the [Esc] key or the
shortcut key [Alt] + [F4].
1. Select the menu item Project > Exit or use the shortcut key combination [Alt]
+ [F4].
2. EPLAN is exited.
EPLAN Training 5
Starting and Exiting EPLAN
EPLAN Training 6
User Interface
User Interface
EPLAN Training 1
User Interface
EPLAN Training 2
User Interface
1 Operating EPLAN with the Keyboard..........................................................5
1.1 Open a menu item ....................................................................................5
1.2 Select elements within a dialog.................................................................5
1.3 Select tabs ................................................................................................5
1.4 Open menus and popup menus................................................................6
1.5 Select / deselect check boxes...................................................................6
1.6 Open drop-down lists ................................................................................7
1.7 Use the keyboard in list or tree views .......................................................7
8 Selecting Objects........................................................................................39
8.1 Select single objects ...............................................................................39
8.2 Select several objects in sequence.........................................................40
8.3 Select several objects not in sequence...................................................41
8.4 Remove selection ...................................................................................42
EPLAN Training 4
User Interface
Precondition:
2. Enter the underlined identifier of the desired menu item within this menu.
3. Proceed in the same way until you reach the desired menu item.
EPLAN Training 5
User Interface
2. Or press the [CTRL] + [SHIFT] + [TAB] keys together until you have selected
the desired tab. The "paging" through the tabs then takes place from right to
left.
2. Press [SPACE].
EPLAN Training 6
User Interface
EPLAN Training 7
User Interface
2. Press [*] on your numeric keypad. (If your keyboard does not have a numeric
keypad, e.g. a laptop keyboard, you can also use the key combination [Fn]
combined with the computer and country specific key for "X".)
EPLAN Training 8
User Interface
3. Switch between the tree and list views by pressing [CTRL] + [TAB] .
4. Use the arrow keys to select the desired object within the list and tree
structures.
Tip:
At any time you can press the [Strg] + [F12] keys to switch between the "dockable"
EPLAN Training 9
User Interface
dialogs, e.g. between the Page Navigator, the Message Management and a
graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 10
User Interface
1. In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog, select the desired menu command from
the Select command list.
2. Click [Create].
EPLAN Training 11
User Interface
3. In the Create keyboard shortcuts dialog, in the New shortcut key field,
enter the desired shortcut key for the selected command.
If you select a shortcut key that is already assigned then the Current
assignment is displayed. You can overwrite this. If you do not wish to
overwrite the assignment, enter a different shortcut key.
4. Click [OK].
The dialog is closed and the (new) shortcut key is displayed in the
Assigned shortcut keys field.
6. Click [OK].
1. In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog, select the desired menu command from
the Select command list.
EPLAN Training 12
User Interface
The fields Description and Assigned shortcut keys are automatically
filled with the appropriate data, if this exists.
2. In the Assigned shortcut keys field, select the shortcut key to be deleted.
(Multiple selection isn't possible here).
3. Click [Remove].
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 13
User Interface
2. Click [Yes], if all keyboard shortcuts that you have created are to be removed
and the original settings restored, otherwise click [No].
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 14
User Interface
3 Adjusting Toolbars
EPLAN has pre-defined toolbars that you can activate or deactivate. You can also
change the display type of the buttons. You can also create your own toolbars and
equip them with the desired commands. These user-defined toolbars can be edited
and deleted. You can also edit the EPLAN pre-defined toolbars. Buttons can be
added or deleted. The pre-defined toolbars cannot however be deleted.
2. Select the check box for each toolbar in the list that is to be displayed.
3. If required, deselect the check boxes for toolbars that are not to be displayed.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 15
User Interface
Tip:
3. Click [OK].
When you now move the cursor over a toolbar symbol in EPLAN, then a small text
window is displayed below the symbol with a description of the symbol.
EPLAN Training 16
User Interface
1. In the Customize dialog, select the Toolbars tab.
3. Click [OK].
2. Click [New].
EPLAN Training 17
User Interface
3. In the New toolbar dialog, in the Toolbar name field, enter a designation for
your toolbar.
4. Click [OK].
The dialog is closed, the new toolbar is created and displayed in the user
interface.
EPLAN Training 18
User Interface
6. From the Categories list, select the desired category whose buttons are to be
displayed.
7. Click the desired button and use "Drag & Drop" to pull it onto your toolbar.
If you select an Action or a Menu without pre-defined image data, then you
must specify further settings for the button in a subsequent dialog.
8. Repeat these steps until the toolbar contains all desired symbols.
Note:
Once you have created user-defined toolbars, you must save the current user
interface configuration as a new workspace or as a selected workspace (edit), so that
the user-defined toolbars are permanently available for use (in the current
workspace).
EPLAN Training 19
User Interface
3. Click [Delete].
2. Select the check box of the toolbar to which you wish to add extra commands.
EPLAN Training 20
User Interface
3. Select the Commands tab.
4. From the Categories list, select the desired category whose buttons are to be
displayed.
5. Click the desired button and use "Drag & Drop" to pull it onto the previously
activated toolbar.
If you select an Action or a Menu without pre-defined image data, then you
must specify further settings for the button in a subsequent dialog.
6. Repeat these steps until the toolbar contains all desired symbols.
Note:
Once you have extended the predefined toolbars, you must save the current user
interface configuration as a new workspace or as a selected workspace (edit), so that
the extended predefined toolbars are permanently available for use (in the current
workspace).
EPLAN Training 21
User Interface
2. Click the desired button and use "Drag & Drop" to pull it off your toolbar.
Note:
Once you have removed buttons, you must save the current user interface
configuration as a new workspace or as a selected workspace (edit), so that the
modified toolbars are permanently available for use (in the current workspace).
2. In the Toolbars list, select the predefined toolbars that you have modified and
now wish to reset.
EPLAN Training 22
User Interface
3. Click [Reset].
EPLAN Training 23
User Interface
Precondition:
1. In the Export Toolbars dialog, select the toolbar(s) that you wish to export.
2. Click [OK].
3. In the subsequent dialog, select the directory to where you wish to export the
toolbar.
4. In the File name field, enter the name for the export file.
5. Click [Save].
EPLAN Training 24
User Interface
The toolbar is exported and saved as an XML file under the specified
name.
Precondition:
You have created and exported user-defined toolbars or another user has made an
appropriate export file containing toolbars available to you.
1. In the Import toolbars dialog, select the directory from which you wish to
import the toolbar(s).
EPLAN Training 25
User Interface
3. Click [Open].
The toolbars are imported. If the toolbars already exist then an appropriate
message is displayed.
Note:
After importing user-defined toolbars, you must save the current user interface
configuration as a new workspace or as a selected workspace (edit), so that the user-
defined toolbars are permanently available for use (in the current workspace).
EPLAN Training 26
User Interface
When the program is exited, EPLAN notes the last settings of these elements
(docked, undocked, size, position) and restores them the next time the program is
started. If a particular configuration of dockable elements is to be permanently
retained, i.e. when changing workspaces, then these settings must be saved as a
new workspace or saved under the existing workspace.
The windows of open pages are also "dockable and undockable". However, the
settings of these editors cannot be saved with a workspace.
Precondition:
1. Using the left mouse button, click a "free" area within the menu bar, within a
toolbar, or in the title bar of a dockable dialog and keep the mouse button
pressed.
EPLAN Training 27
User Interface
2. Press the [CTRL] key to avoid docking and pull the docked element to the
desired position.
If the borders of the respective control element are displayed with a thick
line, then EPLAN positions the control element as an independent, undocked
element on the Windows desktop.
Precondition:
1. Click the title bar of the desired undocked control element with the left mouse
button and keep the button pressed.
EPLAN Training 28
User Interface
2. Pull the element to the desired position in the EPLAN main window.
To dock the undocked element to the border of the EPLAN main window
(or the border of another dockable element), you must move the edge of the
element exactly to the border of the EPLAN main window. You can recognize
this by the border of the element being displayed as a thin line. This will be a
horizontal or vertical line, depending on whether you wish to position the
control element at the top, bottom, left or right. You can recognize the
orientation from the thinly drawn preview rectangle.
Precondition:
You have opened a page in an editor (graphical editor, symbol editor, form editor,
etc.). The editor is displayed as a subordinate window in the main window.
EPLAN Training 29
User Interface
2. Click the title bar of the editor using the right mouse button, and select Popup
menu > Floating.
The editor is immediately undocked from the frame of the EPLAN main
window.
Precondition:
You have opened a page in an editor (graphical editor, symbol editor, form editor,
etc.). The editor is displayed in your user interface as an undocked window.
1. Click the title bar of the respective editor with the right mouse button.
EPLAN Training 30
User Interface
2. In the popup menu, first select Docked to and then select the docking
direction from the submenu (Top, Left, Bottom, Right).
The editor is docked in the selected docking direction to the frame of the
EPLAN main window.
Precondition:
You have opened a page in an editor (graphical editor, symbol editor, form editor,
etc.). The editor is displayed in your user interface as a docked or undocked window.
EPLAN Training 31
User Interface
1. Click the title bar of the editor using the right mouse button, and select Popup
menu > Child window.
The respective editor is adjusted to fit in the main window so that its
internal area is optimally used. The tile bar of the subordinate window is then
integrated into the title bar of the main window.
EPLAN Training 32
User Interface
Note:
You can only select another dialog language if this language was installed when the
system was initially installed.
Options > Settings > User > Display > User interface
1. Select the desired language from the Dialog Language drop-down list in the
Settings: User interface dialog.
2. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 33
User Interface
Note:
Although the Page Navigator has both list and tree structures, the "list" in this case
is a table. This means that page overview lists are controlled in a different manner to
the "normal" selection dialog lists.
Precondition:
You have opened a selection dialog and selected the List tab.
EPLAN Training 34
User Interface
1. Enter a character
The cursor jumps to the first list entry beginning with this character.
With every entry, the cursor jumps to the next object beginning with this
character.
EPLAN Training 35
User Interface
3. Quickly enter several characters one after the other.
EPLAN interprets the entry as a string of characters and the cursor jumps
to the first object beginning with this string of characters.
Note:
The search direction is always from the top down and the first display column is
always searched. Once the last element in the list is reached, the search begins
again from the top.
Precondition:
You have opened a selection dialog and selected the List tab.
EPLAN Training 36
User Interface
1. Click one of the column headers.
If the displayed data is in the original sequence, then sorting first takes
place in increasing alphanumeric order of the column whose header you
clicked. (An arrow symbol in the column header shows the sorting direction.)
The sorting now occurs in decreasing order, again of the column whose
header you clicked. (An arrow symbol in the column header shows the sorting
direction.)
EPLAN Training 37
User Interface
3. Click the same header a third time.
EPLAN Training 38
User Interface
8 Selecting Objects
In selection dialogs, one or more objects can be selected.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 39
User Interface
Precondition:
2. Hold down the [SHIFT] key and click the last object to be selected.
EPLAN Training 40
User Interface
Precondition:
2. Hold down the [CTRL] key and click the next object to be selected.
EPLAN Training 41
User Interface
3. Repeat this step for all desired objects.
Precondition:
You have opened a selection dialog and selected at least one object.
1. To remove the selection of a single selected object, click next to the object.
2. To remove the selection of one or several selected objects, hold down the
[CTRL] key and click the desired objects.
EPLAN Training 42
User Interface
Precondition:
3. Select the cells where the contents of the clipboard are to be copied to.
Multiple selection is possible here.
EPLAN Training 43
User Interface
4. Press [CTRL] + [V].
Precondition:
3. Select the cells where the contents of the clipboard are to be copied to.
Multiple selection is possible here but the number of cells to be filled must be a
multiple of the number of originally copied cells.
Example:
You have selected two cells with different content and pressed [CTRL] + [C]. If you
EPLAN Training 44
User Interface
now select five cells and press [CTRL] + [V], then EPLAN displays an error message
stating that this multiple selection is not possible. If you now select four or six cells
instead and press [CTRL] + [V] then the data is inserted.
Precondition:
3. Select the cell where the contents of the first source cell are to be copied to.
Depending on whether you selected source cells lying next to each other or under
each other, the cells are filled with the copied data next to or under the first target
cell.
EPLAN Training 45
User Interface
Notes:
If entire lines or columns are selected when copying, then the row / column
header is also copied.
When illegal values are inserted into a cell, either the original value remains
unchanged or an automatic correction is made to the inserted value.
Tip:
You can insert the content of an Excel cell using Drag & Drop, by clicking in the
upper left corner of the selected cell and then dragging it into a table in your
project.
EPLAN Training 46
User Interface
Precondition:
1. Double-click to the right of the column separator next to the heading of the
column whose width you wish to optimize.
The width of the column is adjusted so that all values contained in the column are
completely displayed.
Precondition:
1. Press the keys [CTRL] + ["plus sign"] on the numeric keypad of the
keyboard.
EPLAN Training 47
User Interface
All existing columns are optimized.
Note:
If your keyboard does not have a numeric keypad, e.g. a laptop keyboard, you can
also use the key combination [Fn] combined with the computer and country specific
key for "Plus".
Precondition:
2. Pull the column or row separator with the mouse to the desired new position.
The change affects all selected cells, i.e. their height / width are changed.
EPLAN Training 48
User Interface
Precondition:
1. Select the projects you wish to move. (Multiple selection is possible here).
In the dialog, the [Move <direction>] buttons possible for the current
selection are activated.
The selected objects are moved one position in the desired direction with
each click, as long as this is possible.
3. Click [OK].
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 49
User Interface
1. Select the projects you wish to move. Multiple selection is possible here.
3. Click [OK].
Note:
Upon confirmation of a new ordering, EPLAN notes the positions of the table headers
and automatically jumps to the last focused cell when the dialog is reopened. If the
ordering within the table has changed, then a jump occurs to either the first or last
cell to be edited.
Precondition:
1. Double-click to the right of the column separator next to the heading of the
column whose width you wish to optimize.
The width of the column is adjusted so that all values contained in the column are
completely displayed.
EPLAN Training 50
User Interface
Precondition:
1. Press the keys [CTRL] + ["plus sign"] on the numeric keypad of the
keyboard.
Note:
If your keyboard does not have a numeric keypad, e.g. a laptop keyboard, you can
also use the key combination [Fn] combined with the computer and country specific
key for "Plus".
Precondition:
2. Pull the column or row separator with the mouse to the desired new position.
EPLAN Training 51
User Interface
The change affects all selected cells, i.e. their height / width are changed.
EPLAN Training 52
User Interface
Precondition:
2. If necessary, change the dialog size of both views so that both dialogs are
displayed at the same time.
EPLAN Training 53
User Interface
3. Select the desired object in the first dialog.
4. Keep the mouse button pressed and pull the element from the first dialog into
the second dialog.
The mouse pointer changes its form and shows you whether or not
you can insert the object.
The selected object is copied, moved or linked into the target, depending
on the source and target.
EPLAN Training 54
User Interface
EPLAN Training 55
Schemes
Schemes
EPLAN Training 1
Schemes
EPLAN Training 2
Schemes
1 Editing Schemes
In EPLAN, you can create schemes for various settings, e.g., for device tags or
filters. Schemes can also be deleted, copied, edited, or imported and exported.
Precondition:
You have opened a dialog in which it is possible to select a scheme for settings.
1. In the dialog concerned, click (New) next to the Scheme drop-down list.
2. In the New scheme dialog, select a scheme from the Scheme list that you
would like to use as the template for the scheme to be generated.
The name and description will be placed into the fields in the lower area.
EPLAN Training 3
Schemes
3. In the Name field, enter the name for the new scheme, i.e., overwrite the
name of the one that is currently selected.
4. In the Description field, enter a short descriptive text for the new scheme.
5. Click [OK].
The New scheme is closed, in which the new scheme will be set as the
current scheme.
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 4
Schemes
Precondition:
You have opened a dialog in which it is possible to select a scheme for settings.
2. In the Copy scheme: <scheme name> dialog, in the Name field, enter the
name for the copy of the current scheme shown in the title bar of the dialog.
EPLAN Training 5
Schemes
4. Click [OK].
Precondition:
You have opened a dialog in which it is possible to select a scheme for settings.
2. In the Delete Scheme dialog, click [Yes] if you would like to delete the
current scheme, or [No] if you would like to cancel the deletion process.
Note:
Only the schemes you yourself have created can be deleted. The standard schemes
included in the EPLAN delivery cannot be deleted.
EPLAN Training 6
Schemes
Precondition:
You have opened a dialog in which it is possible to select a scheme for settings.
2. In the Select import file dialog, choose the directory from where you would
like to import a scheme.
EPLAN Training 7
Schemes
3. Select the scheme to be imported.
4. Click [Open].
Precondition:
You have opened a dialog in which it is possible to select a scheme for settings.
EPLAN Training 8
Schemes
2. In the Select export file, choose the directory where you would like to export
the scheme.
3. In the File name field, enter the name for the export file.
4. Click [Save].
The scheme is exported and saved as an XML file under the name that
was provided.
EPLAN Training 9
Schemes
EPLAN Training 10
Project Management
Project Management
EPLAN Training 1
Project Management
EPLAN Training 2
Project Management
Precondition:
1. To open the project management, select the menu item Project >
Management.
Directories that have already been loaded are displayed in the Project
management dialog.
If no directories have yet been loaded into project management, then you
will be asked in a message to load the EPLAN project directory.
EPLAN Training 3
Project Management
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 4
Project Management
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 5
Project Management
2. In the Settings: Project management database dialog click [...] next to the
Project management database field.
3. Select a directory from the Browse for folder dialog and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 6
Project Management
5. Select the menu item Project > Management.
EPLAN Training 7
Project Management
Precondition:
1. Select the menu item Options > Settings > Company > Management >
Project management database.
2. In the Settings: Project management database dialog click [...] next to the
Project management database field.
EPLAN Training 8
Project Management
3. Select the directory where the project management database is located from
the Browse for folder dialog and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 9
Project Management
Precondition:
You have created a project template *.ept, or have access to a project template.
1. In the left-hand list field, select Popup menu > New from project template.
EPLAN Training 10
Project Management
2. Search and select the desired template in the Select Project Template
dialog.
3. Click on [Open].
4. In the Select target project dialog, enter the storage location and name of the
new project.
5. Click [Save].
If the Select PPE project template dialog opens, you can create the
project with or without PPE basic functionality. To create the project with PPE
EPLAN Training 11
Project Management
basic functionality, search and select a PPE template *.ppe and click [Open].
To create the project without PPE basic functionality, click [Cancel].
7. To customize entries, select one of the tabs, make the changes, and then click
[OK].
EPLAN Training 12
Project Management
Precondition:
You have created a basic project *.ebtp, or have access to a basic project.
1. In the left-hand list field, select Popup menu > New from basic project.
EPLAN Training 13
Project Management
2. Search and select the desired template in the Select basic project.
3. Click on [Open].
4. In the Select target project dialog, enter the storage location and name of the
new project.
EPLAN Training 14
Project Management
5. Click [Save].
7. To customize entries, select one of the tabs, make the changes, and then click
[OK].
EPLAN Training 15
Project Management
Precondition:
There must be projects present in the directory that you would like to load.
1. In the Project management dialog, select the menu item [Extras] > Load
directory.
EPLAN Training 16
Project Management
2. Select a directory level from the Browse for Folder dialog as a starting
directory, and click [OK].
EPLAN searches all subdirectories for projects and loads these, with the
directory structure, into the project management.
EPLAN Training 17
Project Management
Preconditions:
You have set up the project management.
In the tree structure of project management there is an imported directory with
at least one project.
Project > Management
1. Select the desired project from the tree structure in the Project management
dialog.
2. Click [Open].
Tip:
You can open projects using drag and drop by dragging the selected *.elk project
file from the Windows Explorer to the page navigator.
EPLAN Training 18
Project Management
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 19
Project Management
8 Copying a Project
You can create a project by copying and adapting an existing project.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 20
Project Management
3. In the Copy project dialog, select the range of the project to be copied.
4. To copy the entire project with all reports, select the Entirely incl. report
option.
5. To copy the entire project without reports, select the Entirely without report
option.
6. To copy the entire project without reports and without pages, select the Only
header data option.
7. To copy only logic pages, select the Only logic pages option.
8. Next to the Target project field, click [...] and, in the Copy to dialog, enter the
storage location and the name of the target project.
9. Click [OK].
EPLAN copies the *.elk project file and the associated project directory
EPLAN Training 21
Project Management
*.edb to the target directory.
Note:
You can also select and copy several projects. In this case, the Copy project dialog
opens several times, one after the other.
EPLAN Training 22
Project Management
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 23
Project Management
3. In the New sScheme dialog, in the Name field, enter a new meaningful name
for the filter.
If the Name field already contains the name of an existing filter, then
overwrite this entry.
4. In the Description field, enter text describing the filter in more detail and click
[OK].
EPLAN Training 24
Project Management
5. In the Filter dialog, to the right above the table, click (New).
EPLAN Training 25
Project Management
7. Click [...] in the Value column.
EPLAN Training 26
Project Management
8. Select a directory from the Browse for folder dialog and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 27
Project Management
9. To enter a property as a criterion, in the Filter dialog, to the right above the
table, click (New).
10. Select the desired property from the Criteria selection dialog and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 28
Project Management
11. Click Operator column, and select an operator to link the property to a value.
12. Enter a value into the Value column and press [Enter]..
EPLAN creates a new line. You can enter further filter criteria in this line.
EPLAN Training 29
Project Management
2. Select the Active check box.
EPLAN displays all projects satisfying the filter criteria in the tree structure.
EPLAN Training 30
Project Management
1. Select the desired project from the tree structure in the Project management
dialog.
EPLAN Training 31
Project Management
If you work with a project management database then you can also insert and delete
project properties from the page navigator. The changes are adopted in the project
management database and can be further edited in the project management.
Preconditions:
You have selected a project management database.
EPLAN Training 32
Project Management
2. To switch to editing mode, click [Edit].
2. Click (New).
The properties are transferred onto the Properties tab. Properties whose
values contain automatically generated entries are displayed in gray and
cannot be changed from this location.
4. To edit the value of a property, click the Value column and enter the value.
EPLAN Training 33
Project Management
5. Click [Save].
3. Click (Delete).
EPLAN Training 34
Project Management
4. Click [Save].
EPLAN Training 35
Project Management
EPLAN Training 36
Project Management
4. Press [Enter].
Warning:
Data loss. If you have deleted a project then you can no longer restore that project.
Before deleting a project, make absolutely sure that you no longer need the data.
EPLAN Training 37
Project Management
Preconditions:
The company-specific project structure has been defined under Options >
Settings > Company > Compare properties > Project structure (default).
Under Options > Settings > Company > Compare properties > General is
defined what entry properties should be checked.
2. Select the desired project from the project's left tree structure in the Project
management dialog.
EPLAN Training 38
Project Management
3. Select [Extras] > Compare properties.
In the Project checks column in the Project comparison line, the date,
version number, build number, and number of messages generated are
displayed.
EPLAN Training 39
Project Management
2. Select the menu item Project data > Messages > Management.
EPLAN Training 40
Data Backup
Data Backup
EPLAN Training 1
Project Structure
Project Structure
EPLAN Training 1
Project Structure
EPLAN Training 2
Project Structure
Page structure and device structure together can only be defined when creating a
project using the project wizard! In addition to this, it is possible to subsequently
change the device structure using the project properties dialog or the project
management dialog.
You define the page and device structures using identifier schemes. The use of the
various identifier blocks is defined in these schemes, which you fill with the
appropriate structure identifiers. EPLAN provides pre-defined identifier schemes. In
addition to this, you can define user-defined identifier schemes for your own project
structures.
Precondition:
You are creating a new project using Project> New (Wizard) and are currently in the
project wizard in the Create project dialog. You have selected a template and have
clicked [Next] until the Structure tab is in the foreground.
EPLAN Training 3
Project Structure
1. Select one of the available identifier schemes from the Page structure drop-
down list, or click [...], in order to specify a user-defined page structure in the
subsequent Page structure dialog.
2. Select one of the available designation schemes from a drop-down list for a
device, for instance for General devices, or click [...] in order to specify a
user-defined device structure in the following dialog, Device structure.
EPLAN Training 4
Project Structure
4. If you would like to use sub-identifiers, use [...] and then select a separator in
the subsequent dialog.
5. Use the Superior check box to define whether terminal strips, plugs, cables,
and / or interruption points are to be handled in reports according to the
default identifier scheme or as fully numbered devices.
6. Click [Next] or [Back] to make further settings or click [Finish] to create the
new project with the selected structure.
EPLAN Training 5
Project Structure
Precondition:
You are in the Structure tab of the Create project (project wizard) dialog.
1. Click [...] next to the page structure field or next to one of the device fields.
2. In the Page structure dialog, or the Device structure dialog, click (New).
3. In the subsequent New scheme dialog, define a new scheme and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 6
Project Structure
The dialog is then closed. In the Page structure or Device structure
dialogs, all identifier blocks can now be edited.
4. Use the drop-down list to assign every identifier block one of the three
possible properties "Identifying", "Describing" or "Not available".
EPLAN Training 7
Project Structure
5. If you wish to use a project structure according to the power station identifier
system (KKS), in the Page structure dialog, use the Document type in the
front check box to set the position of the "Document type" identifier block.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN saves your settings in the new identifier scheme. The Page
structure or Device structure dialog is then closed.
.
Mounting location +
+
Higher-level function number User-defined
Blank
Document type
&
User-defined User-defined User-defined
Note:
Prefixes and separators for identifier blocks can only be selected, or user-defined
entered, when the respective identifier block was specified with the "Identifying" or
"Describing" property when the new identifier scheme was created.
Proceed as follows:
Precondition:
You have created a new scheme for the page or device structure. You are in the
Structure tab of the Create project dialog.
2. In the Extended project structures dialog, select a main separator for the
functional assignment, higher-level function number, document type,
and user-defined identifier blocks, or enter an identifier of you own choice
where this is permitted.
3. Proceed in the same manner for the separator for the sub-identifier.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN adopts the prefix and separator settings for each identifier block.
Note:
The following prefix and separator characters may not be used for identifier blocks
because they are already used for other purposes:
\ Directory structure
Precondition:
You have selected a project in the tree view of the page navigator.
EPLAN Training 10
Project Structure
1. In the Project settings: 'project name' dialog, select the Structure tab.
2. Click [Edit].
All fields for the device structure can now be edited. The field for the page
structure remains grayed-out and can't be edited.
3. Select one of the available designation schemes from a drop-down list for a
device, for instance for General devices, or click [...] in order to specify a
user-defined device structure in the following dialog, Device structure.
EPLAN Training 11
Project Structure
4. If desired, repeat the selection for additional devices.
5. If you would like to use sub-identifiers, use [...] and then select a separator in
the subsequent dialog.
6. Use the Superior check box to define whether terminal strips, plugs, cables,
and / or interruption points are to be handled in reports according to the
default identifier scheme or as fully numbered devices.
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 12
Project Structure
Precondition:
In the navigator dialog Pages - 'project name' you have selected a page from the
source project.
EPLAN Training 13
Project Structure
1. Select Popup menu > Copy.
EPLAN Training 14
Project Structure
2. Open the target project.
The Adjust page structure dialog opens. The page names of the source
and target pages and the appropriate identifier structures of both projects are
listed here.
EPLAN Training 15
Project Structure
4. If the target project has an identifier structure with a higher hierarchy structure
than the target project, then you must enter the appropriate structure
identifiers for the missing identifier blocks of the pages to be copied.
6. In the Number pages dialog, select the numbering method for the pages to be
inserted and click [OK].
7. If you wish to discard the selected numbering settings and return to the
original settings, select [Reset].
8. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 16
Project Structure
EPLAN inserts the pages into the target project, with adjusted identifiers
and numbering.
EPLAN Training 17
Project Structure
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have specified the project structure.
Page> Navigator
EPLAN Training 18
Project Structure
EPLAN Training 19
Project Structure
3. Select Projects> 'project name'> Display> Project structure.
4. To hide the structure identifiers for an identifier block, select the desired
identifier block and deselect the check box in front of it.
5. To reveal the structure identifiers for an identifier block, select the desired
identifier block and select the check box in front of it.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 20
Project Structure
4. To change the ordering of the identifier blocks, select an identifier block and
click (Move up) or (Move down) until the identifier block is at the desired
position.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 21
Project Structure
EPLAN Training 22
Project Wizard
Project Wizard
EPLAN Training 1
Project Wizard
EPLAN Training 2
Project Wizard
Precondition:
3. Next to the Templates field, click [...] to select a template for the project.
EPLAN Training 3
Project Wizard
4. In the Open dialog, switch to the directory Templates\EPLAN.
EPLAN Training 4
Project Wizard
7. To define a different storage location for the project, next to the Storage
location field, click [...].
EPLAN Training 5
Project Wizard
8. In the Find Folder dialog, select the directory where you want to save the new
project and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 6
Project Wizard
9. To check or modify the settings from the template for the project, click [Next].
The PPE tab opens. You can extend a project with PPE functionality.
The Structure tab will open and you can define the page and device
structure.
11. To accept all further settings from the template without changes, click [Finish].
EPLAN Training 7
Project Wizard
Precondition:
Project > New (Wizard). You have specified all of the settings in the Project tab and
clicked [Next].
1. In the PPE tab select the Create PPE project check box.
6. To define which settings and data are to be accepted from the PPE template,
in the Apply from template group box select or deselect the Property
groups of PCT loops / PCT loop elements, Configuration of properties
and Forms check boxes.
EPLAN Training 8
Project Wizard
7. To check or customize further settings, click [Next].
The Structure tab will open, where you can specify the page and device
structure.
EPLAN Training 9
Project Wizard
Precondition:
Project > New (Wizard). In the Project, and PPE tabs, you have defined all settings
and have clicked [Next].
1. To change the page structure, select an identifier scheme for the page
structure from the Pages drop-down list in the Structure tab.
2. To define editable separators for main identifiers and classification points for
sub-identifiers, next to the Separators field, click [...].
3. To define the device structure, select an identifier scheme from the General
Devices drop-down list.
EPLAN Training 10
Project Wizard
4. Select the identifier schemes for all further desired devices (terminal strips,
plugs, black boxes, PLC / bus boxes, cables, interruption points, busbars, fluid
devices, fluid distributors) in the same manner.
5. To treat terminal strips, plugs, cables and interruption points as fully numbered
devices, independently of the selected identifier scheme, select each Superior
check box.
The Page structure / Device structure dialog opens, where you can
define a user-defined project structure.
The Numbering tab will open, where you can define a plot frame and
numbering.
EPLAN Training 11
Project Wizard
8. To accept all further settings without changes, click [Finish].
EPLAN Training 12
Project Wizard
Precondition:
Project > New (Wizard). In the Project, PPE, and Structure tabs, you have defined
all settings and have clicked [Next].
EPLAN Training 13
Project Wizard
3. Select the file type Plot frame *.fn1, and select a file.
4. To see a preview of the plot frame, select the Preview check box.
5. Click on [Open].
2. To number the paths sequentially across page boundaries, select the option
Numbered consecutively (project-oriented).
EPLAN Training 14
Project Wizard
EPLAN Training 15
Project Wizard
2. To create or customize a format, click [...].
EPLAN Training 16
Project Wizard
EPLAN Training 17
Project Wizard
2. To create or customize a format, click [...].
EPLAN Training 18
Project Wizard
3. To check or customize further settings, click [Next].
The Properties tab will open, where you can define project properties.
EPLAN Training 19
Project Wizard
Precondition:
Project > New (Wizard). In the Project, PPE, Structure, and Numbering tabs, you
have defined all settings and have clicked [Next].
1. To filter the project properties view, select a category in the Category field of
the Properties tab.
EPLAN Training 20
Project Wizard
3. In the Property selection dialog, select a property and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 21
Project Wizard
4. To change the property, click the corresponding line in the Value column,
enter the new value and press [ENTER].
EPLAN Training 22
Project Wizard
6. To check or customize further settings, click [Next].
The Schematic tab will open, where you can define the first schematic
page.
EPLAN Training 23
Project Wizard
Precondition:
Project > New (Wizard). In the Project, PPE, Structure, Numbering, and
Properties tabs, you have defined all settings and have clicked [Next].
EPLAN Training 24
Project Wizard
2. To use an existing structure identifier, select one in the subsequent dialog and
click [OK].
3. To create a new structure identifier, enter the desired text for the structure
identifier in the fields of the available identifier blocks.
EPLAN Training 25
Project Wizard
The project-related settings for the new project will be displayed in all
EPLAN Training 26
Project Wizard
subordinate tree structure levels. You can keep these settings or change them
as needed.
EPLAN Training 27
Project Wizard
EPLAN Training 28
Compressing the Project
EPLAN Training 1
Compressing the Project
EPLAN Training 2
Compressing the Project
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 3
Compressing the Project
3. In the New Scheme dialog, in the Name field, enter a name for your new
scheme. In the Description field, enter a descriptive text for the scheme, then
click [OK].
4. To select the project data for the Compression settings, in the Settings:
Compression dialog, in the Data to be compressed field, select the check
box for a layer.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 4
Compressing the Project
1. In the Compress project dialog in the Settings field, select a scheme for the
scope of compression.
2. To exclude project data from compression, select a filter from the Filter field,
and select the Active check box.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 5
Compressing the Project
EPLAN Training 6
Data Backup
Data Backup
EPLAN Training 1
Data Backup
EPLAN Training 2
Data Backup
1 Backing up Projects
Projects can be backed up from the page navigator and from the project
management.
Precondition:
1. In the Back up projects dialog, enter a descriptive text for the project backup
into the Description field.
EPLAN Training 3
Data Backup
2. Select whether you wish to save additionally, file-off for external editing, or
archive the project from the Method drop-down list.
5. Click [OK].
Note:
EPLAN notes these settings for each project and offers them again during later
backups.
Preconditions:
You have set up the project management.
1. Select the desired projects from the tree structure in the Project management
dialog.
EPLAN Training 4
Data Backup
2. Select Popup menu > Back up.
3. In the Back up projects dialog, define the settings for the backup.
EPLAN Training 5
Data Backup
4. Click [OK].
The projects are compressed, one after the other, and backed up to the
specified directory (or e-mailed). A progress bar is displayed allowing you to
cancel the process.
5. Click [OK] in the window that informs you about the status of the data backup.
EPLAN Training 6
Data Backup
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 7
Data Backup
The packing procedure will commence and a status bar will be displayed
with the option of canceling the process.
3. Click [OK] in the window that informs you about the status of the packing
process.
Preconditions:
You have set up the project management.
1. Select the desired projects from the tree structure in the Project management
dialog.
EPLAN Training 8
Data Backup
2. Select Popup menu > Pack.
The packing procedure will commence and a status bar will be displayed
with the option of canceling the process.
3. Click [OK] in the window that informs you about the status of the packing
process.
The packed projects are stored in the project directory with an *.elp
extension. Projects that were open during the packing process are closed.
1. Select the entry "Packed EPLAN project (*.elp)" in the Files of type field in the
Open project dialog.
EPLAN Training 9
Data Backup
2. Switch to the directory where the project is stored and select the desired
project.
3. Click [Open].
The project is unpacked and a status bar is displayed with the option of
canceling the process. If you have opened the page navigator, then the project
is displayed there.
Tip:
You can also open a packed project by double-clicking on a project with the *.elp
file name extension. The project is automatically unpacked and opened.
Precondition:
In the Open project dialog the file type "Packed EPLAN project (*.elp)" is
preset, so that the packed projects are offered directly.
EPLAN Training 10
Data Backup
2. Select the desired project in the Open project dialog. If appropriate, change to
a different directory.
3. Click [Open].
Tip:
In the project management you can unpack a selected packed project by using
[Organize] > Unpack.
EPLAN Training 11
Data Backup
Warning:
In order to exchange e-mails, an e-mail editor must be installed and correctly set up
on your computer.
You can only send one project at a time via e-mail. When a project is sent, the project
properties remain unchanged; the write-protection of a project is also retained. The
information that this is a filed off project is also sent.
You can send a project via e-mail from the page navigator or from the project
management.
Preconditions:
You have selected the desired project in the page navigator.
Under Options > Settings > User > Data backup > Settings > Default
settings you configured the presettings for the Medium "E-mail".
The project is split according to the settings into packed files of the
specified size, your installed e-mail editor is opened and the appropriate
number of e-mails are created.
3. Click [Send].
EPLAN Training 12
Data Backup
4. In EPLAN click [OK] in the window that informs you about the status of the
data backup.
Preconditions:
You have opened the project management (Project > Management) and
selected the desired projects.
Under Options > Settings > User > Data backup > Settings > Default
settings you configured the presettings for the Medium "E-mail".
The first selected project is split according to the settings into packed files
of the specified size, your installed e-mail editor is opened, and the
appropriate number of e-mails are created.
3. Click [Send].
The project is sent and the next selected project is split according to the
settings into packed files of the specified size, your installed e-mail editor is
opened, and the appropriate number of e-mails are created.
5. Click [Send].
EPLAN Training 13
Data Backup
6. Proceed in a similar way for all additional selected projects.
7. In EPLAN click [OK] in the window that informs you about the status of the
data backup.
Precondition:
If the project is split into several e-mails, then the files must all be stored in a
common directory.
EPLAN is started (if necessary), and the Restore project dialog is opened.
2. Define whether the project is to be restored to the project directory under its
original name or using a new name.
If the project is split into several parts, EPLAN recognizes this and
automatically combines the files.
EPLAN Training 14
Data Backup
EPLAN Training 15
Multi-user Operation
Multi-user Operation
EPLAN Training 1
Multi-user Operation
EPLAN Training 2
Multi-user Operation
The Edit projects exclusively check box must be deselected for multiuser
operation (Options > Settings > User > Display > General). In addition, the
users working in multiuser operation must have their user information stored in
the settings (Options > Settings > User > Display > User code / address).
In multiuser operation the Multiuser conflict dialog will appear if a conflict arises.
Use the dialog to send an e-mail to other users that are currently working on the
same project data.
3. If you haven't run your e-mail editor yet, you must first select a profile for the
information service from a subsequent dialog. The e-mail editor will only start
after this has been performed
Finally, the e-mail program on your computer will run. The e-mail address
EPLAN Training 3
Multi-user Operation
field is already automatically filled in and the subject line is filled in with
"Multiuser conflict".
You will then return to the Multiuser conflict dialog. After closing the dialog by
clicking [Close], the project data is displayed in the corresponding dialog. You can
read the data here, but not edit it.
3. If you haven't run your e-mail editor yet, you must first select a profile for the
information service from a subsequent dialog. The e-mail editor will only start
EPLAN Training 4
Multi-user Operation
after this has been performed
Finally, the e-mail program on your computer will run. All selected e-mail
addresses will already be in the address field and the subject field will be filled
in with "Multiuser conflict".
4. Enter your text and send the mail by clicking [Send] to all of the other users.
EPLAN Training 5
Multi-user Operation
EPLAN Training 6
Page Navigator
Page Navigator
EPLAN Training 1
Page Navigator
EPLAN Training 2
Page Navigator
Precondition:
The New page dialog is opened. If a page was selected in the Pages -
<Project Name> navigator dialog, then its properties are loaded into the
dialog. If a structure level was selected, the properties of the first page below
this level are loaded. Only the grid defined in the plot frame is adopted.
2. Click [Clear fields] if you would like to clear the data fields of the new page,
i.e., delete their content.
The contents of all of the data fields are deleted. Only the page type of the
EPLAN Training 3
Page Navigator
currently selected page is retained. The automatically suggested page name is
also retained. Scale and grid are taken from the plot frame and are also
retained.
3. Enter the properties for the new page. You can select the structure identifiers
(such as higher-level function and mounting location) from the existing values
using [...] next to the Full page name. You can also manually enter the
identifiers and create new ones in the process.
5. If you would like to create several pages, then click [Apply] several times.
With every click on [Apply], EPLAN generates a new page. Your user code
is automatically entered into the Creator field.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 4
Page Navigator
EPLAN checks if the page name that you have entered already exists and,
if so, an appropriate message is displayed, in which you can choose another
name.
Note:
Once you have entered a new structure identifier, EPLAN then opens the Place
Identifiers dialog. Click [OK] to add the new identifier to the database.
Tip:
You can use the button on the standard toolbar to create new pages.
In the Pages - <Project Name> dialog, select Popup menu > New. Any page or
structure level may be selected when you do this.
EPLAN Training 5
Page Navigator
2. Select Popup menu > Delete.
After a security check, EPLAN deletes the selected pages from the project.
Note:
Positioned items are completely removed when the page is deleted.
Non-placed items are not removed, because they are not associated with the deleted
pages.
Tip:
The page opened in the graphical editor can also be selected using Edit > Select >
Page and then deleted using [Del]. The page navigator does not need to be
open for this.
EPLAN Training 6
Page Navigator
Precondition:
You have opened the Pages - <Project Name> navigator dialog and selected a
page in the tree or list view.
The page is opened in the graphical editor. The page name is displayed as
a tab below the graphic, assuming that you have activated the workbook view
(View > Workbook).
When you open a second page, this is displayed in the graphical editor and the first
page is automatically closed.
Tip:
To open a page, you can either double-click in it, or press the [Enter] key, or select
Popup menu > Open.
EPLAN Training 7
Page Navigator
A tab is displayed below the graphic for every opened page, assuming that
you have activated the workbook view (View > Workbook). You can quickly
switch between pages by clicking these tabs.
A schematic page can only be edited by a single user. As soon as a user opens a
page, then it is locked. A second user can only open this page read-only and
receives a message stating this fact.
The message contains the Windows login name and the long name of the first user,
so that the second user knows who has locked the page and can then discuss this
with them if necessary.
Precondition:
You have opened a page in the graphical editor or selected pages in the Pages -
<Project Name> dialog of the page navigator.
EPLAN Training 8
Page Navigator
1. Select the menu item Page > Close.
Tip:
In the graphical editor, you can close the current page by clicking on the standard
toolbar or by pressing the [Ctrl] + [F4] keys at the same time.
EPLAN Training 9
Page Navigator
A check mark next to the menu item shows whether this is active or not.
Preconditions:
EPLAN Training 10
Page Navigator
You have opened the graphical preview.
You have opened a project and selected the project or individual pages in the
Pages - <Project Name> navigator dialog.
The page is then opened in the graphical editor and the page preview also
remains open.
Precondition:
1. Select the menu item View > Graphical preview a second time, or click in
the graphical preview.
EPLAN Training 11
Page Navigator
Precondition:
You have selected at least one page in the Pages - <Project name> dialog.
EPLAN Training 12
Page Navigator
2. If you work with multiple clipboards (definable in the user settings), then in the
Clipboard dialog, enter a description for the content of the relevant clipboard
and click [OK].
If you work with multiple clipboards, then EPLAN opens the Paste dialog.
Select the desired page and click [OK].
In the Adjust page structure dialog, the page number, sheet number, and
structure identifier of the source and target pages are displayed.
4. Change the page number and / or the structure identifier if you would not like
to overwrite the existing pages, and deselect the Overwrite check box.
EPLAN Training 13
Page Navigator
5. Select [Number] to open the Number pages dialog and renumber the copied
pages.
6. Click [OK].
If the Overwrite check box is selected, and pages with the same name
already exist that would be overwritten, then a query dialog is displayed. Click
[Yes] to overwrite the pages. Click [No] to return to the Adjust page
structure dialog and change your settings.
If you have selected With prompt under Options > Settings > Projects >
"Project name" > Devices > Numbering (online), then the Insertion mode
dialog will appear. You specify here as to how device tags should be
numbered on the copied pages.
7. Click [OK].
The pages are inserted into the project, and the structure identifiers and DT
are modified appropriately according to the entered data.
Tip:
The page opened in the graphical editor can also be selected using Edit > Select >
Page. The page navigator does not need to be open for this.
EPLAN Training 14
Page Navigator
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 15
Page Navigator
Precondition:
You have selected at least one page in the Pages - <Project Name> dialog.
In the Copy pages dialog, the source and target projects are displayed in
two tree views. Initially, the current project is displayed in both fields, since
copy operations most often take place within the same project.
2. In the left field Selected project select the source project where the data is to
be copied from. This can be an already open project or one that has not yet
EPLAN Training 16
Page Navigator
been opened. Using [...] you can open the project selection dialog and choose
any desired project from any directory.
3. In the right field Current project chose the target project where the data is to
be copied to. This must be a project that is already open in the page navigator.
4. If necessary, set a Filter for the source project to display only specific project
pages.
5. If necessary, use the Page Information field to select which page properties
are to be displayed in the table below this.
EPLAN Training 17
Page Navigator
The properties of the (first) selected page are displayed in the properties
table.
6. Select the Preview check box if you would like to see a preview of the (first)
selected page in the graphical preview window.
7. In the left field Selected project, select the pages that you would like to copy,
and then copy these using the arrow button into the target project in the right
field Current project.
If you work with multiple clipboards (definable in the user settings), then in
the Clipboard dialog, enter a description for the content of the relevant
clipboard and click [OK]. The Insert dialog is then opened. Select the desired
page and click [OK].
In the Adjust page structure dialog, the page number, sheet number, and
structure identifier of the source and target pages are displayed.
You can either retain the page numbers and structure identifiers, or change
them. If the pages already exist in the target project, then the Overwrite check
box is automatically selected. Deselect this if you do not want to overwrite the
pages, and change the page properties.
EPLAN Training 18
Page Navigator
8. Select [Number] to open the Number pages dialog and renumber the copied
pages.
9. Click [OK].
If there are pages with the same names in the target project that would
consequently be overwritten, you will be shown a prompt. If you click [Yes] the
pages in the target project will be overwritten. Click [No] to return to the
Adjust page structure dialog and change your settings.
If you have selected With prompt under Options > Settings > Projects >
"Project name" > Devices > Numbering then the Insertion mode dialog will
appear. You specify here as to how device tags should be numbered on the
copied pages.
The pages are inserted into the project, and the structure identifiers and DT
are modified appropriately according to the entered data.
EPLAN Training 19
Page Navigator
The procedure for copying pages is described below. When inserting page macros,
you can customize the page structure in the same manner.
Precondition:
You have selected one or more pages in the Pages - <Project Name> navigator
dialog.
EPLAN Training 20
Page Navigator
2. In the Pages - <Project Name> navigator dialog, click the position where the
copied pages are to be inserted and select the menu item Edit < Paste>. (You
can also use the Copy and Paste menu items from the popup menu).
3. In the Adjust page structure dialog, change the page number, sheet number
and / or the structure identifier. The page numbers can be either manually
entered or, by clicking the [Number] item, you call up the Number pages
dialog, in which you can renumber the pages according to the settings defined
there.
EPLAN Training 21
Page Navigator
4. To change the structure identifiers, click the appropriate field in the table. You
can either manually enter (new) identifiers or open a selection dialog using [...]
.
The selection dialog contains all of the existing identifiers in the project.
5. Select the desired structure identifier from the selection dialog and click [OK].
6. Select the Overwrite check box if pages of the same name in the target
project are to be overwritten.
EPLAN Training 22
Page Navigator
7. Click [OK].
If you have not made any changes, then EPLAN creates the structure
identifiers of the source pages in the target project.
If you have entered structure identifiers that are not present in the target
project, then the Position identifiers dialog is displayed before copying. Here
you define the sequencing of the structure identifiers in the target project.
If there are pages with the same names in the target project that would
consequently be overwritten, you will be shown a prompt. If you click [Yes] the
pages in the target project will be overwritten. Click [No] to return to the
Adjust page structure dialog and change your settings.
If you have selected With prompt under Options > Settings > Projects >
"Project name" > Devices > Numbering (online), then the Insertion mode
dialog will appear. You specify here as to how device tags should be
numbered on the copied pages.
8. Click [OK].
The pages are inserted into the project, and the structure identifiers and DT
are modified appropriately according to the entered data.
Example:
EPLAN Training 23
Page Navigator
When pages are copied from a project containing structure identifiers (e.g. with
"higher-level function" and "mounting location" identifier blocks) into a project having
a page structure using "higher-level function identifying" and "mounting location
descriptive" identifier schemes, then you should renumber the pages. Without
renumbering, the page names may no longer be unique since the "mounting location"
identifier blocks are now descriptive only.
EPLAN Training 24
Page Navigator
7 Numbering Pages
Precondition:
You have opened a project and selected one or morel pages in the Pages - <Project
Name> navigator dialog.
The Number command allows you to subsequently renumber pages. In this manner,
pages within a project can be renamed and thus moved.
For automated allocation of page names, EPLAN suggests the next available page
name in the target project. Subpages are automatically incremented. For DIN
projects, the suggestion is group referenced. You can either retain the suggested
(start) page names, or change them. For several pages, you can also customize the
increment defaults.
1. In the Number Pages dialog, enter a new starting number and the increment
size (and if necessary, further page numbering entries).
2. Click [OK].
If your choice of start number and increment means that page names will
be overwritten, then the Page numbering: Preview of Result dialog is opened.
EPLAN Training 25
Page Navigator
1. Select the desired page in the tree or list view. Multiple selection is possible.
4. Click [OK].
Note:
Changes to identifying page properties, such as the higher-level function, means that
all of the DT's for the same higher-level function on the page will also be renamed.
EPLAN Training 26
Page Navigator
Precondition:
You have opened the Pages - <Project Name> navigator dialog and opened (at
least) one project.
1. In the Select pages dialog, select the desired pages from the Available
pages field.
If structure identifiers are selected then all subpages are also selected.
2. Use the arrow button to move the selected pages to the right side.
EPLAN Training 27
Page Navigator
1. In the Select pages dialog, click [...] below the Available pages field.
3. Set the filter criteria to be used as a prefilter in the tree. To perform this, enter
search terms into the page properties fields. You can use MS Access regular
expressions. The prefilters can be used individually or combined with each
other. Multiple lines are AND combined; an OR combination is achieved by
entering an OR line.
4. Click [OK].
5. Use the arrow button to move the selection to the right side.
Date prefilter
Extended entries can be analyzed in the date fields:
EPLAN Training 28
Page Navigator
All pages containing a date entry older than a fixed date:
All pages containing a date entry newer than a fixed date:
All pages within a fixed timeframe.
Precondition:
In the Select pages dialog, you have already selected pages shown in the Filtered
pages field.
3. Set the filter criteria to be used as a postfilter in the tree. You can also use the
regular expressions in MS Access and / or combine several filters with each
other.
4. Click [OK].
In the Select pages dialog, the Filtered pages field will only display those
pages that match the postfilter criteria.
EPLAN Training 29
Page Navigator
EPLAN Training 30
DXF / DWG Interface
EPLAN Training 1
DXF / DWG Interface
5 Allocating Fonts..........................................................................................14
EPLAN Training 2
DXF / DWG Interface
Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > DXF / DWG export and import
1. In the dialog Settings: DXF / DWG export and import dialog, select a
scheme from the drop-down list, and the settings in the selected scheme will
automatically be loaded.
3. In the Output directory field select the default directory in which EPLAN
should output the files for DXF / DWG exports, or click [...] to select the
directory.
4. In the File type drop-down list, select the file type to be used when exporting.
EPLAN Training 3
DXF / DWG Interface
5. Select the desired ACAD format version from the Style version drop-down
list.
6. In the Scaling factor field specify the enlargement / reduction scaling factor
for the DXF / DWG files.
8. In the Select AutoCAD line definition file dialog, select the file defining the
line pattern for adoption by ACAD and click [Open].
10. in the Select AutoCAD Plot Style File dialog, select the file defining the plot
style for adoption by ACAD and click [Open].
11. In the Generate file names group box, specify the default method for
allocating names when exporting DXF / DWG files.
12. In the Block properties field specify how invisible ACAD attributes, placed
EPLAN symbols, plot frames, and standard forms should be handled.
EPLAN Training 4
DXF / DWG Interface
14. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 5
DXF / DWG Interface
Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > DXF / DWG export and import
1. In the dialog Settings: DXF / DWG export and import dialog, select a
scheme from the drop-down list, and the settings in the selected scheme will
automatically be loaded.
EPLAN Training 6
DXF / DWG Interface
2. Select the Import tab.
3. In the Initial directory field specify the default directory for import, or click [...]
to select it.
5. In the Start page field of the Generate pages group box, select the page
number under which the imported page should be created in the page
navigator for the project.
6. When importing more than one file, specify the desired value for the page
numbers in the Increment field.
EPLAN Training 7
DXF / DWG Interface
7. In the Correction settings group box, specify how the drawing size should be
handled when importing. If you select the Manual correction option here, the
Import formatting dialog will open during the import, in which you can then
revise the automatically determined drawing limits.
9. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 8
DXF / DWG Interface
3 Allocating Layers
To be able to uniquely recognize a logical element on a page, the DXF / DWG file
must already be set up using different layers. Proceed as follows in order to assign
layer names used in AutoCAD to the default EPLAN standard and project layers:
Precondition:
In the Settings: DXF / DWG export and import dialog you have selected a scheme
from the drop-down list. The default settings in the chosen scheme are automatically
loaded.
Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > DXF / DWG export and import
1. In the dialog Settings: DXF / DWG export and import dialog select the
Layers tab.
2. If required, click (New) on the toolbar to the right above the table in order to
create a new row (with default values) after the last entry in the table.
EPLAN Training 9
DXF / DWG Interface
3. In the Name field select (by clicking on the arrow in the field) the name of the
EPLAN layer that you would like to assign an ACAD layer, for example
EPLAN300.
4. Overwrite the default layer name in the CAD name field with the CAD layer
name.
5. Select / deselect the Visible, Save, and Print check boxes. The default
settings for these properties are taken from the entries in layer management
(under Options > Layer management).
6. Click [Add], in order to automatically add all of the layers in the current project
to the table and edit the assignments. If layer allocations have already been
defined, then these are not overwritten by this function.
EPLAN Training 10
DXF / DWG Interface
8. Click [OK].
Note:
Layers not contained in this assignment table are transferred unchanged and an
attempt is made to also transfer all of the layer properties (line thickness, text size,
etc.).
EPLAN Training 11
DXF / DWG Interface
4 Allocating Colors
Proceed as follows to specify the allocation of CAD- and EPLAN-specific colors:
Precondition:
In the Settings: DXF / DWG export and import dialog you have selected a scheme
from the drop-down list. The default settings in the chosen scheme are automatically
loaded.
Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > DXF / DWG export and import
1. In the dialog Settings: DXF / DWG export and import dialog select the
Colors tab.
2. If required, click (New) on the toolbar to the right above the table in order to
create a new row (with default values) after the last entry in the table.
EPLAN Training 12
DXF / DWG Interface
3. In the EPLAN column click [...] to open the color palette.
4. Select the EPLAN color that you would like to assign and click [OK].
5. In the CAD column specify the associated CAD color, for example "250".
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 13
DXF / DWG Interface
5 Allocating Fonts
Proceed as follows to specify the allocation of CAD- and EPLAN-specific fonts:
Precondition:
In the Settings: DXF / DWG export and import dialog you have selected a scheme
from the drop-down list. The default settings in the chosen scheme are automatically
loaded.
Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > DXF / DWG export and import
1. In the dialog Settings: DXF / DWG export and import dialog select the
Fonts tab.
2. If required, click (New) on the toolbar to the right above the table in order to
create a new row (with default values) after the last entry in the table.
EPLAN Training 14
DXF / DWG Interface
3. In the EPLAN column, click the arrow box in the field to display all EPLAN
fonts and select the one you would like to assign.
4. In the CAD column, specify the associated CAD font, e.g. "Standard".
5. In the Scaling column specify the desired scaling factor, for example"100".
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 15
DXF / DWG Interface
Precondition:
In the Settings: DXF / DWG export and import dialog you have selected a scheme
from the drop-down list. The default settings in the chosen scheme are automatically
loaded.
Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > DXF / DWG export and import
1. In the dialog Settings: DXF / DWG export and import dialog select the Line
types tab.
2. If required, click (New) on the toolbar to the right above the table in order to
create a new row (with default values) after the last entry in the table.
EPLAN Training 16
DXF / DWG Interface
3. In the EPLAN column click the arrow box in the field to display all EPLAN line
types and select the one you would like to assign (for example, "solid").
4. In the CAD column specify the associated CAD line type, for example
"Continuous".
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 17
DXF / DWG Interface
Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > DXF / DWG export and import
1. In the dialog Settings: DXF / DWG export and import dialog, select the
Block attribute tab.
2. In the Available properties list, select the element for whose properties you
wish to define an attribute definition.
EPLAN Training 18
DXF / DWG Interface
4. In the Attribute definition dialog, select the property and assign the new
name in the Attribute definition field.
5. If necessary, enter the input prompt text into the Prompt field and click [OK].
The Attribute definition dialog is closed and your entries are entered into
the Attribute definition table.
EPLAN Training 19
DXF / DWG Interface
8. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 20
DXF / DWG Interface
Precondition:
1. In the page navigator, select the pages of a project (or the entire project) that
you wish to export.
EPLAN Training 21
DXF / DWG Interface
2. Select the menu items Page > Export > DXF / DWG.
The DXF / DWG export dialog is opened. The chosen files are displayed in
the Source field.
EPLAN Training 22
DXF / DWG Interface
3. In the Scheme field, select an appropriate scheme from the drop-down list. Or
click [...] to open the Settings: DXF / DWG export and import dialog. You
can view the settings here for the standard scheme, and also create and edit
your own schemes. In the settings you also specify the file type (DXF or DWG)
for the export.
EPLAN Training 23
DXF / DWG Interface
4. In the Target field of the DXF / DWG export dialog, specify the target
directory for the files to be generated, or click [...] to select it interactively.
5. Select the Apply to entire project check box if in the first step you selected
individual pages of a project and would instead like to apply this selection to
the entire project.
6. Click [OK].
The DXF / DWG files are generated in the specified target directory
according to the <consecutive number>.DXF or
<consecutive_number>.DWG schemes. If DXF / DWG files already exist,
EPLAN starts the numbering with the next available number.
EPLAN Training 24
DXF / DWG Interface
Precondition:
1. In the DXF / DWG file selection dialog, specify in the Files of type field
whether only DXF or only DWG files, or both file types, should be displayed.
EPLAN Training 25
DXF / DWG Interface
2. If necessary, navigate to the directory containing DXF or DWG files. Select the
desired file(s) and click [Open].
The DXF / DWG import dialog is opened. The chosen files are displayed in
the Source field.
3. In the Scheme field of the DXF- / DWG import dialog, select an appropriate
scheme from the drop-down list. Or click [...] to open the Settings: DXF /
DWG export and import dialog. You can view the settings here for the
standard scheme, and also create and edit your own schemes.
4. Click [OK].
5. In the Assign pages dialog specify how new project pages are to be handled.
EPLAN Training 26
DXF / DWG Interface
6. Click [OK].
7. If under Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > DXF / DWG export and
import in the Import tab you have selected the option Manual correction,
then the Import formatting dialog will open, where you can then correct the
automatically determined drawing limits.
8. Click [OK].
The files are imported into the current project as newly generated graphic
pages.
Tip:
You can import DXF / DWG files using Drag & Drop, by dragging the selected DXF /
DWG files from Windows Explorer and dropping them into the page navigator of
your project.
EPLAN Training 27
DXF / DWG Interface
1. In the DXF / DWG file selection dialog, select the desired file and click
[Open]. (Multiple selection is not possible here.)
The DXF / DWG import dialog is opened. The selected files are displayed
in the Source field.
EPLAN Training 28
DXF / DWG Interface
2. In the Scheme field, select an appropriate scheme from the drop-down list. Or
click [...] to open the Settings: DXF / DWG export and import dialog. You
can view the settings here for the standard scheme, and also create and edit
your own schemes.
4. If under Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > DXF / DWG export and
import in the Import tab you have selected the option Manual correction,
then the Import formatting dialog will open, where you can then correct the
automatically determined drawing limits.
5. Click [OK].
6. Use the mouse to position the graphic from the file on the current page.
Note:
You can also insert DXF / DWG files into pages in the symbol editor and in the form
and plot frame editor. The menu path here is also Insert > Graphic > DXF / DWG.
Tip:
EPLAN Training 29
DXF / DWG Interface
You can import DXF / DWG files using Drag & Drop, by dragging the selected DXF /
DWG files from Windows Explorer and dropping them into the graphical editor
of your project.
EPLAN Training 30
DXF / DWG Interface
EPLAN Training 31
PDF File Export
EPLAN Training 1
PDF File Export
EPLAN Training 2
PDF File Export
Precondition:
1. In the page navigator, select the pages of a project (or the entire project) that
you wish to export.
EPLAN Training 3
PDF File Export
2. Select the menu item Page > Export > PDF.
EPLAN opens the PDF export dialog. The chosen files are displayed in the
Source field.
3. If necessary, in the PDF file field change the specified target directory and the
name of the PDF file to be created. The initial default is the documentation
directory DOC and the name of the selected project
(...\<Project.ebb>\DOC\<Project>.PDF). If necessary, select the Apply
to entire project check box if the entire project is to be exported as a PDF
and not just the selected pages. Click [OK] to close the dialog and begin the
export.
EPLAN then creates the PDF file. Regardless of the selection made
(individual project pages or an entire project), only one PDF file is created.
Note:
Adobe Acrobat Reader (minimum version 5.0) must be installed on your computer
in order to read an exported PDF file.
EPLAN Training 4
PDF File Export
EPLAN Training 5
Exporting Image Files
EPLAN Training 1
Exporting Image Files
EPLAN Training 2
Exporting Image Files
Precondition:
1. In the Pages - <Project name> dialog, select the pages of a project (or the
entire project) that you wish to export.
2. Select the menu item Page > Export > Image file.
EPLAN Training 3
Exporting Image Files
EPLAN opens the Export of image files dialog. The chosen files are
displayed in the Source field.
3. In the Scheme field, select an appropriate scheme for the image file export.
4. If required, change the specified target directory and define all of the project
pages, or only the marked pages that are to be exported.
5. Check the Black-and-white output check box to print all elements on the
project pages in black on a white background.
6. Click [OK].
If an entire project is marked for export, then a subdirectory with the name
of the project is created in the target directory and the image files are stored in
this subdirectory.
The image file(s) are named with the complete page name.
EPLAN Training 4
Exporting Image Files
Tip:
In the graphical editor, you can use Page > Export > Image file to export the
currently opened page.
Example:
In the Pages - <Project name> dialog, you have marked the project Project_1 and
exported the project pages as TIFF files.
The subdirectory Project_1 is created in the target directory. All pages in the project
are saved as TIFF files in this subdirectory.
EPLAN Training 5
Exporting Image Files
EPLAN Training 6
Printing
Printing
EPLAN Training 1
Printing
1 Printing Pages...............................................................................................3
EPLAN Training 2
Printing
1 Printing Pages
You can print single pages or all pages of a project. You have the option of changing
the output of the project pages by using the print settings.
Preconditions:
You have selected the desired number of pages (or the project) in the page
navigator in the tree or list view.
1. In the Print dialog in the Printer group box, select the desired printer from the
drop-down list.
2. In the Page range group box, you can determine whether you would like to
print the currently selected pages or all of the pages in the current project.
If you called up the Print dialog from the graphical editor, you can print either
the page currently in the foreground or all of the project pages.
EPLAN Training 3
Printing
4. Use [Settings] to open the Print settings dialog in order to change the other
settings there.
5. With [Print preview] you have the option of checking the results of your
settings before printing. You can use [Back] and [Next] to page through the
pages selected for printing.
EPLAN Training 4
Printing
6. Start the print process using [OK] in the Print dialog or with [Print] in the
Print preview dialog.
Note:
You can work on a different project while printing is going on in the background. Just
start multiple copies of EPLAN.
EPLAN Training 5
Printing
EPLAN Training 6
Path Function Texts
EPLAN Training 1
Path Function Texts
EPLAN Training 2
Path Function Texts
1 Inserting and Editing Path Function Texts .................................................6
1.1 Insert a path function text..........................................................................6
1.2 Edit path function text .............................................................................10
13 Editing Elements.........................................................................................34
17 Deleting Elements.......................................................................................40
17.1 Delete areas............................................................................................40
EPLAN Training 4
Path Function Texts
28.2 Draw polylines.........................................................................................61
28.3 Draw rectangles ......................................................................................62
EPLAN Training 5
Path Function Texts
Note:
Path function texts are only evaluated on schematic pages with multi-line or single-
line display. On all other types of page, path function texts are treated like graphical
texts.
On PLC overview pages, no path function text is evaluated, but the "Function text
(automatic)" property on PLC connection points and channel symbols - if no other
function text has been entered - determines the automatic function text of the
corresponding PLC connection point on the circuit diagram side.
Precondition:
1. In the Path funciton text tab of the Properties dialog, enter the desired text.
The popup menu provides you with many options to further edit the text. You
can, for instance, use the functions cut, copy, and paste, or insert line breaks
and special characters.
Note:
EPLAN Training 6
Path Function Texts
2.
3. On the Format tab, you can specify text properties such as size, color, and
orientation, along with the layer on which the path function text is stored.
EPLAN Training 7
Path Function Texts
4. In the Language tab, define whether the text is to be displayed in only one
language or in all of the display languages. (The translation module must be
licensed in order to display multiple languages.)
EPLAN Training 8
Path Function Texts
5. In the Border tab, you define whether the text is placed within an alignment
box and how it fits into the alignment box.
6. Click [OK].
7. Place the text in the desired path. Be sure that the insertion point of the text is
aligned with the insertion point of the component which should receive the
path function text.
EPLAN Training 9
Path Function Texts
2. In the Properties dialog, edit the text and its properties. Use the Path
function text, Format, and Language tabs as described under Insert a path
function text.
3. Click [OK].
The changes are adopted and are immediately visible on the page.
EPLAN Training 10
Path Function Texts
You can select the behavior of the cursor, for instance, select different increments to
be taken into account when moving the cursor with the keyboard, specify the
distance between grid points, or set different zoom levels.
The options Snap to grid and Object snap make it possible to orient elements
directly to the grid points or element points when drawing.
The option Design mode helps when placing elements exactly at specific
coordinates.
EPLAN Training 11
Path Function Texts
Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > General
1. In the Display field, you define whether the cursor is displayed as crosshairs
or as a "small cross".
2. You can use the Display crosshairs when placing symbols and macros
check box to specify regardless of the setting above how the cursor should
appear when placing symbols or macros.
3. Click [OK].
You can also affect the type of cursor displayed using the menu item View >
Crosshair for element selection in the graphical editor:
If this option is activated, then the predefined cursor display will always be used when
selecting elements. The cursor display can no longer be used to distinguish between
element selection and point entry.
If the option is deactivated, then the crosshairs are only displayed on the entry of
EPLAN Training 12
Path Function Texts
points. This makes it easier to distinguish between the entry of points and the
selection of elements.
EPLAN Training 13
Path Function Texts
For the Use logical coordinates setting, the step size is given in grid increments.
This depends on the grid increments used on the page. If the defined grid size is
(e.g.) 4 mm, then an increment setting of 1 means that the cursor jumps by 4 mm,
with a setting of 2 by 8 mm, etc. An increment setting less than 1 is not permitted.
For the Use graphical coordinates setting, the increment is defined in terms of the
drawing units (in mm or inches, depending on the settings).
Precondition:
1. Select the Use graphical coordinates check box to display the increments for
Graphical coordinates in the list fields.
Deselect the check box to display the increments for Logic coordinates.
2. Enter the desired increment into the Increment field, or select an entry from
the Personal increments or Recently used increments lists.
Note:
The lists show the default increments (defined in the user settings) and the last
EPLAN Training 14
Path Function Texts
10 increments used, where the entries in the Recently used increments are
overwritten, from top to bottom, with each new increment used.
3.
4. Click [OK].
The cursor can now only be moved using the keyboard in the increment
defined here.
1. Enter the letter for the relevant increment using the keyboard.
The cursor can now only be moved using the keyboard in the increment
defined here.
EPLAN Training 15
Path Function Texts
Precondition:
1. Select the menu item Options > Move base point, and position the cursor at
the position where the new base point origin is to be located.
Instead of the normal coordinate display in the status bar, either the
(absolute) DX and DY coordinates are displayed, or the (relative) DRX and
DRY coordinates. The setting remains until you open a new page or perform
the command again.
If you have (e.g.) activated the command for drawing a line, after having placing the
first line point, you can then enter either the absolute or relative coordinates. The
entered values are then used to define the coordinates of the endpoint of the line. If
the relative coordinate entry is started without having first defined a starting point,
then the entry is treated as an absolute coordinate. If no command is active, then the
cursor is positioned to the entered coordinates; this may also change the displayed
screen section.
EPLAN Training 16
Path Function Texts
Example:
You wish to draw a line, and place the first line point. For the endpoint of the line, you
wish to place a point that is 50 mm in the X direction, and 20 mm in the Y direction,
from a corner point. The command for drawing a line is still active. Activate the move
base point function and set the base point to the relevant corner point. In the relative
coordinates field, enter the values x=50 mm and y=20 mm; the endpoint of the line is
then placed at the desired position.
EPLAN Training 17
Path Function Texts
The size of the grid used (i.e. the clearance between the individual grid points) is
stored as a page property and displayed in the status bar. You can select one of the
default grid sizes from the drop-down list or enter you own values.
In the user settings, you can define up to five different grid sizes; in the graphical
editor, these can then be selected using the to buttons in the "View" toolbar.
Precondition:
Example:
EPLAN Training 18
Path Function Texts
EPLAN Training 19
Path Function Texts
1. Select the menu item Options > Snap to grid to switch the grid snap on and
off.
If the grid snap is activated, then all of the subsequent actions are
performed within the grid points.
In the status bar, the text "ON" or "OFF" in front of the grid size shows
whether the grid snap is switched on or off.
EPLAN Training 20
Path Function Texts
1. Select the objects and then select the menu item Edit > Other > Align on
grid.
The selected objects are realigned so that all of their important points (such
as line starting points, curve ends etc.) are on the grid.
EPLAN Training 21
Path Function Texts
Example:
In the following figure, insertion points (1) and element points (2) are both shown.
If the Object snap option is activated, then these points are used as snap points.
Graphical objects are then automatically joined at these points on insertion.
Precondition:
1. Select the menu item Options > Object snap to activate or deactivate this
option.
EPLAN Training 22
Path Function Texts
With the Design mode activated, do not use area selection for editing operations (i.e.
Move, Delete, Duplicate, etc.) on the elements to be changed, instead just click them.
To edit the element, define both the starting and target points for the action.
Precondition:
1. Select the menu item Options > Design mode to activate or deactivate this
option.
Example:
Assuming you would like to place the middle point of the rectangle on the starting
point of the line. To find the middle point, draw two auxiliary diagonal lines within the
rectangle.
You then select the menu item Edit > Move, and then select the rectangle.
EPLAN Training 23
Path Function Texts
Now select the starting point for moving by positioning the crosshairs on the
intersection of the diagonals and clicking.
Finally, select the target point by positioning the crosshairs on the desired point and
clicking. The rectangle is moved to the desired position and the middle point is on the
starting point of the line.
EPLAN Training 24
Path Function Texts
EPLAN Training 25
Path Function Texts
Precondition:
The cursor assumes the form of two arrows, indicating the direction setting.
EPLAN Training 26
Path Function Texts
Precondition:
1. Select the menu item View > Insertion points, or press the [i] key.
EPLAN Training 27
Path Function Texts
2. Select the menu item View > Insertion points, or press the [i] key again.
Example:
EPLAN Training 28
Path Function Texts
Precondition:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
The connection point directions of all symbols on the page are displayed
using small arrows.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 29
Path Function Texts
2. In the Layer management - <Project name> dialog, open the Property
placement list.
4. Deselect the Visible check box to hide the elements in the graphical editor.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
You have used the symbol editor to allocate both sets of connection point
designations and descriptions to the symbol.
1. Select the menu items Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" >
Graphical editing > General.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 30
Path Function Texts
Precondition:
1. Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the desired window area and press
[Enter].
2. Move the cursor to the lower right corner of the desired window area and
press [Enter].
The drawing area within the plot frame is fitted to the graphical editor window.
EPLAN Training 31
Path Function Texts
2. Press [-].
With the As for word processing option, the visible section is moved up /
down.
2. Hold down the [Ctrl] key and scroll up / down with the mouse wheel.
With the As for word processing option, the page is magnified / shrunk.
3. Hold down the [Shift] key and scroll up / down with the mouse wheel.
EPLAN Training 32
Path Function Texts
EPLAN Training 33
Path Function Texts
13 Editing Elements
When editing in the graphical editor, besides the usual Windows operating methods
(first select elements, then call command), in most cases the operating methods
familiar from EPLAN 5 (first call the command, then select elements) are also
supported.
Calling a command does not end the previous action in every case; if it is possible
from a processing point of view, the first action is simply interrupted. For instance, the
zoom function doesn't end the drawing of a line, but only interrupts that action. Once
the zoom has been completed, the drawing of the line is continued at the point of
interruption.
EPLAN Training 34
Path Function Texts
14 Selecting Elements
An element is selected when you click it; in the case of filled graphical elements, you
can also click anywhere within the filled area.
Precondition:
Note:
If you open the frame from left to right, only those elements are selected which
lie completely within the frame. But if you open the frame from right to left,
"partial" elements are also selected, which only partially lie within the frame.
2.
3. To remove a single element from this selected group, press [Ctrl] and click the
element at the same time.
EPLAN Training 35
Path Function Texts
1. Specify the first corner of the area to be selected using [Enter].
2. Open a frame using the cursor keys. You can open the frame in any direction.
3. You can use [Tab] to switch the cursor between the lower right corner and the
upper left corner, in order to stretch the area in all directions.
EPLAN Training 36
Path Function Texts
Precondition:
1. Select the desired elements and select either the menu items Edit > Copy, or
Edit > Cut.
The selected elements are copied into the Windows Clipboard. When
copying, the selected elements stay in their original position, while during
cutting, they are removed (deleted) from their original position.
2. If you work with multiple clipboards (definable in the user settings), then in the
Clipboard dialog, enter a description for the content of the relevant clipboard
and click [OK].
3. If necessary, open a different page where you want to insert the copied / cut
elements.
If you work with multiple clipboards, then EPLAN opens the Paste dialog.
Select the desired element and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 37
Path Function Texts
5. Move the cursor to the position where you want to insert the elements and
press [Enter].
The contents of the Clipboard are pasted into the currently open page.
Notes:
Each call to Copy or Cut overwrites the current contents of the Clipboard, if you
are only working with one Clipboard.
If you press [X] or [Y] when inserting, the elements will be positioned
horizontally or vertically aligned with the original.
EPLAN Training 38
Path Function Texts
16 Duplicating Elements
Using the Duplicate command, you can insert multiple copies very easily at the
same time. Duplication only works within a single page, not between pages.
Precondition:
1. Select the element(s) to be duplicated, and select the menu item Edit >
Duplicate.
EPLAN Training 39
Path Function Texts
17 Deleting Elements
Precondition:
1. Mark the desired elements and select the menu items Edit > Delete (or press
[Del]).
Unlike the Cut command, it is not possible to insert deleted elements into the page
again, because they are not stored in the Clipboard. You can, however, use the
Undo command to reinsert the elements.
2. Select the menu item Edit > Delete (or press [Del]).
Notes:
It is possible first to select the Delete command, then to select the elements to
be deleted. In this case, you must select the elements using area selection.
If you want to delete the entire page contents, use [Ctrl] + [A] to select all
elements on the page and then press [Del]. All components and graphical
elements will be deleted. Update the display if necessary using View >
Redraw .
EPLAN Training 40
Path Function Texts
18 Moving Elements
Precondition:
1. Mark the desired elements and select the menu items Edit > Move.
2. Move the cursor to the position where you want to place the elements and
press [Enter].
The elements are inserted at the appropriate position and deleted from the
original position.
2. Hold down the left mouse button, pull the elements to the new position, and
release the mouse button.
The elements are inserted at the appropriate position and deleted from the
original position.
Note:
If you use drag and drop in combination with [Ctrl], the selected elements are not
simply moved, but copied.
Precondition:
1. Hold down [Ctrl] and click the elements that you would like to group.
(Alternatively, you can open a frame around the desired elements using the
mouse.)
3. To move a single element of a group without removing the grouping, select the
element and then move it while holding down the [Shift] key.
Already grouped elements can also be combined into a new group. This allows the
nesting of groups. A combination of grouped and ungrouped elements is also
possible.
19.2 Ungroup
Precondition:
The group is broken up into its components, but subgroups are retained.
Note:
To move a single element of a group without removing the grouping, or to temporarily
ignore the grouping, select the element and then move it while holding down the
[Shift] key.
If the option is deactivated, all elements are treated as individual elements. This
makes it possible to edit, delete, move elements, etc. which are in a group. If such
elements are copied, the new elements lose their group membership.
If group consideration is deactivated, the Group and Ungroup commands can also
no longer be executed.
EPLAN Training 43
Path Function Texts
Plot frames cannot be selected, and so it is also impossible to group elements
with plot frames or to ungroup plot frame groups.
Symbols can be arbitrarily grouped. The symbol itself is the smallest possible
unit. It is not possible to break a symbol down into pure graphics.
EPLAN Training 44
Path Function Texts
Precondition:
1. Select the elements in question, and choose the menu item Edit > Other >
Space evenly (horizontal) or Edit > Other > Space evenly (vertical).
EPLAN determines the distance between the first and last elements and
distributes all the others evenly between them.
Note:
The grid is not taken into account when distributing elements; if necessary, use the
Align on grid command to place the elements back onto the grid.
EPLAN Training 45
Path Function Texts
Precondition:
1. Select an element and choose the menu item Edit > Other > Bring to front,
or Edit > Other > Send to back.
the stack.
If you edit one of the elements you have moved to the back, use the menu item View
> Redraw to reactivate the defined front/back properties.
EPLAN Training 46
Path Function Texts
22 Changing Elements
Precondition:
3. In the Scaling dialog, select the scaling factor and click [OK].
The selected graphic will be scaled relative to the point of origin. Texts can
also be scaled; in this case, the font size is also changed.
3. Then rotate the selected elements around the point of origin with the mouse,
and click the left mouse button on the page to end the rotation.
Warning:
EPLAN Training 47
Path Function Texts
1. Open a frame around the desired element points in order to select them.
EPLAN Training 48
Path Function Texts
1. Double-click an element with the left mouse button, or select the element and
choose the menu item Edit > Properties.
2. In the Properties dialog, you can edit the properties of the element . The
different editing options depend on the element selected.
Example:
If you double-click a text, the property dialog for texts is opened. Here, you can
change or complete your entries, or edit the display properties (color, font, etc.)
If you double-click a line, the property dialog for lines is opened. Here, you can
check the stretching and display properties of the line, and change them if
necessary.
EPLAN Training 49
Path Function Texts
1. Double-click a text.
2. In the Properties dialog, edit the text and its properties. Use the Text, Format,
Language, and Border tabs as described under "Inserting Texts".
3. Click [OK].
The changes are adopted and are immediately visible on the page.
EPLAN Training 50
Path Function Texts
The text "remembers" the position where it was located prior to docking, and then
returns to this position when it is undocked.
Precondition:
1. Select the text you wish to dock. To do this, open a frame around the text.
2. Select the main text to which the main text should be docked.
EPLAN Training 51
Path Function Texts
The text is moved back to the position where it was before it was docked.
EPLAN Training 52
Path Function Texts
1. Select a component and then select the menu item Edit > Properties.
EPLAN Training 53
Path Function Texts
2. In the Display tab, select a non-docked property from the list (a prefixed
symbol indicates the configured docking direction) and select Popup menu >
Dock.
EPLAN Training 54
Path Function Texts
2. In the Display tab, select a docked property from the list (these have no
prefixed symbol) and select Popup menu > Undock.
EPLAN Training 55
Path Function Texts
Preconditions:
EPLAN Training 56
Path Function Texts
You have opened a page, form, plot frame or symbol.
The property texts may not be docked. If necessary, undock the texts (using
(Undock) in the Display tab of the properties dialog).
1. Select the desired elements and choose the menu item Edit > Texts > Move
property texts.
The elements points of the property texts will be displayed as small empty
squared on all selected components.
The selection remains active until you select a different property text or end
the action.
EPLAN Training 57
Path Function Texts
Note:
If you hold [Shift] down while moving, the current grid snap is divided by four. The
insertion point can then be moved in steps of a one-fourth of the grid size.
1. Select the desired elements and choose the menu item Edit > Texts > Reset
moved property texts.
In all selected components, the copied property texts are deleted and the
standard property texts of the symbol are shown.
Lines
Open or closed polylines
Rectangles
Circles, arcs, and sectors
Ellipses
Splines.
Objects with a closed contour, e.g. ellipses, circles, rectangles, and closed polylines,
can be shown filled.
EPLAN Training 59
Path Function Texts
Precondition:
1. Specify the starting point of the line and click the left mouse button.
EPLAN Training 60
Path Function Texts
2. Specify the end point of the line and click the left mouse button.
1. Specify the starting point of the polyline and click the left mouse button.
EPLAN Training 61
Path Function Texts
2. Specify the next points of the polyline, and click with the left mouse button
each of the points to place.
1. Specify the starting point of the rectangle and click the left mouse button.
EPLAN Training 62
Path Function Texts
2. Pull the rectangle out in any direction, and click with the left mouse button to
specify the end point.
EPLAN Training 63
Path Function Texts
Precondition:
1. Define the center of the circle, and click the left mouse button.
2. Pull the circle out from the center, and click the left mouse button to define the
radius.
2. Define the second point on the circle, and click the left mouse button.
3. Define the third point on the circle, and click the left mouse button.
1. Define the center of the circle, and click the left mouse button.
EPLAN Training 65
Path Function Texts
2. Pull the circle out from the center, and click the left mouse button to define the
radius.
3. Define the first point on the arc or sector, and click the left mouse button.
EPLAN Training 66
Path Function Texts
4. Define the end point of the arc or sector, and click the left mouse button.
1. Define the first point on the arc, and click the left mouse button.
EPLAN Training 67
Path Function Texts
2. Define the second point on the arc, and click the left mouse button.
3. Pull the circle out from the center, and click the left mouse button to define the
arc.
EPLAN Training 68
Path Function Texts
1. Define the center of the ellipse, and click the left mouse button.
2. Pull the ellipse out from the center, and click the left mouse button to define
the size of the ellipse.
EPLAN Training 69
Path Function Texts
30 Drawing Splines
Splines are defined using the two end points of a curve and the tangents through two
control points.
Precondition:
1. Specify the starting point of the spline and click the left mouse button.
2. Specify the end point of the spline and click the left mouse button.
3. Specify the first control point and click the left mouse button.
EPLAN Training 70
Path Function Texts
4. Specify the second control point and click the left mouse button.
EPLAN Training 71
Path Function Texts
You can either determine the starting and end points using coordinate input, or you
can determine the starting point manually and only use coordinate input for the end
point.
The input is described here with the example of a line; in the same way, however,
you can also draw polylines, rectangles, circles, etc.
When inserting symbols, coordinate input is only necessary for the insertion point.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 72
Path Function Texts
EPLAN Training 73
Path Function Texts
2. Select the menu item Options > Coordinate input.
3. In the Coordinate input dialog, the current cursor position is displayed. Enter
the coordinates of the starting point. You can also select a coordinate pair
from the lists Personal coordinates or Recently used coordinates.
Note:
The lists show the default coordinates (defined in the user settings) and the
last 10 coordinates used, where the entries in the Recently used coordinates
are overwritten, from top to bottom, with each new coordinate used.
EPLAN Training 74
Path Function Texts
4.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 75
Path Function Texts
7. Enter the coordinates of the end point in the Coordinate input dialog. You
can also select a coordinate pair from the lists Personal coordinates or
Recently used coordinates.
8. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 76
Path Function Texts
2. Determine the starting point manually, and press [Enter]. Or determine the
starting point using absolute coordinate input (Options > Coordinate input).
EPLAN Training 77
Path Function Texts
3. Select the menu item Options > Relative coordinate input.
4. In the Relative coordinate input, you can specify the position of the end
point. You have two options here: Either use the Distance field to enter the
amount by which the end point should be offset from the coordinates of the
starting point, in the X and Y directions. Or you can give an angle and the
length of the line. (For a rectangle, enter the length of the rectangle's
diagonals.)
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 78
Path Function Texts
32 Inserting Text
Precondition:
1. In the Text tab of the Properties dialog, enter the desired text. The popup
menu provides you with many options to further edit the text. You can, for
instance, use the functions cut, copy, and paste, or insert line breaks and
special characters.
Note:
EPLAN Training 79
Path Function Texts
2.
3. On the Format tab, you can specify text properties such as size, color, and
alignment, along with the layer on which the text is stored.
EPLAN Training 80
Path Function Texts
4. In the Language tab, define whether the text is to be displayed in only one
language or in all of the display languages. (The translation module must be
licensed in order to display multiple languages.)
EPLAN Training 81
Path Function Texts
5. In the Border tab, you define whether the text is placed within an alignment
box and how it fits into the alignment box.
6. Click [OK].
1. Select the menu item View > Empty text boxes in order to enable the display
of empty texts.
The empty texts are displayed using the string "Empty Text".
EPLAN Training 82
Path Function Texts
2. Select the desired empty texts and select the menu item Edit > Delete.
EPLAN Training 83
Path Function Texts
Precondition:
1. In the Select image file dialog, select a file using the file selector and click
[Open].
EPLAN Training 84
Path Function Texts
2. In the Copy image file dialog, you decide whether the file should be copied
into the project directory (that is, into the Images subdirectory of the project) or
the source directory should be kept. Click [OK].
4. In the Properties dialog, you can change the display properties of the image
file.
EPLAN Training 85
Path Function Texts
5. Click [OK].
Example:
Notes:
Only image files located in the project directory are saved when backing up the
project.
When copying a page, the image files copied into the project directory are not
copied. Only when the entire project is copied are the image files also copied.
When deleting a page, the image files copied into the project directory are not
deleted.
If an image file has been deleted from its directory and can therefore no longer be
displayed, a rectangle with the file path is displayed in its place.
Tip:
You can insert an image file using drag and drop, by dragging the selected image file
from the Windows Explorer into the graphical editor of your project.
34 Inserting Hyperlinks
You have the option of inserting a text on any page which contains a link to a
document.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 87
Path Function Texts
2. Click[...] beside the [Document] field in order to select a file using the file
selection dialog. You can also enter a URL into the Document field with copy
and paste.
3. Enter the text into the Text / designation field which should be displayed on
the page. When selecting a file, the file name is automatically suggested.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 88
Path Function Texts
6. When you have selected a file, you can decide in the Copy hyperlink dialog
whether the file should be copied into the project directory (that is, into the
external document directory of the project) or the source directory will be
retained. (When inserting a URL, this dialog is not shown, since URLs are
always called from the source directory.)
7. Click [OK].
Example:
You have defined a hyperlink in the schematic to a document containing the technical
information for transformer "-T1". You have chosen "Info T1" as a designation.
EPLAN Training 89
Path Function Texts
Tip:
You can insert hyperlinks using drag and drop, by dragging a selected file from the
Windows Explorer into the graphical editor of your project.
You can also first select a hyperlink and then call up the linked document using the
menu item Edit > Other > Open hyperlink.
EPLAN Training 90
Path Function Texts
EPLAN Training 91
Path Function Texts
EPLAN Training 92
Dimensions
Dimensions
EPLAN Training 1
Dimensions
EPLAN Training 2
Dimensions
1. Specify the starting dimensioning point by clicking it with the left mouse button.
EPLAN Training 3
Dimensions
3. Define the offset of the dimensions to the object being dimensioned. To do
this, move the mouse in the proper direction until the desired spacing is
reached and click with the left mouse button.
The dimension help lines are drawn with the corresponding height.
EPLAN Training 4
Dimensions
Every section is separately dimensioned, i.e., the dimension value for a continued
dimension only relates to the associated section.
1. Specify the starting dimensioning point by clicking it with the left mouse button.
EPLAN Training 5
Dimensions
2. Specify the first end dimensioning point.
EPLAN Training 6
Dimensions
3. Define the offset of the dimensions to the object being dimensioned. To do
this, move the mouse in the proper direction until the desired spacing is
reached and click with the left mouse button.
The dimension line is drawn to the height and direction of the preceding
dimension line and the dimension line is centered on the section.
EPLAN Training 7
Dimensions
5. Specify the other end dimensioning points.
6. After you have placed all of the dimensioning points, click Edit > Cancel
action to end the process.
EPLAN Training 8
Dimensions
The dimension value for incremental dimensions is calculated from the starting point
to the end point of the associated section. The dimension lines are all drawn to the
same height.
For incremental dimensions you can specify the overall dimension first and then the
section dimension. It is also possible to expand the overall dimension as you would
like.
1. Specify the starting dimensioning point by clicking it with the left mouse button.
EPLAN Training 9
Dimensions
2. Specify the first end dimensioning point.
4. Specify the next end dimensioning point. This can be inside or outside of the
first placed dimension.
The dimension line is drawn to the height and direction of the preceding
dimension line and the dimension value is placed at the end of the section.
EPLAN Training 10
Dimensions
5. Specify the other end dimensioning points.
6. After you have placed all of the dimensioning points, click Edit > Cancel
action to end the process.
EPLAN Training 11
Dimensions
The dimension value for baseline dimensions is calculated from the starting point to
the end point of the associated section. Unlike incremental dimensions, the
dimension lines are drawn to different heights and the dimension line is centered in
the section.
1. Specify the starting dimensioning point by clicking it with the left mouse button.
EPLAN Training 12
Dimensions
3. Define the offset of the dimensions to the object being dimensioned. To do
this, move the mouse in the proper direction until the desired spacing is
reached and click with the left mouse button.
4. Specify the next end dimensioning point. This can be inside or outside of the
first placed dimension.
The dimension line is drawn and the dimension value is centered in the
section. The height to which the following dimension line is drawn is taken
from the DIN standard.
EPLAN Training 13
Dimensions
6. After you have placed all of the dimensioning points, click Edit > Cancel
action to end the process.
EPLAN Training 14
Dimensions
1. Specify the angle middle point by clicking it with the left mouse button.
The distance from the starting point to the angle middle point defines the
offset of the dimension line.
EPLAN Training 15
Dimensions
1. Select a radius.
2. Define the end point of the dimension line and click the left mouse button.
If the end point is within the circle, a small arrow on the inner edge of the
circle will be drawn as the dimension line. If the end point is outside, the
dimension line is drawn from the end point to the outer edge of the circle.
EPLAN Training 16
Dimensions
7 Editing Dimensions
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
1. Double-click on the dimension or mark the dimension and select the menu
items Edit > Properties.
2. In the Properties dialog select the Dimensioning tab and edit the display
properties and dimension values, if necessary.
3. Select the Format tab and edit the dimension value display properties.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 17
Dimensions
2. Move the dimension with the mouse.
3. Mark the insertion point of a dimension value and move it with the mouse.
EPLAN Training 18
Dimensions
EPLAN Training 19
Symbols
Symbols
EPLAN Training 1
Symbols
EPLAN Training 2
Symbols
Preconditions:
You have opened the project whose symbol library/libraries is/are to be
exchanged.
The symbols and variants used in the project must exist in both libraries. The
decisive factor here is the position of the symbols in the library, i.e. the symbol
number.
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Management > Symbol
libraries
1. In the Settings: Symbol libraries dialog, in the field for the desired symbol
library, click [...].
The Select symbol library dialog is opened. If the symbol library should
not be removed, then a message is displayed.
EPLAN Training 3
Symbols
2. Select the desired symbol library.
3. Click [Open]
The two symbol libraries are compared. If differences are found that
prevent the libraries from being exchanged, then an appropriate message is
displayed.
4. If the two symbol libraries are compatible, in the Exchange symbol libraries
dialog, click [Yes].
The symbol library in the project is replaced with the new symbol library.
EPLAN Training 4
Symbols
2 Updating Symbols
A symbol library stored within a project can be modified outside the project at any
time. In this case, the old symbol library stored in the project can be replaced with the
modified one. Only the graphic is changed by this, the function remains unchanged.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 5
Symbols
EPLAN compares the libraries with each other and displays a message
with the results.
3. Click [OK].
The project master data is updated, i.e. overwritten by the system master
data.
EPLAN Training 6
Symbols
3 Selecting Symbols
Precondition:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
2. If required, select Popup menu > Configure columns to customize the list
display to suit your requirements.
EPLAN Training 7
Symbols
3. In the Column configuration dialog, select / deselect the check boxes for the
information that you wish to show / hide in the list.
4. Click [OK].
5. In the Direct entry field, enter a search term for the desired symbol, e.g., the
starting letters of the symbol name.
The cursor jumps to the first symbol matching your entry as soon as you
enter a single character, and selects it.
EPLAN Training 8
Symbols
6. Select the Preview check box.
The selected symbol is displayed in the preview window, with all existing
variants.
Note:
Multiple selection of symbols is not possible when inserting into schematic
pages.
8.
9. Click [OK].
The symbol hangs on the cursor and can be placed on the current page in
the graphical editor.
Once a symbol has been placed on the page, the Properties <...> dialog
opens, where you can define the component-specific data or simply accept the
default values.
EPLAN Training 9
Symbols
4 Placing Symbols
You can place a given symbol once or several times on schematic pages in the
graphical editor, however you cannot select multiple different symbols for a single
placement operation.
A preview of the autoconnection lines is shown in the graphical editor, which shows
where a connection from one symbol to another symbol is possible. As an extra aid
for placement, a line is also shown between the first placed symbol and the current
cursor position. This allows you to place symbols along a line.
Insertion points and connection points pointing in the same direction may not lie on
top of each other. If this occurs when inserting a symbol then an error message is
displayed and the action is cancelled. (Exceptions to this are symbols containing
opposing connections laid on top of each other at the same point, e.g. T-
connections.)
Precondition:
You have opened a project and at least one symbol library and are viewing a
schematic in the graphical editor.
2. Click [OK].
The dialog is closed and the symbol hangs on the mouse cursor.
EPLAN Training 10
Symbols
4. Use the cursor to position the symbol above or below a connection element.
The symbol is connected to the other element in the schematic and the Properties
<...> dialog opens, where you define the component-specific data or accept the
default values.
Precondition:
You have opened a project and at least one symbol library and are viewing a
schematic in the graphical editor.
2. Click [OK].
The dialog is closed and the symbol hangs on the mouse cursor.
EPLAN Training 11
Symbols
4. Use the cursor to position the symbol above or below a connection element.
Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed.
5. Move the cursor to the left or right in the schematic page while keeping the left
mouse button pressed.
The symbols are placed and connected to the adjacent symbols in the
schematic. In this case, the Properties <...> dialog is not opened and the
component properties are taken from the default values and the current
numbering mode.
EPLAN Training 12
Symbols
Precondition:
1. If you have not yet opened a symbol library, in the Open symbol library
dialog, you first open the symbol library containing the symbol you wish to edit.
2. In the Symbol selection dialog select the symbol(s) you would like to edit.
The preview on the right side of the dialog shows the symbols marked if you
have selected a node in the tree view, for instance, then all of the elements
under it are shown graphically. (For space reasons, the display of the available
variants is omitted in this case.)
EPLAN Training 13
Symbols
6. Click [OK].
The selected symbols are now locked and can be edited in the symbol
editor.
EPLAN Training 14
Symbols
You can only swap symbols when the new symbol matches the function of the
component. EPLAN checks the number of connection points of the symbol to be
replaced. In the symbol selection, you are only offered symbols having the same
number, or fewer, connection points as the symbol you wish to replace. Symbols
having more connection points than the symbol already in the schematic cannot be
selected. For function definitions with a variable number of connection points, all
symbols are offered. When swapping a symbol, the function definition remains
unchanged.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project and at least one symbol library and are viewing a
schematic in the graphical editor.
1. In the Properties <...> dialog, select the Symbol / function data tab.
The Symbol selection dialog is opened. The symbol is selected in the tree
or list and is displayed in the preview window.
3. If you only wish to display symbols in the same function category, select the
Only display symbols of the same symbol function category check box.
EPLAN Training 15
Symbols
4. If you only wish to swap the symbol while retaining the function definition,
select the Only exchange symbol check box.
6. Click [OK].
The Symbol selection dialog is closed and the new symbol is displayed in
the properties dialog.
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 16
Symbols
You can select a different variant of a symbol by rotating the mouse pointer before
placing it.
Precondition:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
2. Click [OK].
The dialog is closed and the symbol hangs on the mouse pointer, whereby
the current variant used is the first variant (standard variant).
4. Press the [Ctrl] key and move the mouse around the symbol to switch
between all symbol variants.
Or press the [Shift] key and move the mouse to switch between the mirrored
variants E to H.
Or press the [Tab] key to switch the symbol through the rotated variants (A to
D).
EPLAN Training 17
Symbols
6. Enter the desired data for the device in the Properties <...> dialog.
7. Click [OK].
8. Proceed in a similar manner for all further insertions of the selected symbol.
EPLAN Training 18
Symbols
EPLAN Training 19
Devices
Devices
EPLAN Training 1
Devices
EPLAN Training 2
Devices
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have selected a component in the graphical editor or one or more functions
in a navigator.
1. In the Properties <...> dialog, select the <Function category > tab.
EPLAN Training 3
Devices
3. From the Category drop-down list, select the type of properties to be
displayed in the Properties table.
5. In the Property selection dialog select the desired property and click [OK].
In the table, additional rows will be shown with the selected properties.
Depending on the property, these may already be filled with values, or empty.
6. Enter the values for the properties into the Value column as needed.
EPLAN Training 4
Devices
7. Select Popup menu > Configure to determine the property arrangement.
In the Property arrangement dialog, all properties are displayed which are
currently shown in the table.
8. Use the arrow buttons to specify the order in which the properties are to be
displayed.
9. Check the check box before the properties which should be shown for all
functions of the same type in the Properties <...> dialog, and click [OK].
Properties for which the check box is checked are always shown the next
time the dialog is called, even if they are empty.
Properties for which the check box is not checked are displayed if they are
filled in. The predetermined order applies.
EPLAN Training 5
Devices
Notes:
The selected properties are only displayed for components of the same type in
the properties dialog. You can specify a selection of properties for general
devices, terminals, PLC connection points, etc., which should be shown in the
table.
Manually modifiable properties which are filled in cannot be deleted. They are
automatically replaced.
Tip:
You can also open the properties dialog by double-clicking a component in the
graphical editor or a function in a navigator. Or select Popup menu >
Properties (this way, multiple part placements can also be selected).
EPLAN Training 6
Devices
In general, all properties are stored in symbols which are significant for the symbol
(and the component created later). The position and order of properties and their
display properties (e.g., layers) are already specified. In the Display tab you can then
control whether these preset values fit your requirements or whether certain
properties should be displayed differently.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have selected a component in the graphical editor or one or more functions
in a navigator.
EPLAN Training 7
Devices
2. From the Property arrangement drop-down list, select the User defined
entry to define your own display layout.
3. In the list of properties, select the property for which you would like to define
the display settings. (The default values for the individual fields are taken from
the Default settings).
5. Select Popup menu > Undock to undock a property, that is, to remove it from
the block.
EPLAN Training 8
Devices
7. Select the Invisible check box if the property should not be visible in the
graphical editor.
9. In the Property selection dialog, select further properties that you would like
to place. (Multiple selection is possible.)
EPLAN Training 9
Devices
10. Click [OK].
11. Edit the display settings of these new properties as described above.
12. Select the properties that you no longer require. (Multiple selection is
possible.)
EPLAN Training 10
Devices
The properties are deleted from the list, i.e., without the values that you
previously allocated in the Property selection dialog, so that they may be re-
allocated, if needed.
14. Select an entry from the contact image drop-down list to specify the display of
the contact image.
Note:
To use the default values again, simply open the Properties <...> dialog again and,
in the Display tab, select the property arrangement Default value. All your settings
will be discarded and replaced with the default values.
Tip:
EPLAN Training 11
Devices
You can also open the properties dialog by double-clicking a component in the
graphical editor or a function in a navigator. Or select Popup menu >
Properties (this way, multiple part placements can also be selected).
EPLAN Training 12
Devices
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have selected a component in the graphical editor or one or more functions
in a navigator.
In the Settings: General dialog (under Options > Settings > Project >
"Project name" > Devices > General), you can have specified how upper-
and lower-case letters and the assignment of preceding signs should be
handled for particular devices.
1. In the Properties <...> dialog, select the <Function category > tab.
4. In the Full DT dialog, edit the components of the device tag and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 13
Devices
6. Select the Device tag (visible) property in the list of properties on the left side
of the dialog.
7. Change the display and docking settings from the default values.
8. Click [OK].
Tip:
You can also open the properties dialog by double-clicking a component in the
graphical editor or a function in a navigator. Or select Popup menu >
Properties (this way, multiple part placements can also be selected).
EPLAN Training 14
Devices
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have selected a component in the graphical editor or one or more functions
in a navigator.
3. In the Connection point data dialog, select the Function definitions tab.
4. Click [OK] if the function definition of the component matches your needs;
otherwise, you can select another function definition.
EPLAN Training 15
Devices
7. In the Connection point description field, enter the connection point
descriptions for the current function, or select the data from the drop-down list.
8. Click [OK].
Tip:
You can also open the properties dialog by double-clicking a component in the
graphical editor or a function in a navigator. Or select Popup menu >
Properties (this way, multiple part placements can also be selected).
EPLAN Training 16
Devices
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have selected a component in the graphical editor or one or more functions
in a navigator.
The Main function check box on the Symbol / function data tab is checked.
2. Click [Settings] and select a menu item if you would like to change the
settings for device selection and the data sources for the project and user.
4. In the Part selection dialog select the desired parts. (Multiple selection is
possible.)
5. Click [OK].
The data is adopted in the corresponding fields of the Parts tab, whereby
the Number of units / quantity field is preset to "1".
EPLAN Training 17
Devices
6. If necessary, change the number of units / quantity.
7. If necessary, edit the properties of the part in the right-hand side of the dialog.
9. Click [OK].
Tip:
You can also open the properties dialog by double-clicking a component in the
graphical editor or a function in a navigator. Or select Popup menu >
Properties (this way, multiple part placements can also be selected).
EPLAN Training 18
Devices
6 Exchanging Devices
By exchanging two devices, all functions of the devices are changed, that is, this
action applies to all function definitions of the selected devices.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
2. Select the menu items Project data > Devices > Exchange.
EPLAN Training 19
Devices
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the graphical editor or the device navigator.
3. Double-click a function.
4. In the Properties (device): <...> dialog, select the tab of the main function
<Functional category> (device).
EPLAN Training 20
Devices
6. In the Full DT dialog, change the DT and click [OK].
1. Select a function.
3. Double-click a function.
4. In the Properties (devices) <...> dialog, select the tab of the main function
<Functional category>.
EPLAN Training 21
Devices
5. Click [...] next to the Full DT field.
1. Select a function.
3. Double-click a function.
4. In the Properties <...> dialog, select the tab of the main function <Functional
category>.
EPLAN Training 22
Devices
5. Click [...] next to the Full DT field.
1.
2.
EPLAN Training 23
Devices
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
In the project settings, you have defined that devices and macros are to be
numbered online on insertion (Options > Settings > Projects > "Project
name" > Devices > Numbering (online)).
1. Select a function in the graphical editor or in one of the navigators and select
the menu item Edit > Properties.
3. In the Properties field of the table, select the "Search direction for transferring
the device tag" property, and select one of the possible settings from the drop-
down list in the Value column.
4. Click [OK].
Notes:
To prevent DT adoption in general, deselect online numbering.
EPLAN Training 24
Devices
EPLAN Training 25
Devices
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
In the project settings, you have defined that devices and macros are to be
numbered online on insertion (Options > Settings > Projects > "Project
name" > Devices > Numbering (online)).
1. Select a function in the graphical editor or in one of the navigators and select
the menu item Edit > Properties.
3. In the Connection point designation field, select an entry from the drop-
down list or enter the desired connection designation manually. The field
should contain all connection point designations which should be assigned to
the current and subsequent components.
EPLAN Training 26
Devices
6. In the Connection point designation field, select an entry from the drop-
down list.
In the list, the superfluous connection point designations are listed which
are not needed for the first component.
7. Click [OK].
Example:
Three power NO contacts (depending on the plot frame used) lie next to one another
or one above the other in the circuit diagram. When generating symbols for the power
NO contact, the possible connection point designations are preset to "1;2", "3;4", and
"5;6".
For the first contact, the following possible connection point designations are offered:
1;2
3;4
5;6
1;2;3;4;5;6.
If you select the entry "1;2,3;4;5;6", the power NO contact can pass the unneeded
connection point designations on to the following components. For the second power
NO contact, then, the following connection point designations are offered:
3;4
5;6
3;4;5;6.
The following table illustrates the behavior for different entries for the connection
point designations of the first power NO contact:
Connection point
Behavior
designation
The connection point designations of all three component
1;2;3;4;5;6
are influenced.
Only the first component is affected. The connection point
1;2
designations of the following components are not changed.
EPLAN Training 27
Devices
The first and second components are affected, but the third
1;2;3;4
component is not changed.
In the first component, "1;2" is entered as the connection
1;2;;;;; point designation, and the connection point designations of
the other two components are deleted.
In the first component, the connection point designations are
Empty
deleted. The two other components are not changed.
In the first component, the first connection point designation
is filled with a "1", and the second connection point
1
designation is deleted. The two other components are not
changed.
In the first component, the first connection point designation
;2 is deleted, and the second connection point designation is
filled with a "2". The two other components are not changed.
In the first component, the connection point designations are
;
deleted. The two other components are not changed.
The connection point designations of all three components
1;2;3;4;5;6;A;B;C;D are influenced. Superfluous connection point designations
are removed.
EPLAN Training 28
Devices
Precondition:
You have opened a project.
1. Select a project and select Popup menu > Project > Properties.
EPLAN Training 29
Devices
2. Select the DT structure tab.
5. To specify the order of the components in the DT, click on the buttons in the
toolbar.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 30
Devices
Options > Settings > Project > "Project name" > Management > Supplementary
fields
2. In the New name column, specify a name for the "Supplementary field"
property.
Preconditions:
In the DT structure tab of the Project properties dialog, the Edit DT in
individual fields check box is checked.
The visible and full DT are shown. In the Property name and Value
columns, the DT components of the full DT are shown.
EPLAN Training 31
Devices
2. To edit a DT component, click next to a DT component in the Value column.
EPLAN Training 32
Devices
EPLAN Training 33
DT Syntax Check
DT Syntax Check
EPLAN Training 1
DT Syntax Check
EPLAN Training 2
DT Syntax Check
Precondition:
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > DT syntax check
1. In the Settings: DT syntax check dialog, check the Enable check check box.
2. In the group boxes Identifier blocks, Device tags, and Count numbers,
specify the scope of the test for the components of the DT.
3. Click [OK].
After specifying the device data in the Properties <...> dialog, EPLAN checks
whether the syntax for the specified device tag identifier is correct.
If this is not the case, EPLAN opens a message dialog in which the incorrect
elements are displayed. Via [Settings], you can go from this message dialog to the
setting for DT syntax checking. There you can check, and if necessary, correct your
syntax settings. If the "error" is a an intentional deviation from the syntax, you can
EPLAN Training 3
DT Syntax Check
select [Ignore] to leave the dialog and accept your entry without having to change
the settings.
EPLAN Training 4
DT Syntax Check
EPLAN Training 5
Cross-references
Cross-references
EPLAN Training 1
Cross-references
EPLAN Training 2
Cross-references
Precondition:
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Cross-references / contact
image
EPLAN Training 3
Cross-references
4. In the Display group box, define how the cross-references at the item are to
be displayed.
6. In the Marker for group box, you define which character is to be used as a
marker to visually distinguish between the various cross-reference types.
8. For each of the different page types, you define here which cross-references
to other page types are to be displayed and in what order.
9. You also use the Display overview cross-references group box in the
Display section to specify the treatment of overview cross-references.
EPLAN Training 4
Cross-references
The settings are adopted.
EPLAN Training 5
Cross-references
Precondition:
1. Select Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Cross-references
/ contact image.
EPLAN Training 6
Cross-references
2. Select the General settings section.
3. In the Contact image table group box, enter the character for labeling the
contact image table.
4. In this group box, you also enter the Width and Height values for the contact
image table.
EPLAN Training 7
Cross-references
6. Here you define how cross-references and contact images for Motor overload
switches are to be displayed.
7. Select the Show in tabular form check box if page number and column
designation in the cross-reference are to be entered in tabular form; the table
headings for NC and NO contacts are taken from the Contact image table
headings: Labeling ( General settings section.
8. Select the Table cross with variable length check box if the table cross
should be automatically adjusted to suit the maximum size of the contact
image entries, in this case, the setting Contact image table: Width / height
(settings area General) is not taken into account.
9. In the Rotation field, select the desired value if the contact image is to be
displayed at a different angle to the default value.
10. If the part and / or type numbers on the contact image of the motor overload
switch are to be displayed at different positions, select the appropriate entries
in the Display of 1st / 2nd part number and Display of 1st / 2nd part type
drop-down lists.
EPLAN Training 8
Cross-references
11. Select the Contactors settings section.
12. Here you define how cross-references and contact images for Contactors are
to be displayed. (The data entry possibilities are identical to those for motor
overload switches).
Preconditions:
EPLAN Training 9
Cross-references
You have opened a project and selected a schematic page for editing.
You have used a double-click to open the properties dialog of a component for
which you can define a contact image (e.g. general device, cable, or shield).
1. In the Display tab of the property dialog, in the Contact image drop-down list,
select the Coil or Motor overload switch entry.
3. Select the User-defined check box if you do not want to use the default
settings from the project settings.
4. In the Display group box, define how the contact image for the currently
selected device is to be displayed.
5. Click [OK].
Note:
You can change the component-specific settings at any time by double-clicking the
device and then selecting a different entry from the Contact image drop-down list, or
by changing the settings in the Contact image settings tab.
Precondition:
You have selected the Coil or Motor overload switch entry in the Display tab of the
property dialog from the Contact image drop-down list.
EPLAN Training 10
Cross-references
1. Click [...] next to the Contact image drop-down list.
3. Deselect the check box if you wish to define the contact image position
yourself, and enter the distances by which the contact image is to be offset in
the X position and Y position fields.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 11
Cross-references
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 12
Cross-references
Preconditions:
You have opened a project that contains several multi-line schematic pages.
Under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Cross-references /
contact image > General, you have defined the display settings for cross-
references.
You have placed a function on one of the schematic pages (e.g. a contactor
coil).
You have placed further functions on other schematic pages (e.g. NO contacts).
1. Select the menu item Project data > Devices > Navigator.
EPLAN Training 13
Cross-references
2. Select all newly inserted functions in the device navigator.
EPLAN Training 14
Cross-references
4. In the Displayed DT field of the <Function category> tab of the DT
Properties <...> dialog, specify the DT that is to receive all selected functions.
5. Click [OK].
Preconditions:
EPLAN Training 15
Cross-references
You have opened a project.
You have loaded a multi-line and a single-line symbol library into your project.
Under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Cross references /
contact image > Display, in the Display device cross-references group
box, you have specified that cross-references between multi-line and single-
line displays are to be displayed, and vice-versa.
1. Open the multi-line schematic page and insert a multi-line symbol from the
Multi-line symbol library.
2. Enter the device tag into the properties dialog and click [OK].
3. Open the single-line schematic page and insert an appropriate symbol from
the Single-line symbol library.
4. Enter the same device tag into the properties dialog and click [OK].
Example:
On a multi-line schematic page you have inserted a 3-pole switch from a multi-line
symbol library and given it the device tag "-Q1" (left side of the illustration). You have
also inserted the same symbol into a single-line schematic page from a single-line
symbol library and given it a device tag of "-Q1" (right side of the illustration). The
cross-reference is now created and displayed with the components on both pages.
EPLAN Training 16
Cross-references
The 3-pole switch "Q1" on the multi-line schematic page (left) points to the 3-pole
switch "Q1" on the single-line display (right) and vice-versa.
EPLAN Training 17
Cross-references
Example:
Preconditions:
You have opened a project and are in a schematic page.
Under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Cross-references /
contact image > General, you have defined the display settings for cross-
references.
The schematic contains a motor overload switch or a power circuit breaker which
you have defined as a main function.
EPLAN Training 18
Cross-references
3. In the Representation type drop-down list of the Symbol / Function data
tab, select the Pair cross-reference setting.
4. Click [OK].
Example:
A motor overload switch Q1:1;2;3;4;5;6 (main function) and the two contacts
Q1:13;14 and Q1:23;24 (both auxiliary functions) are placed in the schematic. As
with a normal device cross-reference the motor overload switch points to both
contacts, and the contacts each point to the motor overload switch.
A pair cross-reference Q1:13;14 is now inserted. This changes the cross-reference
behavior as follows:
The contact Q1:13;14 now points to the pair cross-reference symbol but no
longer to the main function.
The main function still points to the contact Q1:23;24, but no longer to the
contact Q1:13;14.
EPLAN Training 19
Cross-references
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have inserted several interruption points with the same displayed DT.
Under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Cross-references /
contact image > Interruption points, you have defined the display settings
for interruption point cross-references.
2. In the Properties <...> dialog, select the Star source check box in the
Interruption point tab.
3. Click [OK].
The interruption point defined as the star source now points to all other
interruption points with the same DT in the project. These in turn now point to
the star source.
EPLAN Training 20
Cross-references
Note:
You automatically receive a Chain cross reference if you deselect the Star
source check box.
EPLAN Training 21
Cross-references
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
Under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Cross references /
contact image > Display, in the Display device cross-references group
box, you have specified that cross-references between multi-line schematic
pages and pages of type "Panel layout" are to be displayed.
1. Open the multi-line schematic page in the graphical editor and insert a symbol,
for example, a contactor coil.
2. In the Properties <...> dialog, enter a Device tag for the contactor coil, for
example, "K1".
3. Select the Symbol / function data tab of the properties dialog and, if not
already selected, select the Main function check box in the Function data
(logic) group box.
4. Switch to the Part tab, and in the first free field under Part Number click [...].
5. Navigate through the Part selection tree view under "Electrical engineering"
to the "Relays / contactors" product group.
EPLAN Training 22
Cross-references
6. Select the appropriate part containing width and height information.
7. Click [OK].
The part selection dialog is then closed and you are back in the properties
dialog.
8. Click [OK].
10. Select the menu item Insert > Box / connection point / mounting panel >
Mounting panel, and draw a rectangular mounting panel.
11. In the Properties <...> dialog, enter the Device tag of the mounting panel and
click [OK].
12. Select the menu item Project data > Devices / parts > Panel layout
navigator.
13. In the tree view of the Panel layout - <Project Name> dialog, select the
current project and navigate under >Unplaced" to the part number of the
contactor.
14. Select the part and then select Popup menu > Place on mounting panel.
EPLAN Training 23
Cross-references
A rectangular graphic now hangs on the cursor whose dimension EPLAN
has taken from the part information of the selected contactor.
15. Move the graphic inside the mounting panel and place it there with a mouse
click.
16. Open both pages in separate editors to observe the cross-reference display.
Example:
The contactor "-K1" in the schematic (left side of the illustration) points within the
panel layout (left side of the illustration) to the part "001ART" placed inside the
mounting panel "U1" and vice-versa.
EPLAN Training 24
Cross-references
1. Select the menu item Options > Settings > Projects > "Project Name" >
Cross-references / contact image > General.
2. In the Settings: General dialog, in the Marker for group box, enter any
desired character for the Panel layout.
3. Click [OK].
4. Update the display using the menu item View > Redraw.
Example:
You have entered the "%" character as marker text for cross-references to the
mounting panel (panel layout). In the schematic, this setting is displayed at the main
function as follows:
EPLAN Training 25
Cross-references
For distributed display of PLC cards, the so-called PLC card overview eases the
process of finding PLC connection points within the schematic. It represents the
physical cards of the PLC, which are represented in the distributed schematic view by
the individual PLC boxes. It graphically displays which inputs / outputs are occupied
and which are available, which actuators and sensors they are connected to, and on
which schematic page they are displayed. This type of overview can depending on
the manufacturer and type contain a different number of inputs and outputs. You
draw PLC card overviews on pages of type "Overview". A synchronization in the form
of cross-references occurs between the PLC card overview and the schematic
pages. The PLC cross-reference then points to its reference in the overview page
and vice-versa.
In order for EPLAN to create and display PLC cross-references between a PLC
connection point in the schematic and a PLC connection point in the overview, the
following properties of both connection points on both pages must agree:
Note:
The PLC address does not provide identification and has no importance in the
formation of cross-references.
Preconditions:
EPLAN Training 26
Cross-references
You have opened a project.
Under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Cross-references /
contact image > Display, you have selected all check boxes in the Display
overview cross-references group box.
2. Select the menu item Insert > Box / connection point / mounting panel >
PLC box , and draw a rectangular PLC box representing the PLC card.
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, enter the Device tag of the PLC card and click
[OK].
4. Open the overview page and draw a PLC box representing a PLC card.
5. In the Properties <...> dialog, enter the Same device tag as the PLC card on
the schematic page and click [OK].
6. Select Insert > Box / connection point / mounting panel > PLC connection
point (DI) and place a PLC connection point inside the PLC box in the
overview page.
7. In the Properties <...> dialog of the PLC connection point, enter the
Connection point designation and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 27
Cross-references
8. Open the schematic page and insert a PLC connection point within the PLC
card.
9. In the Properties dialog, enter the Same connection point designation as the
PLC connection point on the overview page.
Both PLC cards now "inherit" the PLC connection point device tags, since
the connection points are located within the drawn boxes. Since the DT,
connection point designation, and function definition of both PLC connection
points are identical, EPLAN creates cross-references between both
connections and displays them at the components in the schematic and in the
overview page.
10. Open both pages in separate editors to observe the cross-reference display.
Example:
The PLC connection point "-A1:1" in the schematic (left side of the illustration) points
to the PLC connection point "-A1:1" in the overview page (right side of the illustration)
and vice-versa. The address "I1.0" has no effect on the cross-reference creation.
EPLAN Training 28
Cross-references
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
Under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Cross references /
contact image > Display, in the Display device cross-references group
box, you have specified that cross-references between multi-line schematic
pages and pages of type "Device tag list" are to be displayed, and vice-versa.
1. Open the multi-line schematic page in the graphical editor and insert a few
symbols, e.g., a transformer, a fuse, and a signal lamp.
2. In the Properties <...> dialog, enter the Device tag for each of the
components, for example, "-T1" for the transformer, "-F1" for the fuse and "H1"
for the signal lamp.
3. Switch to the Symbol / Function data tab of the Properties <...> dialog for
each component and, if not already selected, select the Main function check
box in the Function data (logic) group box.
4. Also switch to the Parts tab for each part, and use the Parts selection to
assign a suitable part number to each component.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 29
Cross-references
6. Select the menu item Utilities > Reports > Generate.
8. In the Select report dialog, in the Select report type list, select the "Device
tag list" entry and click [OK].
10. In the Device tag list <...> dialog, enter the appropriate structure identifier for
the classification of the device tag list in the project, define the page number
and click [OK].
12. Open the schematic page and the device tag list in separate editors to observe
the cross-reference display.
Example:
The transformer T1, the fuse F1, and the signal lamp H1 in the schematic (left side of
the illustration) point to the appropriate components in the device tag list (right side of
EPLAN Training 30
Cross-references
the illustration). Conversely, the cross-references in the device tag list point to the
appropriate components in the schematic.
1. Select Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Cross-references
/ contact image > General, and select the Auxiliary functions also refer to
the device tag list check box.
2. Click [OK].
3. Update the display using the menu item View > Redraw.
EPLAN Training 31
Cross-references
1. Select Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Cross-references
/ contact image > General , and in the Marker for group box enter a marker
text character for Device tag lists.
2. Click [OK].
3. Update the display using the menu item View > Redraw.
Example:
You have entered the ">" character as marker text for cross-references to the device
tag list. This setting is presented in the schematic as follows:
EPLAN Training 32
Cross-references
Precondition:
5. Click [OK].
6. In the Value field of the Manual cross-reference property, enter the desired
text.
EPLAN Training 33
Cross-references
7. Select Popup menu > Line break to force a line break, or select Popup
menu > Multi-line input to enter multi-line text in the Multi-line editing
dialog. A line break is then forced using [Ctrl]+[Enter].
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 34
Cross-references
As the superior level, only the current page is visible, meaning that no location
box, etc., is taken into account.
If the identifying identifier blocks are identical to the superior level, they can be
suppressed.
If all identifying properties are identical, the page number can also be
suppressed.
Precondition:
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Cross-references / contact
image > General
1. Select the Apply cross-reference abbreviation rules to DTs check box if the
rules above are not only to be used for the page information but also for the
full DT.
EPLAN Training 35
Cross-references
2. Select the Suppress identical page check box, if the page number is also to
be suppressed; this is only possible for cross-references for which all
identifying properties are identical.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 36
Cross-references
EPLAN Training 37
Connection Symbols
Connection Symbols
EPLAN Training 1
Connection Symbols
EPLAN Training 2
Connection Symbols
Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > Connection symbols
2. Select the Connection symbols with prompt check box if a prompt dialog
regarding the wiring should be shown when drawing connection symbols. (If
you have selected the Target or Point wiring option in the Display
connection junction as group box, this check box is automatically selected
and grayed out.)
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 3
Connection Symbols
Precondition:
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Graphical editing > General
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 4
Connection Symbols
Preconditions:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
1. From the submenu select the angle you would like to insert.
EPLAN Training 5
Connection Symbols
2. If required, hold down the [Ctrl] key and move the mouse to page through the
previous variants.
3. Click the left mouse button to place the angle on the page.
4. Proceed this way for all additional angles that you would like to insert on the
page.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
Under Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > Connection symbols
you have selected the Target or point wiring option or you have selected the
Connection symbols with prompt check box.
EPLAN Training 6
Connection Symbols
1. From the submenu select the connection symbol you would like to insert.
EPLAN Training 7
Connection Symbols
3. Select the Draw as point check box if the connection symbol should be drawn
as point wiring.
4. Click [OK].
5. If required, hold down the [Ctrl] key and move the mouse to page through the
previous variants.
6. Click the left mouse button to place the connection symbol on the page.
7. Proceed this way for all additional connection symbols of this type that you
would like to insert on the page.
EPLAN Training 8
Connection Symbols
8. Select Popup menu > Cancel action to terminate the action.
EPLAN Training 9
Connection Symbols
Precondition:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
1. Select the menu items Insert > Connection symbol > Diagonal.
EPLAN Training 10
Connection Symbols
2. Click to place the starting point of the diagonal connection line.
EPLAN Training 11
Connection Symbols
The diagonal connection line is drawn.
EPLAN Training 12
Connection Symbols
5 Interrupting Connections
Autoconnecting can sometimes create unwanted connections in the schematic (e.g.,
to motor overload switch auxiliary contacts). You can interrupt these connections by
inserting a break point between the connection points. A break point is an invisible
symbol without connection points that prevents autoconnecting or that interrupts an
existing autoconnect line.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 13
Connection Symbols
2. Proceed in a similar way for all additional autoconnect lines that are to be
interrupted.
EPLAN Training 14
Connection Symbols
Preconditions:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
You have selected the Connection symbols with prompt check box in the user
settings (Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > Connection
symbols).
2. Select the connection symbol you would like to insert from the menu that
opens.
EPLAN Training 15
Connection Symbols
3. In the subsequent dialog select the desired target-specific variants for T-
nodes, double junctions, and jumpers.
4. Select the Draw as point check box if the connection symbol should be drawn
as point wiring.
5. Click [OK].
6. If required, hold down the [Ctrl] key and move the mouse to page through the
previous variants.
7. With the left mouse button click the insertion point of an existing connection
symbol in order to place the new connection symbol on this location.
EPLAN Training 16
Connection Symbols
9. Select Popup menu > Cancel action to terminate the action.
The original connection symbol is replaced by the new one. The following restriction
applies to interruption points: An interruption point can draw over other connection
symbols but not vice-versa.
Note:
As soon as you double-click the connection symbol with the left mouse button, a
dialog containing the list of variants for the selected connection symbol opens. Select
a variant to replace the current variant. This does not apply to angles.
EPLAN Training 17
Connection Symbols
7 Inserting Busbars
The busbar symbol is stored in the SPECIAL.slk symbol library. It has four variants
and the text positions are managed like device connection points.
Precondition:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
1. Select the menu items Insert > Box / connection point / mounting panel >
Busbar connection point.
The symbol for the busbar connection point hangs on the cursor.
2. If required, hold down the [Ctrl] key and move the mouse to page through the
previous variants.
3. Click the left mouse button to place the connection point symbol on the page.
4. Specify the busbar connection point properties in the Properties <...> dialog.
5. Click [OK].
6. Proceed in a similar manner for all of the other busbar connection points.
EPLAN Training 18
Connection Symbols
EPLAN Training 19
Connections
Connections
EPLAN Training 1
Connections
EPLAN Training 2
Connections
You can use connection symbols to specify the course of the connections.
1. Select the menu items Insert > Connection symbol and select the
appropriate symbol from the submenu.
EPLAN Training 3
Connections
2. If you want to rotate the symbol, hold the [Ctrl] key down and move the mouse
in a circle.
Note:
Autoconnecting initially generates only a graphical line, not a connection with data.
For certain actions (e.g., closing a page) the connections are first automatically
updated. In doing this, new connections are generated based on the available
information or existing connections are updated. You can also manually call up the
update of connections at any time.
Note:
You can tell if connections are up-to-date by looking at the right edge of the status
bar: If the "#" sign is displayed, the project has out-of-date connections. If the "*" sign
is displayed, the open page has out-of-date connections.
Precondition:
You have opened a page in the graphical editor or selected pages in the page
navigator.
EPLAN Training 4
Connections
1. Select the menu items Project data > Connections > Update.
EPLAN Training 5
Connections
1. Select the menu items Insert > Connection symbol > Break point and place
the break point on a connection line.
EPLAN Training 6
Connections
1. Select the menu items Project data > Connections > Navigator.
EPLAN Training 7
Connections
2. In the Connections - <Project name> dialog select the unplaced connections
you want to delete.
EPLAN Training 8
Connections
3. Select Popup menu > Delete.
EPLAN Training 9
Connections
Precondition:
1. Hold down the left mouse button and move a symbol in the schematic.
After releasing the left mouse button, the autoconnect lines are
automatically redrawn.
2. If you no longer wish to use smart connect, reselect the menu item Options >
Smart connect.
EPLAN Training 10
Connections
The symbol for the connection definition point hangs on the cursor.
EPLAN Training 11
Connections
3. In the Properties <...> dialog specify the connection properties in the
Connection definition point tab (and other properties in the other tabs, if
necessary).
4. Click [OK].
Tip:
You can insert multiple connection definition points at the same time by holding the
left mouse button down and pulling the cursor over multiple autoconnect lines.
At each autoconnect line intersected, a connection definition point is then
placed.
EPLAN Training 12
Connections
You can specify certain properties for connections in the project settings that are then
assigned to every connection generated.
The properties specified in the project are inherited by the potential. The potentials
then pass on their properties to the signals and then the connections. You can
manually change the data on the individual levels and define additional properties.
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Connections > Properties
2. In the individual fields specify the default values for the connection properties.
EPLAN Training 13
Connections
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 14
Connections
Precondition:
2. Specify the name of the signal and the potential in the Potential definition tab
of the Properties <...> dialog in the Name of potential and Signal name
fields. Click [...] to open a selection dialog with signal and potential names
defined in the project.
EPLAN Training 15
Connections
3. In the Properties field change the values for the already specified properties,
or create new ones.
4. In the Display tab you can change how properties are displayed in the
schematic and in the Connection graphic tab you can change the graphical
properties of the connection lines.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 16
Connections
2. In the Connection definition point tab of the Properties <...> dialog, change
the default connection properties or create new ones.
EPLAN Training 17
Connections
3. In the Display tab you can change how properties are displayed in the
schematic and in the Connection graphic tab you can change the graphical
properties of the connection lines.
4. In the Parts tab you can assign parts data to the connection.
5. Click [OK].
The defined properties are only assigned to the connection that intersects
the connection definition point in question. You can change the properties of
more than one connection if you make a multiple selection of connection
definition points.
EPLAN Training 18
Connections
EPLAN Training 19
Connections
2. In the Properties <...> dialog change the connection properties in the
Connection tab and the graphical properties in the Connection graphics tab.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 20
Connections
1. Select the menu items Insert > Connection definition point and place the
connection definition point on a connection line.
2. In the Properties <...> dialog select the Connection definition point tab and
click [...] next to the Displayed DT field.
All unplaced and placed connections of the project are listed in the Use
existing connections dialog. Connections where both targets match the
targets of the selected connections are at the top of the list. After that are the
EPLAN Training 21
Connections
connections where one target is identical, then the unplaced connections
without targets and finally all other placed and unplaced connections.
The connection is used, i.e., its properties are transferred to the connection
definition point.
4. Click [OK].
You can only use existing if the connection definition point is uniquely assigned to
one individual connection. If this is not the case, then an appropriate message is
displayed.
EPLAN Training 22
Connections
9 Placing Connections
In general, it is possible to place unplaced connections, or to place already placed
connections again.
EPLAN Training 23
Connections
2. Select Popup menu > Place.
EPLAN Training 24
Connections
1. Mark the desired connection definition points and select the menu items Edit >
Delete placement.
Note:
EPLAN Training 25
Connections
You can only delete a placement if the connection definition point is uniquely
assigned to one individual connection. If this is not the case, then an appropriate
message is displayed.
EPLAN Training 26
Connections
EPLAN Training 27
Potentials and Signals
EPLAN Training 1
Potentials and Signals
EPLAN Training 2
Potentials and Signals
Precondition:
1. Select the menu items Insert > Potential definition point or Insert >
Potential connection point.
The symbol for the potential definition or point hangs on the cursor.
EPLAN Training 3
Potentials and Signals
3. In the properties dialog, in the Potential definition tab, enter the potential
properties (and other properties in the other tabs if required).
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 4
Potentials and Signals
Precondition:
In the user settings, you have defined the color to be used for highlighting the signal
or potential (Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing > General, in the
Track potential drop-down list).
EPLAN Training 5
Potentials and Signals
1. Click a connection symbol or a connection line.
EPLAN searches for the associated signal and colors this completely (i.e.,
also over page boundaries).
The highlighting of the first signal is removed and the signal associated with
this connection is colored.
3. Select the menu item View > Signal tracking a second time.
EPLAN Training 6
Potentials and Signals
EPLAN Training 7
Black Boxes
Black Boxes
EPLAN Training 1
Black Boxes
EPLAN Training 2
Black Boxes
Precondition:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
Insert > Box / connection point / mounting panel > Black box
EPLAN Training 3
Black Boxes
2. Enter the item data in the black box specific Properties dialog.
3. Click [OK].
4. Proceed in a similar manner for all black boxes that you would like to insert.
The black box is inserted into the project with all its properties.
Note:
If grip-snap is switched on (Options > Snap to grid) then a newly created black box
will be exactly on the grid on which it is placed. If grid-snap is not active, the black
box can be drawn at any desired position next to the grid.
1. Double-click the black box that you would like to edit. (Or select Popup menu
> Properties, in this case you can select more than one black box.)
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 5
Black Boxes
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
1. Select the menu item Insert > Box / connection point / mounting panel >
Device connection point or Insert > Box / connection point / mounting
panel > Device connection point (two-sided).
The symbol for the device connection point hangs on the cursor.
2. If required, use the [Ctrl] key to browse the existing connection point variants.
3. Click the left mouse button to place the connection point symbol on the page.
5. Click [OK].
The connection points with their device tags and connection point designations are
inserted into the page.
EPLAN Training 6
Black Boxes
Note:
Two sided device connection points only have a common connection point
designation (as with terminal numbers in terminals). They are represented by a
symbol with which you can distinguish between the external and internal sides. The
symbol has four variations accordingly. The associated function definition has the
following properties (Connection point logic dialog):
Transfer potential: Yes
PLC target tracking: No
One direct connection point each for the internal side, and a general connection point
for the external side.
EPLAN Training 7
Black Boxes
1. Double-click the device connection point that you would like to edit. (Or select
Popup menu > Properties, in this case you can select more than one
connection point.)
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 8
Black Boxes
Notes:
For device connection points with only one connection point, no relationship to
other device connection points can be defined; for this reason, the fields used
for defining the connection point logic are grayed out.
Device connection points lying within a box, and which have no DT of their own,
are always auxiliary functions. Cross-references are never displayed for these,
since the cross-reference to the box is sufficient.
Device connection points that are not within a box are cross-referenced. The
main function can be a device connection point or a box.
EPLAN Training 9
Black Boxes
Preconditions
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
1. Double-click the device connection point that you would like to edit. Or select
Popup menu > Properties, in this case you can select more than one
connection point.
The string after the (first) ":" character (1 in the example above) is entered
into the Connection point designation field.
4. Change the entry in the Displayed DT field one more time, by entering the
same data without the colon.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 10
Black Boxes
The string from the Displayed DT is displayed at the appropriate device connection
point on the schematic page (assuming it is not set to Invisible in the Display tab).
Note:
The full DT contains no connection point designation.
EPLAN Training 11
Black Boxes
6 Grouping Components
Black boxes provide grouping of components (connection points, functions, or
devices). The allocation of a component to a device can occur in a number of
different ways:
Through the "acquisition from left (or above)" an existing component with a DT
that is located there.
A component that is located outside the box, or is not allocated to a device, or for
which no "acquisition from left (or above)" is possible, has no DT. A component
without its own DT that is located within a black box and is then subsequently "pulled
out" of the box and becomes a component without a DT.
Precondition:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
Example:
Move the lamp -H1 into the black box -U1. The lamp automatically becomes the
nested lamp -U1-H1.
Move a lamp without a DT into the black box -U2. The lamp receives the DT of the
EPLAN Training 12
Black Boxes
Preconditions:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
You have activated nesting for the respective component (using Popup menu >
Project Properties > Structure > Separator > [...] from the Page Navigator).
Example:
Insert the lamp -H2 into the black box -U1. The lamp automatically becomes the
nested lamp -U1-H2. Insert another lamp outside the box, and allocate this new lamp
the DT -U1-H2.
EPLAN Training 13
Black Boxes
Example:
The lamp in -U1 is thus called -U1, and the lamp in -U2 is called -U2. If the box -U2
did not have its own name, then it will be called -U1 (i.e. it would assume the DT of
the box to the left), and the lamp within will also be called -U1.
Note:
The insertion point of the boxes must be at the same height.
Precondition:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
1. Draw two black boxes (Insert > Box / connection point / mounting panel >
Black box), whose insertion points are at the same height.
2. Allocate the left-hand box to a DT using the Black Box tab of the Properties
dialog in the Displayed DT field.
EPLAN Training 14
Black Boxes
4. Click [OK].
Only when you allocate the right-hand box with its own independent Displayed DT,
will the Full DT be updated; and only when the two device tags are different will they
be displayed with the respective boxes.
EPLAN Training 15
Black Boxes
EPLAN Training 16
Location Boxes
Location Boxes
EPLAN Training 1
Location Boxes
EPLAN Training 2
Location Boxes
Preconditions:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
In the settings, the check box Use Place identifiers dialog (Options > Settings
> User > Display > Identifiers) is selected.
Insert > Box / connection point / mounting panel > Location box
EPLAN Training 3
Location Boxes
2. Enter the item data in the location box specific Properties dialog.
EPLAN Training 4
Location Boxes
3. In the Identifier tab, click [...] in the Full DT field.
4. Accept the default for the DT or make new entries for the identifier blocks if
you would like to modify the structure.
5. Click [OK].
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 5
Location Boxes
8. Specify the position for the new identifier in the Place identifiers dialog using
the buttons.
9. Click [OK].
10. Proceed in a similar manner for all of the location boxes you would like to
insert.
11. Select Popup menu > Cancel action to terminate the action.
The location box is inserted into the project with all its properties.
Note:
If grid-snap is switched on (Options > Snap to grid) then a newly created location
box will be placed exactly on the grid on which it is placed; if grid-snap is not active,
the location box can be drawn at any desired position next to the grid.
EPLAN Training 6
Location Boxes
In the settings, the check box Use Place identifiers dialog (Options > Settings
> User > Display > Identifiers) is selected.
1. Double-click the location box you would like to edit. (Or select Popup menu >
Properties, in this case you can select more than one location box.)
2. Edit the desired data in the property dialog specific to the location box.
EPLAN Training 7
Location Boxes
3. In the Identifier tab, click [...] in the Full DT field.
4. Accept the default for the DT or make new entries for the identifier blocks if
you would like to modify the structure.
5. Click [OK].
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 8
Location Boxes
8. Specify the position for the new identifier in the Place identifiers dialog using
the buttons.
9. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 9
Location Boxes
Example:
If you have multiply nested location boxes =A2+O2, =A3+O3, and =A4+O4, and have
made the setting Nesting = Yes (left part of the illustration), then the fuse receives
the DT =A2.A3.A4+O2.O3.O4-F3; if Nesting = No is set (right side) then the fuse is
called =A4+O4-F3.
When this setting is changed, therefore, all components located in location boxes
must be edited.
The view is always from outside inwards, i.e., in the outermost location box the
missing parts are taken from the page. A box located within this box then completes
its missing parts from the box outside it, and so on. Finally, the components fill in
their missing parts from the innermost box. That means that missing or incomplete
identifiers in the displayed DT entry are completed from the superordinate unit,
where a superordinate unit can be a page, a location box, or a black box.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 10
Location Boxes
1. In the tree view of the page navigator, select popup menu > Project
Properties.
EPLAN Training 11
Location Boxes
2. In the Project properties dialog, bring the Structure tab to the front.
EPLAN Training 12
Location Boxes
4. In the Extended project structures dialog, select the Location box check
box in the Nesting group box.
5. Click [OK].
6. Click [OK].
The project structures are changed and the device identifier adjusted.
In the Full DT field, the nesting for each inner box will be shown using the
nested device tag.
Note:
Identifiers in the displayed DT of the location box will always be interpreted as sub-
identifiers, regardless of whether the separator for sub-identifiers (period) was
entered or not.
EPLAN Training 13
Location Boxes
EPLAN Training 14
Block Editing
Block Editing
EPLAN Training 1
Block Editing
EPLAN Training 2
Block Editing
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 3
Block Editing
2. To select additional objects, hold down the [Ctrl] key and click the objects.
The selected objects are selected. Selected objects are colored differently
in the graphical editor, and the insertion points are displayed.
Precondition:
You have opened a project and are viewing a page in the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 4
Block Editing
1. Move the mouse pointer over the desired object.
All objects of the selected types are marked in color on the currently open
page and shown with their insertion points.
Example:
EPLAN Training 5
Block Editing
Your schematic page includes cables -W20, -W21, and -W22. To perform a block edit
on these cables, you use the option of selecting objects of the same type.
Use the mouse to move the crosshair onto the definition line of -W20. Cable -W20 is
marked in color.
You then select Popup menu > Highlight objects of the same type. Cables -W20,
-W21, and -W22 are marked in color and shown with their insertion points. Now you
can change the properties of these cables in one step using block editing.
Precondition:
You have opened a project and are viewing a page in the graphical editor.
1. In the graphical editor, hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse
pointer to draw a frame around the desired objects.
All selected objects within the frame are marked in color and shown with
their insertion points.
EPLAN Training 6
Block Editing
Precondition:
You have drawn a frame on the page. All objects within the frame are marked in color
and shown with their insertion points.
1. Move the mouse pointer inside the area onto the desired object.
The insertion points of all objects of the chosen type are kept within the
area. For all other objects, the selection within the area is removed.
EPLAN Training 7
Block Editing
Precondition:
2. Click in the corresponding input field and enter the desired value.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 8
Block Editing
Precondition:
You have opened project management and selected multiple projects in the tree
view. The project properties are visible, but grayed out and can't be edited.
All fields and tables of the property dialog into which you can write values
are shown in white and can now be edited.
2. Switch to the appropriate tab and enter the desired values for the properties
and / or select values.
3. Click [OK].
Precondition:
You have opened a project and displayed the navigator dialog Pages - <Project
Name>. You have selected multiple pages in the overview. Whether you choose the
tree or the list view doesn't matter.
EPLAN Training 9
Block Editing
1. Select Edit > Properties.
2. Enter the desired values for the properties and / or select values.
3. Click [OK].
Precondition:
You have opened a project. You have also opened a schematic page in the graphical
editor and selected multiple objects of the same type (same type of component) or in
the case of objects of different types (different kinds of component) you have
selected an object type.
2. Enter the desired values for the properties and / or select values.
EPLAN Training 10
Block Editing
3. Click [OK].
Precondition:
You have opened a project. You have also opened a page in the graphical editor.
EPLAN displays the Text format or Graphical format toolbars. The fields
are still grayed out at first.
The selected texts or graphical elements are marked in color and their
insertion points displayed. At the same time, the buttons on the toolbar are
shown in white and can now be edited.
EPLAN accepts the changed properties into the selected text objects or
graphical elements on the page.
EPLAN Training 11
Block Editing
Precondition:
You have opened a project. You have also opened a project data dialog (for instance
the navigator dialog Devices - <Project Name>) and selected multiple objects of the
same type there (same kinds of functions or project data). Or you have selected an
object type in the case of objects of different types (different functions or project
data).
2. Enter the desired values for the properties and / or select values.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 12
Block Editing
EPLAN Training 13
Single-line Display
Single-line Display
EPLAN Training 1
Single-line Display
EPLAN Training 2
Single-line Display
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 3
Single-line Display
EPLAN Training 4
Single-line Display
2. Select the desired symbol from the Symbol selection dialog.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 5
Single-line Display
EPLAN Training 6
Single-line Display
2. Place the connection definition point on the autoconnection line between
the desired symbols in the graphical editor.
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, in the Connection definition point tab, enter
the desired data.
EPLAN Training 7
Single-line Display
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 8
Single-line Display
Precondition:
You have opened a page of type Schematic single-line in the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 9
Single-line Display
EPLAN Training 10
Single-line Display
2. Draw the PLC box representing a PLC card as a rectangle.
3. In the properties dialog, enter the device data for the PLC box.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 11
Single-line Display
5. Repeat the previous steps for all the other PLC cards.
EPLAN Training 12
Single-line Display
2. Place the bus port within the PLC cards.
3. In the properties dialog that appears, enter the device data for the bus port; for
the function definition select "Bus input" or "Bus output".
EPLAN Training 13
Single-line Display
4. Click [OK].
5. Connect the corresponding bus nodes together for each bus system by
generating autoconnect lines between the bus ports on the PLC cards.
EPLAN Training 14
Single-line Display
1. Select the menu items Insert > Connection definition point.
EPLAN Training 15
Single-line Display
2. Place the connection definition points on the connection lines between the
cards.
3. For each connection definition point, enter the connection data in the
properties dialog.
EPLAN Training 16
Single-line Display
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 17
Single-line Display
Combined connections must be labeled on the points at which they leave the bundle
and where they enter the bundle.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 18
Single-line Display
2. Place several bundle connection point symbols (T-node, angle, etc.) at the
desired component to combine them to a bundle connection point.
EPLAN Training 19
Single-line Display
3. Generate another bundle connection point for the component to be connected.
EPLAN Training 20
Single-line Display
4. Select Insert > Connection definition point.
EPLAN Training 21
Single-line Display
5. Place the connection definition point on the autoconnection line between
the symbols.
EPLAN Training 22
Single-line Display
6. Enter the desired data in the Properties <...> dialog, in the Connection
definition point tab.
EPLAN Training 23
Single-line Display
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 24
Single-line Display
A bundle connection point symbol is combined from multiple individual symbols. You
can put together your own bundle connection point symbol. The individual parts are
connected together with a special colored autoconnection line. The following symbols
are available in all four angle variants:
T-node
The thin ends of the bundle connection point symbols are the connection points to
the components, while the wide ends are the connection points to the autoconnection
line.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 25
Single-line Display
1. From the Symbol selection, select the symbol Angle bundle left.
EPLAN Training 26
Single-line Display
2. Place the angle at the desired component.
EPLAN Training 27
Single-line Display
3. From the Symbol selection, select the symbol Angle bundle right.
EPLAN Training 28
Single-line Display
4. Place the angle at the desired component.
EPLAN Training 29
Single-line Display
5. From the Symbol selection, select the symbol Double junction - bundle.
7. In the Edit bundle connection point data dialog, enter the desired
designation for the connection point into the Bundle connection point
designation field and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 30
Single-line Display
Note:
Bundle connections (autoconnecting and symbols) are graphically not influenced by
entries for the connection graphics on potentials or on connections.
EPLAN Training 31
Single-line Display
Precondition:
2. Select the menu item Utilities > Synchronization and, for a multi-line object
select Multi-line --> single-line and overview, for a single-line object select
Single-line --> multi-line and overview and for an object in the overview,
select Overview--> multi-line and single-line.
EPLAN Training 32
Single-line Display
Precondition:
1. From the Symbol selection, select the symbol for the two-sided cable
definition.
2. Place the symbol on the autoconnecting line between the desired objects.
3. In the properties dialog, enter the connection data for the cable.
EPLAN Training 33
Single-line Display
7 Converting Macros
You can convert single-line symbols to multi-line symbols and vice versa on a page in
the graphical editor. The representation type changes accordingly. The other
properties remain unchanged.
Precondition:
2. Select the menu items Utilities > Exchange symbols single-line <--> multi-
line.
EPLAN Training 34
Single-line Display
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 35
Single-line Display
2. You select the menu item Project Data > Devices > Number.
In the Preview of result dialog, the devices are shown with the new
numbering.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 36
Single-line Display
EPLAN Training 37
Terminals
Terminals
EPLAN Training 1
Terminals
EPLAN Training 2
Terminals
1. Scroll through the tree structure in the Symbol selection dialog, select the
desired terminal, and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 3
Terminals
3. In the Properties <...> dialog specify the device data for the terminal in the
Terminal tab.
4. In the Displayed DT field, enter a new or existing DT. Click [...] to open the
DT selection dialog and register an existing function or create a new DT using
[Next] .
5. Click [OK].
If you specified a new DT that does not already exist, then EPLAN will
generate a new terminal strip. However, this strip will have no terminal strip
definition.
2. In the Properties <...> dialog, specify the device data for the terminal strip in
the Terminal Strip Definition tab.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 5
Terminals
If you would like to just create a new terminal strip (without other properties), simply
enter the DT for the terminal strip in the Properties <...> dialog when you insert the
terminal. A non-default terminal strip will be generated that has no terminal strip
definition. A non-default terminal strip of this sort is visible in reports but you cannot
assign properties to it (this is only possible via the terminal strip definition).
Initially, you can create non-default terminal strips and then edit their properties later
on. However, you can also specify settings for the terminal strips upon creation. You
can use the function definition to generate a terminal strip with default properties.
In the Terminal strip definition tab of the Properties dialog you can edit the
properties of a terminal strip.
EPLAN Training 6
Terminals
1. Select Popup menu > Generate terminal strip.
EPLAN Training 7
Terminals
2. In the Properties <...> dialog, in the Terminal strip definition tab, enter the
desired data for the new terminal strip.
3. Click [OK].
If you do not enter any data, a non-predefined terminal strip will be created.
You can then define this at a later time.
EPLAN Training 8
Terminals
1. Select a DT and select Popup menu > New.
EPLAN Training 9
Terminals
2. Select a terminal strip definition in the Selection field of the Function
definitions dialog.
The data in the terminal strip definition is displayed on the Attributes and
Connection data tabs.
3. To obtain a preview of the symbol, in the Attributes tab, select the Basic
symbol preview check box.
4. Click [OK].
5. In the Properties <...> dialog, in the Terminal strip definition tab, enter the
desired data for the new terminal strip.
EPLAN Training 10
Terminals
6. Click [OK].
Below the selected DT, a terminal strip definition with the appropriate
properties will be created.
If you do not enter any data, a non-predefined terminal strip will be created.
You can then define this at a later time.
EPLAN Training 11
Terminals
EPLAN Training 12
Terminals
2. Select the menu item Project data > Terminal strips > Edit.
3. Edit the selected terminal strip in the Edit terminal strip dialog. Use the
editing features of the popup menu for this.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 13
Terminals
EPLAN Training 14
Terminals
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, in the Terminal strip definition tab, edit the
data for the selected terminal strip.
4. Click [OK].
Tip:
You can copy and place terminal strips using Drag & Drop, by dragging selected
terminal strips from the navigator and dropping them into an open page in the
graphical editor within your project.
EPLAN Training 15
Terminals
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 16
Terminals
Initially, you can create non-default terminals and then edit their properties later.
However, you can also specify settings for the terminal upon creation. You can use
the function definition to generate terminals with default properties.
EPLAN Training 17
Terminals
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, in the Terminal tab, enter the desired data for
the new terminal.
4. Click [OK].
Tip:
You can also create terminals in the same manner in the Edit terminal strip dialog.
EPLAN Training 18
Terminals
Using Popup menu > New functions you can create several terminals at the same
time.
1. Select a DT or a terminal strip definition and select Popup menu > New.
EPLAN Training 19
Terminals
2. In the Function definitions dialog in the Selection field scroll through the tree
structure and select the desired terminal.
3. To obtain a preview of the symbol, in the Attributes tab, select the Basic
symbol preview check box.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 20
Terminals
5. In the Properties <...> dialog, in the Terminal tab, enter the desired data for
the new terminal.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 21
Terminals
EPLAN Training 22
Terminals
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, in the Terminal tab, edit the data for the
selected terminal.
4. Click [OK].
Tip:
You can copy and place terminals using Drag & Drop, by dragging selected terminals
from the navigator and dropping them into an open page in the graphical editor
within your project.
EPLAN Training 23
Terminals
The individual terminals are identified in the function template by the terminal
designation, the function definition, and the level. If there is no terminal designation in
the function template, the template works for any terminal designation in the project.
If any terminal is deleted in the schematic, it will remain in the terminal strip and can
be used or placed again.
The function template (i.e., the terminal strip construction) can be transferred using
the copy function or macros.
Precondition:
You have selected one or more terminals in the terminal strip navigator, the device
navigator or the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 24
Terminals
1. In the Edit terminal strip dialog select all terminals that belong to the function
template (as a rule, all terminals in the strip). To mark individual terminals,
press and hold down the [Ctrl] key and click the first field of each desired
terminal.
Function templates are created for the selected terminals and the line
number is moved to the foremost field.
Precondition:
You have selected one or more terminals in the terminal strip navigator, the device
navigator or the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 25
Terminals
Project data > Terminal strips > Edit
1. In the Edit terminal strip dialog, select all or just individual terminals. To mark
individual terminals, press and hold the [Ctrl] key and click the first field of
each desired terminal.
The function template for the selected terminal is deleted and the row
number will be removed from the foremost field.
EPLAN Training 26
Terminals
Precondition:
You have selected one or more terminals in the terminal strip navigator, the device
navigator or the graphical editor.
Precondition:
You have selected one or more terminals in the terminal strip navigator, the device
navigator or the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 27
Terminals
1. In the Edit terminal strip dialog select a row and click in the foremost field
with the row number.
3. In the Part selection dialog scroll through the tree structure and select the
desired strip accessory.
4. Click [OK].
The strip accessory is added to the end of the list, but you can move it if
you would like to.
EPLAN Training 28
Terminals
o Strip label
o Rail
o Plug housing
o Plug accessory
o Test accessory
o Mounting rail
o Partition plate
EPLAN Training 29
Terminals
o Jumper (Potential rail)
o Other labels
o Tools.
Precondition:
You have selected one or more terminals in the terminal strip navigator, the device
navigator or the graphical editor.
1. In the Edit terminal strip dialog click in the foremost field with the position
specification in order to select the strip accessory.
The selected strip accessory is deleted, i.e., the parts entry is deleted from
the terminal strip definition.
EPLAN Training 30
Terminals
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 31
Terminals
6 Sorting Terminals
In the Edit terminal strip dialog, you can change the order of the terminals within the
terminal strip.
Precondition:
You have selected one or more terminals in the terminal strip navigator, the device
navigator, or the graphical editor.
1. In the table in the Edit terminal strip dialog click in foremost field of the
desired terminal in order to select the terminal.
2. Hold down the [Ctrl] key and select any other terminals that you would like to
move.
EPLAN Training 32
Terminals
3. Move the selected terminals with the arrow keys to the desired position on the
terminal strip.
The terminals are sorted according to the order of the sort code on the terminal
strips. If multiple terminals have the same sort code or if the sort code is empty, these
terminals are sorted according to the order of the terminal designation.
Tip:
The [Sort] button allows you to automatically sort all terminals in a terminal strip.
EPLAN Training 33
Terminals
7 Numbering Terminals
The terminal designation uniquely identifies the terminal on the terminal strip. In the
Number terminals dialog you can specify settings for the terminal designation and
renumber the selected terminals. Use the numbering template to specify the terminal
designations.
Precondition:
You have selected one or more terminals in the terminal strip navigator, the device
navigator or the graphical editor.
1. From the Scheme drop-down list of the Number terminals dialog, select the
desired numbering scheme, or click [...] in the Settings: Numbering dialog to
create a new scheme.
2. In the fields Start value and Increment define the appropriate values, and in
the Number of digits field, define the number of displayed characters for the
numbering.
EPLAN Training 34
Terminals
3. Select the desired options for the sequence and extent of the numbering.
5. Select the corresponding check boxes in order to specify additional options for
numbering.
6. Click [OK].
Numbering is carried out according to the settings and the new terminal
designations are assigned to the appropriate terminals.
EPLAN Training 35
Terminals
The following describes the process of moving terminals in the terminal strip
navigator. Move pins in the same way using the plug navigator.
3. In the By how many field of the Move dialog, select the desired value or
specify a value directly in the field.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 36
Terminals
Precondition:
You have selected one or more terminals in the terminal strip navigator, the device
navigator or the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 37
Terminals
3. Specify the desired settings.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 38
Terminals
10 Generating Jumpers
You can generate saddle jumpers automatically or specify manually whether a saddle
jumper should be used on a terminal.
Wire jumpers are automatically generated if the terminal has no saddle jumper.
Precondition:
You have selected one terminal in the terminal strip navigator, the device navigator or
the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 39
Terminals
2. Select the desired setting from the Saddle jumper drop-down list.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 40
Terminals
Within the terminal strip there are terminals with the same designation but with
different values for the levels of a multi-level terminal.
Precondition:
You have selected one terminal in the terminal strip navigator, the device navigator,
or the graphical editor.
A value > 0 defines the terminal as a multi-level terminal; the value "0"
defines the terminal as a "simple" terminal.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 41
Terminals
EPLAN Training 42
Cables
Cables
EPLAN Training 1
Cables
EPLAN Training 2
Cables
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 3
Cables
The symbol for the cable definition line hangs on the crosshair.
EPLAN Training 4
Cables
2. Drag the line over the connections to be included in the cable. Click with the
left mouse button to establish the start and end point of the line.
EPLAN Training 5
Cables
3. In the Properties <...> dialog you can change the DT and specify additional
properties for the cable.
4. Click [OK].
Notes:
If you want to retroactively reduce the cable definition line, the connection
definition points on connections that are no longer intersected will be deleted.
If you enlarge the cable definition line, new connection definition points are set
for newly intersected connections.
EPLAN Training 6
Cables
2. Drag the shield (like a rectangle) over the connections to be shielded. Click
with the left mouse button to establish the start and end point of the shield.
EPLAN Training 7
Cables
3. In the Properties <...> dialog you can change the DT and specify additional
properties for the shield.
EPLAN Training 8
Cables
4. If you want to suppress the display of properties on the shield, select the entry
"No display" in the Property arrangement field on the Display tab.
5. Click [OK].
Notes:
If you want to retroactively reduce the shield, the connection definition points on
connections that are no longer within the shield will be deleted. If you enlarge
the shield, new connection definition points are set for newly included
connections.
In the user settings (Options > Settings > User > Graphical editing >
Connection symbols) you can determine whether the property dialog will be
shown or not when inserting shields.
EPLAN Training 9
Cables
In addition to properties that all other devices also have, there are special properties
for cables and shields. These are displayed in the Cable tab in the Properties dialog
and can be edited there. The property dialog can be called from the graphical editor
or from the navigator dialogs Devices - <Project name> or Cables - <Project
name>.
EPLAN Training 10
Cables
EPLAN Training 11
Cables
2. Select the menu item Edit > Properties.
EPLAN Training 12
Cables
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, select the Cable tab.
EPLAN Training 13
Cables
1. Select a cable definition in the Cables - <Project name> dialog.
EPLAN Training 14
Cables
2. Select Popup menu > Properties.
EPLAN Training 15
Cables
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, select the Cable tab.
EPLAN Training 16
Cables
The "Generate cables automatically" functionality can be called from different places
in the program. These include from selections in the graphical editor or in the
navigator dialogs Pages - <Project name>, Connections - <Project name>,
Cables - <Project name>, or Devices - <Project name>. It can be used on the
entire project.
After generating the cable, they are automatically numbered and a cable selection is
made.
Precondition:
The connections have been generated and are up-to-date (Project data >
Connections > Update).
EPLAN Training 17
Cables
1. Click [...] in the Settings field of the Generate cables automatically dialog.
2. In the Settings: Cable generation dialog you specify the objects on which
cable properties are to be placed and which objects are to be taken into
consideration when generating cables. Select the appropriate check boxes
and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 18
Cables
3. In the Cable numbering group box in the Generate cables automatically
dialog specify the settings for cable numbering. Select a suitable scheme from
the Settings drop-down list, or click [...] to open the Settings: Cable
numbering dialog to create or change a scheme.
4. In the Start value and Increment fields specify the value at which the DT
counter should begin as well as the value by which the counter should
increase.
5. Specify whether you want to keep the DT from already numbered cables,
whether you want to number only the selected cables or all the cables in the
project, and whether you want to see a preview before the final numbering
takes place. Check the corresponding check boxes.
6. Specify the settings for the automatic cable selection in the Automatic cable
selection group box . Select a suitable scheme from the Settings drop-down
list, or click [...] to open the Settings: Automatic cable selection dialog to
create or change a scheme.
7. Specify whether the cable selection should be made for the entire project or
only for the selected elements, and whether it should be made only for
automatically generated cables or also for manually generated cables. Select
or deselect the Apply to entire project check box accordingly.
8. Click [OK].
Cable definition lines and connection definition points are generated in the
schematic. Only one cable definition line and one connection definition point
will be placed on the first graphical connection of a cable. Connection
definition points with the same DT will be placed on all other connections.
If you checked the Preview of result check box, you will see the Number
cables: Preview of result dialog. The old and new device tags for the newly
generated or already existing but unnamed cable definition lines, shields, and
connection definition points are displayed here. You can accept or change the
new device tags or keep the old ones.
EPLAN Training 19
Cables
The cable device tags are then numbered and the cable selection is made.
Whether or not the selection is made for newly generated cables or for all
cables depends on the settings. This results in completely designated cables
with devices.
Notes:
When automatically generating cables, only connections with the "Cable
connection" property activated and no "full DT" will be taken into
consideration. That could be conductors that belong to an existing cable. In
this case connection definition points will be set that immediately have the
right DT.
No cable is generated for connections with at least one target that is a graphical
or external function.
Cable definition lines are placed on a separate layer but not connection definition
points.
EPLAN Training 20
Cables
1. Select cables in the graphical editor or select pages or a project in the page
navigator.
2. Select the menu items Project data > Cables > Automatic -> Manual.
Switching this property for cable definition lines automatically also switched
EPLAN Training 21
Cables
the layer where the cable definition line is located (if the standard layer is set).
The layer is unchanged if you have selected a different standard layer.
Note:
To change individual cables to manually generated, open the Properties <...> dialog.
(for instance, by double-clicking on the cable.) Deselect the Automatically
generated check box in the Cables tab.
EPLAN Training 22
Cables
You can display cables in a distributed form by drawing multiple cable definition lines
and assigning them the same DT.
Cable connections can be defined either on the connection definition point or on the
connection point. The setting on the connection definition point overwrites all other
settings.
EPLAN Training 23
Cables
1. Select the menu items Insert > Connection definition point.
EPLAN Training 24
Cables
2. Place the connection definition point on a connection.
EPLAN Training 25
Cables
3. In the Displayed DT field of the Properties <...> dialog specify the DT of the
cable to which you want to assign the connection.
4. Select the Cable connection property in the table and select the check box in
the cell next to it.
5. Specify any additional conductor properties in the dialog and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 26
Cables
EPLAN Training 27
Cables
2. In the Properties <...> dialog, select the Symbol / function data tab and click
[Logic].
EPLAN Training 28
Cables
3. In the Connection point logic dialog select the Cable connection point
check box for the desired connection points.
4. You can also change the connection point type, the potential type, and other
properties of the connection point.
5. Click [OK].
The connections attached to the function get the properties from the
respective connection point and thus become cable connections.
EPLAN Training 29
Cables
5 Assigning Conductors
You can manually change the assignment of connections to conductors in the Edit
cable dialog. That dialog displays the existing function templates in the cable part
(i.e., the part conductors) as well as the functions of the cable defined in the project
(i.e., the connections) and their assignments.
Moving or exchanging connections are displayed in the changes on the right side of
the dialog. The order of the function templates on the left side always remains the
same.
EPLAN Training 30
Cables
1. In the Cables - <Project name> dialog, select a cable definition, a (placed)
conductor, or a shield.
EPLAN Training 31
Cables
2. Select Popup menu > Edit.
All connections to the associated cable are displayed in the Edit cable
dialog.
3. In the Connections table select a connection and move it using the arrow
buttons to the position where there is a free function template.
The connection transfers the data from the function template into the still
free properties. Existing properties of the connection superimpose the
template.
EPLAN Training 32
Cables
Tip:
To open the Edit cable dialog, you can also select a cable definition line, a shield, or
a connection definition point in the graphical editor and select the menu item
Project data > Cables > Edit .
EPLAN Training 33
Cables
1. In the Cables - <Project name> dialog, select a cable definition, a (placed)
conductor, or a shield.
EPLAN Training 34
Cables
2. Select Popup menu > Edit.
All connections to the associated cable are displayed in the Edit cable
dialog.
EPLAN Training 35
Cables
Tip:
To open the Edit cable dialog, you can also select a cable definition line, a shield, or
a connection definition point in the graphical editor and select the menu item
Project data > Cables > Edit .
Note:
If you exchange two shields in the Edit cable dialog, it has an indirect effect on the
shielded conductors. If the shield name of the shielded conductors change, they will
no longer match their function templates. The changes resulting from this are
displayed immediately.
EPLAN Training 36
Cables
6 Placing Cables
In EPLAN there are two different options for creating cables: When performing a
Place again in the Edit cable dialog, only the potential type is compared. When
performing a Place in the cable navigator or through the main menu, all identifying
properties of the connections and conductors are compared and only matching
conductors are placed.
Precondition:
You have selected a cable definition line in the graphical editor, or a cable definition
in the Cables - <Project name> navigator dialog.
1. In the Edit cable dialog, select Popup menu > Place again.
The conductors of the cable part are assigned to the connections, if the
potential type matches.
The structure of shields is retained, but the shield designations can change.
The sequence of the connections is defined by the rules for determining the
source and target of the cable or with terminals according to the order of
terminals on the terminal strips.
Precondition:
You have selected a cable definition line in the graphical editor, or a cable definition
in the Cables - <Project name> navigator dialog.
EPLAN Training 37
Cables
The conductors of the cable part are assigned to the connections if their
identifying properties match. If a property of the cable conductor is filled in, the
connection must have the same value. Blank properties of the cable conductors
match any value on the connection. Shielded conductors also match non-shielded
connections; however, if a matching shielded connection has already been found, it
will be assigned preferentially.
Example:
The property "Cross section" has the following values for the cable conductors and
the connection:
The sequence of the connections is defined by the rules for determining the
source and target of the cable or with terminals according to the order of
terminals on the terminal strips.
Function definition
Shielded by
Pair index
Potential type
Color / number
Cross-section.
EPLAN Training 38
Cables
In the project settings you can define a preselection list of cable types (cable parts)
for the automatic selection. Then only the cables from this list will be used for
automatic cable selection.
Precondition:
You have selected a cable definition in the graphical editor, or in the Cables -
<Project name> navigator dialog.
1. In the Settings field of the Automatic cable selection dialog select a scheme
that specifies the settings for the automatic cable selection, or click [...] to
open the Settings: Automatic cable selection dialog and create a new
scheme there.
EPLAN Training 39
Cables
2. Select the Only automatically generated cables check box if you only want
to assign parts to only those types of cables. Otherwise, the automatic cable
selection will also be made for manually generated or named cables.
3. Use the Apply to entire project check box to specify whether the cable
selection should be made for all cables in the project or only for the selected
ones.
4. Click [OK].
Notes:
The quantity of PE conductors (0, 1, or 2) specified in the PE conductors field is
taken into consideration when determining the quantity of conductors. If the
cable has no PE conductor and there is no cable in the corresponding voltage
range without PE, then a cable with PE conductors will be taken. The PE
conductor will be added to the number of conductors needed.
Arbitrary values can be predefined for the individual cables. This way, for
example, a cable type can already be entered on a cable in the schematic that
is not in the settings for the cable selection. A cable will then be selected
which corresponds to the cable type entered and has a suitable number of
conductors. A missing cross-section is taken from the defaults depending on
the voltage. The same values are used here as for manual cable selection.
EPLAN Training 40
Cables
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 41
Cables
Using the Allow manual cable selection only property for each cable you can
specify that the cable can only be manually selected. Those types of cables are then
not considered for the automatic cable selection.
Select a part from the parts database when making manual cable selections. The
procedure is exactly like selecting any other part.
EPLAN Training 42
Cables
EPLAN Training 43
Cables
1. Select a cable definition line, a shield, or a connection definition point in the
graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 44
Cables
2. Select the menu item Edit > Properties.
3. In the Properties <...> dialog select the Cable (or Connection definition
point) tab, and assign the "Cable connection" property to the component.
EPLAN Training 45
Cables
4. Click [...] next to the Displayed DT field.
In the DT - selection dialog, all cable DTs used in the project are shown.
EPLAN Training 46
Cables
5. Scroll through the tree or the list and select a DT. Or, independent of the
selection, generate a new DT using [Next].
6. Click [OK].
Note:
The following behavior applies when generating a new DT using [Next]:
EPLAN Training 47
Cables
If a conductor is selected, another cable definition is generated for the same DT.
You can also use an existing unplaced cable definition line. This is then deleted from
the list.
If you select a connection that represents a shield, the DT and the shield designation
are transferred. (The shield cable definition is not meant here, but rather the
connection on which the shield is attached.) The connection can be placed or
unplaced. It is not deleted because the actual connection is not used here.
Precondition:
The "Cable connection" property is set for the connection definition point.
EPLAN Training 48
Cables
1. Select a connection definition point in the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 49
Cables
2. Select the menu item Edit > Properties.
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, select the Cable definition point tab and
assign the "Cable connection" property to the connection definition point.
EPLAN Training 50
Cables
5. Select a connection in the DT selection dialog.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 51
Cables
10 Numbering Cables
There is a special numbering function for cables, which compared to the "normal" DT
numbering function has additional setting options.
Precondition:
You have selected a cable definition in the graphical editor, or in the Cables -
<Project name> navigator dialog.
1. In the Settings field of the Number cables dialog select a scheme that
specifies the settings for the cable numbering, or click [...] to open the
Settings: Cable numbering dialog and create a new scheme there.
2. In the Start value and Increment fields specify the value by which the DT
counter should begin as well as the value by which the counter should be
increased.
3. Select the Keep existing cable DTs check box if you want to keep the device
tags of already numbered cables. Otherwise, they will be renumbered and the
existing device tags will be overwritten.
EPLAN Training 52
Cables
4. Specify whether you want to number only the selected cables or all of the
cables in the project, and whether you want to preview the results before the
final numbering. Check the corresponding check boxes.
5. Click [OK].
If the Preview of result check box was checked, you will see the Number
cables: Preview of result dialog. This displays the old and new device tags of
the cable.
If the Preview of result check box was not selected, the new device tags
of the cable are immediately written to the project and displayed on the cable
definition lines.
6. If necessary, change the new device tags of the cable in the preview dialog.
7. Select the cables that are to keep their old device tags and select Popup
menu > Apply original DT.
EPLAN Training 53
Cables
8. Click [OK].
The new device tags of the cables are saved in the project and displayed
on the cable definition lines.
EPLAN Training 54
Cables
Multiple cables in EPLAN have the same cable type if the following properties match:
If all properties of the cable are specified, the complete cable type is available.
You can only calculate the cable quantities for the entire project.
Preconditions:
Cable lengths are entered for the cables.
The cable types and their calculated lengths are displayed in the Add up cable
lengths dialog. In addition, the length of the longest individual cable is displayed. A
part and its length are also shown, which is taken from the longest cable. The
required quantity of the part is also displayed.
1. If necessary, change the value displayed in the Required quantity field. (This
can be necessary if cutting problems arise: For three single lengths of 57 m,
three 100-m drums will be needed, not two.)
2. Select Popup menu > Parts selection if you want to select a new cable part.
EPLAN Training 55
Cables
3. Select Popup menu > Delete in order to delete a part and thus exclude it from
later reports.
4. Click [OK].
The old cable project parts are deleted and new ones are entered.
Note:
You can view, edit and delete the project parts in the Bill of materials - <Project
name> dialog. The changes, however, are overwritten in the next cable length
calculation.
3. Select the check box for the Do not use cable when adding up cable
lengths property.
4. Click [OK].
If the main part of the cable has a quantity of zero, a message will appear
because this value may have been generated while adding up the cable
lengths.
EPLAN Training 56
Cables
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 57
Cables
It may make sense to output the cable parts with quantities of zero: In this case the
accessory parts of cables as well as the premade cables that were not taken into
consideration for the cable calculation are output. The parts with quantities of zero
then display which cable is used there, and the project parts specify what needs to
be ordered.
Precondition:
2. In the Settings: Parts dialog select the Cable part check box so that cable
project parts are included in the parts list.
3. Activate the Cable project part check box, so that cable project parts will be
inserted into the parts list.
4. Select the Connection part check box so that cable parts of the individual
cables are included in the parts list.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 58
Cables
6. Select [Settings] > Display / output.
7. In the Settings: Display / output dialog select the Restrict output of cables
check box if you want to restrict output to cables that have a certain minimum
number of conductors.
9. Click [OK].
10. Click [New] to generate a new report, or select an existing report and update
this by clicking [Update].
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Reports > Part
1. Select the Cable part check box, the Cable project part check box, and / or
the Connection part check box in order to output the appropriate parts in the
parts list.
2. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 59
Cables
EPLAN Training 60
Plugs
Plugs
EPLAN Training 1
Plugs
5 Sorting Pins.................................................................................................27
EPLAN Training 2
Plugs
1. In the Symbol selection dialog, page through the tree structure, select the
desired pin, and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 3
Plugs
2. Place the pin on the page.
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, enter the device data of the pin in the Pin tab.
EPLAN Training 4
Plugs
4. In the Displayed DT field, enter a new or existing DT. Or click [...] to open the
DT selection dialog and register an existing function, or create a new DT
using [Next] .
5. Click [OK].
If you give an already existing DT, the pin will be assigned to the
corresponding plug.
If you give a DT that doesn't exist yet, EPLAN generates a new plug.
However, this doesn't have a plug definition yet.
EPLAN Training 5
Plugs
2. In the Properties <...> dialog, enter the device data of the plug in the Plug
definition tab.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 6
Plugs
If you only want to create a new plug (without any other properties), just enter the
plug DT in the Properties <...> dialog when you insert a pin. This creates a non-
predefined plug without a plug definition. Such a non-predefined plug is visible in
reports, but you can't assign it any properties (this can only be performed via a plug
definition).
You can create non-predefined plugs first and then edit the properties at a later date.
You can also determine the properties for plugs immediately as you create them. You
can create a plug with predefined properties using the function definitions.
In the Plug definition tab of the properties dialog, you can edit the properties of a
plug.
EPLAN Training 7
Plugs
2. Select one of the submenu items in order to determine whether the plug
consists of female pins, male pins, or a combination of male and female pins.
When managing the male and female pins together, select the entry Male and
female pins; when managing them separately, select Female pins or Male
pins in order to determine the female or male pin side of the plug.
EPLAN Training 8
Plugs
3. In the Properties <...> dialog in the Plug definition tab, enter the desired
data for the new plug.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 9
Plugs
1. Select a DT and select Popup menu > New.
EPLAN Training 10
Plugs
2. In the Function definitions dialog in the Selection field, mark a plug
definition.
3. To obtain a preview of the symbol, in the Attributes tab, select the Basic
symbol preview check box.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 11
Plugs
5. In the Properties <...> dialog in the Plug definition tab, enter the desired
data for the new plug.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 12
Plugs
EPLAN Training 13
Plugs
2. Select the menu items Project data > Plugs > Edit.
3. In the Edit plugs dialog, edit the selected plug. Use the editing features of the
popup menu for this.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 14
Plugs
EPLAN Training 15
Plugs
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, edit the properties of the selected plug in the
Plug definition tab.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 16
Plugs
When you create a pin, specify whether it's a male, a female or a male/female
combination, and then edit its properties. You can create a pin with predefined
properties using the function definitions.
In the Pin tab of the Properties dialog, you can edit the properties of a plug.
EPLAN Training 17
Plugs
2. Select Popup menu > Generate pin then one of the subitems Male and
female, Male, or Female.
EPLAN Training 18
Plugs
3. In the Properties <...> dialog in the Pin tab, enter the data you want for the
new pin.
4. Click [OK].
Tip:
In the same way, you can also create pins in the Edit plug dialog.
Popup menu > New functions allows you to create several pins at the same time.
EPLAN Training 19
Plugs
1. Select a DT or a plug definition, and select Popup menu > New.
EPLAN Training 20
Plugs
2. In the Function definitions dialog in the Selection field, page through the
tree structure and mark a pin.
The data for the pin is displayed on the Attributes and Connection point
data tabs.
3. To obtain a preview of the symbol, in the Attributes tab, select the Basic
symbol preview check box.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 21
Plugs
5. In the Properties <...> dialog, go to the Pin tab (or Male pin or Female pin) to
enter the desired data for the new pin.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 22
Plugs
2. Select Popup menu > Properties, or double-click on the selected pin.
EPLAN Training 23
Plugs
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, edit the data of the selected pin in the Pin tab.
4. Click [OK].
Tip:
You can place the pins using Drag & Drop, by dragging a highlighted pin from the
navigator onto your open page in the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 24
Plugs
4 Numbering Pins
The pin is uniquely identified in the plug using the pin designation. In the Number
pins dialog, you can change the settings for the designation and renumber the
selected pins. Use a numbering scheme to determine the designations for the pins.
Precondition:
You selected one or more plugs in the plug navigator, the device navigator or in the
graphical editor.
1. Select the numbering scheme you want from the Scheme drop-down list, or
click [...] to open the Properties : Numbering dialog and create a new scheme
here.
2. In the fields Start value and Increment define the appropriate values, and in
the Number of digits field, define the number of positions for the numbering.
3. Select the desired options for the sort order and the range of numbering.
EPLAN Training 25
Plugs
4. Select the corresponding check boxes to determine whether alphabetical
components should be retained and whether pins influenced by the PLC
should be numbered as well.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 26
Plugs
5 Sorting Pins
In the Edit plug dialog, you can change the order of the pins within the plug.
Precondition:
You highlighted a plug definition or a pin in the graphical editor, in the plug navigator,
or in the device navigator.
1. Click in the table in the Edit plug dialog in the first field of the desired pin in
order to select the row.
2. Hold the [Ctrl] key down and mark all of the additional pins that you would like
to move.
3. Move the selected pins into the desired position in the plug using the arrow
keys.
Tip:
EPLAN Training 27
Plugs
Use the [Sort] button to automatically sort all the pins in a plug.
EPLAN Training 28
Plugs
EPLAN Training 29
PLC
PLC
EPLAN Training 1
PLC
EPLAN Training 2
PLC
EPLAN Training 3
PLC
1. Select the menu item Insert > Box / connection point / mounting panel >
PLC box.
EPLAN Training 4
PLC
2. Draw the PLC box as a rectangle.
EPLAN Training 5
PLC
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, enter the device data of the PLC card.
EPLAN Training 6
PLC
1. Select the menu item Insert > Box / connection point / mounting panel >
PLC connection point <...>.
EPLAN Training 7
PLC
2. Place the PLC connection point in the PLC box.
The PLC connection point adopts the DT of the PLC box. A number of
additional properties are also displayed, but these are not editable.
EPLAN Training 8
PLC
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, enter the device data of the PLC connection
point.
EPLAN Training 9
PLC
The creation of PLC functions in the PLC - <Project name> dialog is described
below.
EPLAN Training 10
PLC
1. In the PLC - <Project name> dialog, select Popup Menu > New.
EPLAN Training 11
PLC
2. In the Function definitions dialog, select a PLC box or a PLC connection
point and click [OK].
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, edit the properties of the PLC box or the PLC
connection point. For example, enter a new DT for the PLC box.
EPLAN Training 12
PLC
4. Click [OK].
The new (unplaced) PLC box or PLC connection point is displayed in the
tree or the list.
1. Select a PLC box or connection point and then select Popup menu > Place >
Multi-line, to place the function on a schematic page. (Select ...> Single-line
or ...> Overview, to place the function in the single-line display or on an
overview page.)
EPLAN Training 13
PLC
2. In the Symbol selection dialog, select the symbol to be placed with the
function.
3. Click [OK].
4. Place the symbol in the schematic and click the left mouse button to insert it.
EPLAN Training 14
PLC
In the graphical editor, you edit the properties of placed PLC boxes and
connection points.
EPLAN Training 15
PLC
2. In the Properties <...> dialog, change the properties of the PLC box or the
PLC connection point.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 16
PLC
2. Select Popup menu> Properties.
EPLAN Training 17
PLC
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, change the properties of the PLC box or the
PLC connection point.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 18
PLC
Precondition:
You have selected several PLC connection points in the schematic, or in the PLC -
<Project name> navigator dialog; or project pages (or a project) containing PLC
connection points are selected in the Pages - <Project name> navigator dialog.
EPLAN Training 19
PLC
2. Select the Digital connection points and / or the Analog connection points
check boxes to define which connection points are to be addressed.
3. In the Digital start address and Analog start address fields, enter the
starting address for the first digital and analog PLC connection points. The
currently defined addressing format is displayed as an aid.
4. Use the Sorting drop-down list to define the order in which the PLC
connections are to be sorted. The connection points are fundamentally sorted
by the DT of the card; in addition, sorting can occur by the graphical order in
the schematic, in the order of channel designations or in the order of the
connection point designations.
5. Select the Preview of result check box to see a preview of the results before
the new addresses are adopted.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 20
PLC
In the Address PLC: Preview of result dialog the results of the
addressing are shown.
EPLAN Training 21
PLC
At a single PLC connection point, you can use the Properties <...> dialog to re-use
another connection point. In the Use existing PLC connection points blockwise
dialog, you can re-use several connection points at the same time (also for different
placements).
Precondition:
You have opened the Properties <...> dialog for a single PLC connection point.
1. Select the <Function category> tab and click [...] next to the Displayed DT
field.
In the DT - selection dialog, all PLC connections used in the project are
shown.
EPLAN Training 22
PLC
2. Navigate through the tree or list and select an unplaced PLC connection point,
or - depending on the selection - select a new one using [Next].
3. Click [OK].
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 23
PLC
You have selected multiple PLC connection points in the graphical editor or in the
navigator dialogs PLC - <Project name> or Devices - <Project name>.
2. Click [OK].
The selected unplaced PLC connection points are displayed in the From
table.
3. Use the arrow keys to move the unplaced PLC connection points in the right-
hand table and assign them to the existing placed PLC connection points in
the left-hand table To.
When moving, the entries may only be moved to another free position; no
EPLAN Training 24
PLC
change occurs to the unselected, occupied positions.
4. In the Use existing PLC connection points blockwise dialog, above the
table From, click [...] if you wish to re-open the Select unplaced PLC
connection points to place them blockwise dialog. Select the desired PLC
connection points and click [OK].
5. Click [OK].
The PLC connection points are re-used, i.e., their properties are adopted
by the assigned, placed PLC connection points.
Notes:
If, for a function in the schematic, you have also selected the associated function
in the overview page, then the same connection point is re-used for both
functions. Both placements then belong together after this. (If only one
placement was selected, then the relationship is lost!) Only one common entry
is displayed for both placements in the left-hand table. If the addresses of the
two placements are different, then the <<...>> character string is displayed in
the table. The <<...>> character string is also displayed for different
representation types.
If multiple PLC connection points exist in the project (with the same DT and
connection point designation), then both are listed. If the PLC connection point
occurs several times in the schematic and the associated PLC connection
point on the overview page only once, then only the graphically first PLC
connection point in the schematic is assigned to the relevant connection point
in the overview page.
EPLAN Training 25
PLC
At a single PLC connection point, you can use the Properties <...> dialog to re-use
an address. In the Use existing PLC connection points blockwise dialog, you can
use several addresses at the same time (also for different PLC connection point
placements).
Precondition:
You have opened the Properties <...> dialog for a single PLC connection point.
1. Select the <Function category> tab and click [...] next to the Address field.
The PLC addresses assigned to this processor are displayed in the table.
EPLAN Training 26
PLC
4. Click [OK].
Precondition:
You have selected several PLC connection points in the graphical editor, the PLC
navigator, or in the device navigator.
1. In the Use existing PLC addresses blockwise dialog, above the table From,
click [...].
EPLAN Training 27
PLC
2. In the Select unplaced PLC addresses to place them blockwise dialog,
select a processor from the PLC CPU drop-down list.
The PLC addresses assigned to this processor are displayed in the table.
3. Select the PLC addresses that you wish to use and click [OK].
4. Use the arrow keys to move the PLC addresses in the right-hand table and
assign them to the existing PLC connection points in the left-hand table To.
When moving, the entries may only be moved to another free position; no
change occurs to the unselected, occupied positions.
5. Click [OK].
The PLC addresses are re-used and assigned to the PLC connection
points.
At power supply connection points, the address, the symbolic address, and
the function text are only transferred if these properties already contained
values.
If you have also selected the associated power supply connection points
EPLAN Training 28
PLC
and representations on the overview pages for a PLC connection point, then
the address is re-used for all representations.
EPLAN Training 29
PLC
Project data > PLC > Addresses / assignment lists > [Extras] > Import
assignment list
2. Click on [Open].
All CPUs existing in the project are offered in the drop-down list.
Note:
oIf you wish to perform a pure Import (i.e., without overwriting any PLC
data in the project) enter a CPU here that is not in the project.
EPLAN Training 30
PLC
oIf you do not enter a CPU, the entries from the assignment list are
assigned to the unnamed CPU. If an unnamed CPU already exists in
the project, then existing entries are overwritten according to the
reference value.
4.
5. In the PLC-specific settings field, select a scheme from the drop-down list
defining the settings for the addressing format.
All languages defined in the translation settings for the project are
displayed in the drop-down list.
7. In the Reference value field, you define the criteria used by the system to
recognize existing entries. The CPU is always compared; within a CPU, either
the address or the symbolic address serve as the base value. Identical entries
are overwritten and the others are added to the list.
Note:
In the case of a pure import (i.e., a new CPU), the value in this field is not
relevant, since no addresses exist for this CPU yet.
8.
9. Select the Import / synchronize all identifiers check box if you want to
import all addresses existing in the assignment list. The designations are not
accounted for, i.e., addresses that are not defined in EPLAN are also imported
EPLAN Training 31
PLC
(e.g., timer, tag etc.). Otherwise, only the identifiers specified in the PLC-
specific settings dialog, in the Addresses tab are defined.
The addresses in the assignment list are imported according to the project
settings.
EPLAN Training 32
PLC
1. In the Export assignment list dialog, in the PLC CPU field, select the CPU
whose assignment data you wish to export. You can create a common
assignment list for all processors, or a separate list for each processor.
All CPUs existing in the project are offered in the drop-down list.
2. In the PLC-specific settings field, select a scheme from the drop-down list
defining the settings for the addressing format.
All languages defined in the translation settings for the project are
displayed in the drop-down list.
4. In the File name field, enter the name of the file where the exported data is to
be stored.
EPLAN Training 33
PLC
5. Click [OK].
The addresses from the assignment list are written to the export file.
EPLAN Training 34
PLC
EPLAN Training 35
PLC Address Formats
EPLAN Training 1
PLC Address Formats
EPLAN Training 2
PLC Address Formats
1. Select the menu item Project data > PLC > Settings.
2. In the Settings: PLC, click [...] next to the Settings: PLC-specific field.
EPLAN Training 3
PLC Address Formats
3. In the Settings: PLC-specific dialog bring the Address formats tab into the
foreground.
EPLAN Training 4
PLC Address Formats
6. In the Format of PLC address dialog, you define the address format using
the format elements Counter and Separator. In the Available format
elements list, select the Counter element and use the arrow key to copy it to
the right into the Selected format elements list.
7. In the Format: Counter dialog, you define the format for the counter. Select
the number system to be used for displaying the counter, define the start and
end values for the addressing and also the number of digits.
8. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 5
PLC Address Formats
9. In the Available format elements list, select the Separator element and use
the arrow key to copy it to the right into the Selected format elements list.
10. In the Format: Separator dialog, you define the character to be used for
displaying the separator.
12. Format the next counter and separator in the manner described above and
continue until the desired address format has been built. Every counter and
separator can be defined separately from each other.
EPLAN Training 6
PLC Address Formats
13. Click [OK].
A preview of the address format is displayed in the preview field, where the
format elements are represented by identifiers.
EPLAN Training 7
PLC Address Formats
EPLAN Training 8
Macros
Macros
EPLAN Training 1
Macros
7 Creating Macros..........................................................................................31
7.1 Create window macros and symbol macros ...........................................31
7.2 Create page macros ...............................................................................35
EPLAN Training 2
Macros
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 3
Macros
3. Click here in the Value column on the associated field and select the "Macro
project" setting from the drop-down list.
4. Click [OK].
The new macro project is created and can be edited like a "normal" project.
Notes:
Creating a new project is not the only way to create macro projects. You can
also first create a schematic project, prepare corresponding schematics cut-
outs for the macros to be generated, and then convert to a macro project by
changing the project properties. To do this you only have to change the project
setting "Type of project" to "Macro project" as described in step 3.
EPLAN Training 4
Macros
When writing window or symbol macros a macro box is also saved in the macro for
the specified cut-out. If you insert the macros on project pages, you will have the
option of inserting the macro box as well. To do this you have to select the Insert
macro boxes too check box (under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project
name" > Graphical editing > General). The inserted macro boxes are placed on a
certain layer (EPLAN308 = Symbol graphic.Macro.Macro boxes). In layer
management you can then specify the settings for this layer.
Special program functions in the macro box enable you to retroactively change the
objects associated with an inserted macro and thus exchange variables for a macro,
for example.
Notes:
A macro box cannot be located within a macro box. The inner box is deleted
when the macro is written.
There are no macro boxes in a page macro. The macro name, version, source,
etc., are stored on all of the pages available. You can find this data in the page
properties under the "Macro" category.
When compressing projects, there is a setting available for deleting all of the
inserted macro boxes in a project. To do this, select the Macro boxes check
box (in the Remove placed functions compression settings) and execute the
subsequent compression (see also Compress project).
Preconditions:
EPLAN Training 5
Macros
You are in a macro project.
You have inserted objects on at least one page (e.g., schematics cut-outs,
graphics, etc.), from which macros are to be automatically generated.
1. Select Insert > Box / connection point / mounting panel > Macro box.
EPLAN Training 6
Macros
2. Click with the mouse to determine the first corner of the box (request displayed
in the status bar).
3. Use the mouse to drag the frame around the desired objects.
4. Click once more with the mouse to determine the second corner of the box.
6. Finish this action via the Popup menu > Cancel action.
EPLAN Training 7
Macros
7. Double-click a macro box.
8. In the Macro box tab specify the data for the macro to be generated. In order
to create a macro, you have to specify at least one macro name in the Name
field.
9. Click [OK] to confirm your entries and close the Properties <...> dialog.
11. Select the menu items Utilities > Generate macros > Automatically from
macro project.
The areas identified above the macro boxes are written as window macros
(*.ema) in specified directory (default is <Drive_EPLAN>:<Program
EPLAN Training 8
Macros
folder>\<Macros>\<Company code>). When doing this the necessary data
is taken from the macro box properties.
Preconditions:
Under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Graphical editing >
General, you have defined that macro boxes must also be inserted.
EPLAN Training 9
Macros
2. Click the associated macro box.
EPLAN opens the Save as dialog. The file name and variant of the macro
are predefined.
EPLAN Training 10
Macros
5. Confirm the prompt regarding overwriting the macro variant with [Yes].
Preconditions:
Under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Graphical editing >
General, you have defined that macro boxes must also be inserted.
EPLAN Training 11
Macros
2. Select the menu items Popup menu > Exchange / rotate / update macro.
EPLAN opens the Macro file selection dialog. If the selected macro is in a
pre-defined directory, then the file name is already predefined.
3. Here you select another macro, variant, or nothing. In the latter case the
macro is updated.
4. Click [Open].
The macro inserted previously into the schematic is deleted and the new
macro is attached to the cursor.
EPLAN Training 12
Macros
5. Position the new macro with a click at the desired position.
Additional dialogs are possible afterwards, if you insert window macros and symbol
macros.
Preconditions:
Under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Graphical editing >
General, you have defined that macro boxes must also be inserted.
EPLAN Training 13
Macros
2. Select the menu items Popup menu > Select associated objects.
You can then copy, move, or edit all of the macro objects in a table, for example.
Preconditions:
You are in a macro project.
You have inserted one or more objects in a project page, from which a macro is
to be automatically generated, and you have defined the plan of the macro to
be created, using a macro box.
1. Select the objects that should belong to the macro. When doing this you can
also select objects that are not within the macro box, or exclude objects that
do lie within the macro box.
EPLAN Training 14
Macros
2. Click the desired macro box and select the menu items Popup menu >
Assign objects to macro box.
The objects are assigned to the macro. You can check the assignment by
selecting Popup menu > Select macro box for the respective macro box.
By making this assignment the Individual object assignment check box will be
selected in the Macro box tab in the properties dialog. If you want to remove the
individual object assignment, you have to deselect the corresponding check box. The
associated objects in the macro box will then be back in the future macro.
Preconditions:
You are in a macro project.
You have inserted one or more objects in a project page, from which a macro is
to be automatically generated, and you have defined the plan of the macro to
be created, using a macro box.
EPLAN Training 15
Macros
2. Select the menu items Popup menu > Move handle.
3. Move the cursor to the desired position and with a single mouse click define
the position where the contact point of the macro is to be located.
When generating macros automatically from the macro project, the handle
is also written to the macro with the macro box.
EPLAN Training 16
Macros
Precondition:
1. Drag a frame around the objects for which you wish to define placeholders.
2. In the Placeholder dialog, specify a name for the placeholder object in the
Name field.
3. Select the Show preview check box if you would like to display the graphical
preview of the selected elements.
4. In the Assignment tab select the Category of elements (for example, devices
or revision data) to be displayed.
EPLAN Training 17
Macros
5. Select the Page properties check box if these should also be displayed in the
list.
EPLAN Training 18
Macros
8. In the Name new variable dialog specify the name of the new variable.
EPLAN will automatically check whether the specified name is valid.
The new variable is inserted as a new cell below the Variable column
heading.
10. Specify the new value set in the newly created column.
11. Repeat these steps for all additional variables and value sets to be generated.
EPLAN Training 19
Macros
12. Change back to the Assignment tab.
13. In the Placeholder field, click the desired schematic objects with the right
mouse button in order to open the popup menu and select Popup menu >
Select variable.
14. In the subsequent dialog select the desired variable and click [OK].
15. Repeat this variable assignment for all desired schematics objects.
The new placeholder object is automatically placed on the left above the
previously marked area.
Note:
If you marked nothing when you called the Insert > Placeholder object menu
items, you first have to determine the desired object (for example via Edit >
EPLAN Training 20
Macros
If you have selected individual schematic objects instead of an area, then you
must next define the position of the placeholder object with a mouse click
(request displayed in the status bar).
EPLAN Training 21
Macros
Precondition:
The schematics elements that belong to the current placeholder object are
selected.
EPLAN Training 22
Macros
3. Right-click the placeholder object and select Popup menu > Assign objects
to placeholder object.
EPLAN Training 23
Macros
3. Select the Show preview check box in order to display the graphical preview
for the selected schematics object, i.e., the location, where the variable value
is defined.
4. Edit the value sets in the Values tab. Use the popup menu for this as well.
When opening the placeholder object, EPLAN checks whether all objects defined for
the placeholders in the placeholder object are still available. If this is not the case,
then an appropriate message is displayed. You can still call the editing mode for the
placeholder object. In this case, the object is simply reduced by the number of
missing elements.
EPLAN Training 24
Macros
When leaving the cell and closing the dialog with [OK], every specified value is
verified for validity for the properties in question. If an error occurs, a message will
appear. This check only takes the data type into consideration. This check also takes
place after editing a placeholder assignment, but only when the corresponding
variable is not empty.
Note:
It is not possible to block edit multiple placeholder objects.
EPLAN Training 25
Macros
6 Inserting Macros
Macros can be inserted on project pages as window or symbol macros. New project
pages are created when inserting page macros.
The macros are generally broken up when inserted, but it is still possible to change
data via the placeholder objects.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project page.
Under Options > Settings > User > Display > General you have selected the
Open value set selection dialog for placeholders when inserting macros
check box.
1. Select the menu items Insert > Window macro or Insert > Symbol macro.
Window macros can also be inserted via Popup menu > Insert macros.
2. Select the desired macro. If a selected macro has variables, you can use the
Variant drop-down list to specify which variant should be inserted.
EPLAN Training 26
Macros
3. Click [Open].
The macro is attached to the cursor and can be positioned wherever you
want (one click).
If value sets are available, select a suitable value set for the placeholder in
the Value set selection dialog. The inserted components contain the data
from the value set.
If there are device tags in the macro, and you have selected the With
prompt check box under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" >
Devices > Numbering (online) in the On insertion of macros and copies
group box, EPLAN opens the Insertion mode dialog.
Specify here how the device tags in the inserted macro should be numbered.
4. The macro is still attached to the cursor. Insert the macro again if you want.
Note:
When positioning the macro with the mouse you can also use the additional
following keys:
[Y] + mouse movement: The macro can only be moved horizontally on its
original position.
[X] + mouse movement: The macro can only be moved vertically on its original
position.
[Y] + [X]: The macro is fixed to its original position and cannot be moved.
If there are variants in a macro, you can select among the different variants
when positioning the macro with the mouse. To do this press [Ctrl] and move
the cursor in a circle. The various macro variants are displayed.
If you return to inserting macros, the most recently selected macro is selected by
default in the Select macro dialog.
Below the graphical preview of the dialog is a comments field. For window and
symbol macros, the source project from which the macro originates is
displayed here along with the description, if available. For window macros
created from DXF / DWG files this field only displays a note regarding their
"source" ("DXF" for macros from DXF files; "DWG" for macros from DWG
EPLAN Training 27
Macros
files).
If the macro box should be inserted with the macro when inserting window or
symbol macros, you have to select the Also insert macro boxes check box in
the settings (under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" >
Graphical editing > General).
2. Select the desired macro. When doing this you can select window (*.ema) or
symbol macro file types (*.ems) in the Files of type field in addition to page
macros (*.emp).
EPLAN Training 28
Macros
3. Click [Open].
4. Here you specify the placement of the new pages in the page structure of your
project.
5. In the Adjust page structure dialog, click [OK]. The continuation of this
process is the same as for copying pages (see Adjusting the Page Structure).
Note:
If you return to inserting macros, the most recently selected macro is selected by
default in the Select macro dialog.
Up to 12 pages are shown for page macros in the graphical preview of this
dialog. The source project from which the macro originated is displayed below
this graphical display in a comments field along with the description and the
number of pages, if available.
The special property "Macro: Inserted by" is available in the page properties for
inserting page macros (Category: "Macro"). When manually inserting a page
macro, the user who inserted the macro is automatically entered here.
Tip:
You can insert macros using drag and drop, by dragging a selected file from the
EPLAN Training 29
Macros
Windows Explorer into the graphical editor or the page navigator of your project.
EPLAN Training 30
Macros
7 Creating Macros
In EPLAN you have the option of saving certain selected elements or areas of project
pages as window or symbol macros. In addition, you can save one or more pages as
page macros if you have either selected them in the page navigator or opened them
in the graphical editor. For all these actions, stored image files are saved along with
the macro.
Precondition:
You are in graphical editing and have either selected the area on the page that
contains the elements you want, or selected individual elements ([Ctrl] + mouse
click).
EPLAN Training 31
Macros
1. Select the menu items Edit > Create window macro or Edit > Create
symbol macro. The menu item Create window macro is also available as an
option in the Popup menu after you have selected the elements on the page.
EPLAN opens the Save as dialog. In the Directory field, the default target
directory is displayed.
EPLAN Training 32
Macros
2. In the File name field, enter the name of the macro. Click [...] to select another
name and / or another target directory.
3. If necessary, select one or more variant designations for the macro in the
Variant field. This is an interesting option if you want to create different
variants for one macro. By default, one macro is saved as "variant A". You can
create up to eight variants for one macro under the same file name.
4. If desired, enter a description of the macro into the Description field. The text
entered here is displayed in a comments field when inserting macros and
simplifies the selection for you.
5. If the page scale should be taken into consideration when inserting macros,
you have to select the To page scale check box.
EPLAN Training 33
Macros
6. Click the Handle button if you want to manually determine the point in the
macro on which the cursor depends when inserting.
7. Move the cursor to the desired position and specify the new location of the
handle with a mouse click.
8. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 34
Macros
The macro is saved to the specified directory under the name <Name>.ema
(window macros) or <Name>.ems (symbol macros). EPLAN checks whether a
variant already exists under the specified name. If so, you will be requested to
decide whether the old macro variant should be overwritten or not.
Notes:
If nothing is selected on the page, you can still select that area / individual
elements after selecting the menu item (request displayed in the status bar).
Angular and other macro variations are not created automatically, but must be
manually generated by you on the project pages, and then finally stored under
the same name with a different variant designation. If you have created
different variants of a macro, then you can choose between the variants when
inserting.
The macro box is saved in the window or symbol macro according to the
specified cut-out.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 35
Macros
1. Select the desired page(s) in the page navigator.
EPLAN Training 36
Macros
2. Select the menu items Page > Page macro > Create. Page macros can also
be created via Popup menu > Create page macro.
EPLAN opens the Save as dialog. In the Directory field, the default target
directory is displayed.
3. In the File name field, enter the name of the macro. Click [...] to select another
name and / or another target directory.
EPLAN Training 37
Macros
4. If desired, enter a description of the macro into the Description field. The text
entered here is displayed in a comments field when inserting macros and
simplifies the selection for you.
6. Click [OK].
The macro is saved in the specified directory under the name <Name>.emp
and EPLAN checks whether a macro with the specified name already exists. If
so, you will be requested to decide whether the old macro should be
overwritten by the new one or not.
Tip:
You can create page macros with drag and drop, by dragging selected pages from
the page navigator of your project into the Windows Explorer.
EPLAN Training 38
Macros
1. In the DXF / DWG files selection dialog select the desired DXF / DWG files.
2. Click on [Open].
3. In the DXF / DWG import dialog select the desired scheme and specify the
target directory.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 40
Macros
EPLAN Training 41
Connection Numbering
Connection Numbering
EPLAN Training 1
Connection Numbering
6 Designating Connections...........................................................................22
6.1 Change numbering results ......................................................................24
EPLAN Training 2
Connection Numbering
Precondition:
2. In the Filter tab select the check box for the trade and connection type you
want to number.
EPLAN Training 3
Connection Numbering
3. In the Placement tab select where and how often you want to place the
connection definition points on the connections.
EPLAN Training 4
Connection Numbering
4. In the Designation tab, define the format groups that are to be formatted
together.
EPLAN Training 5
Connection Numbering
5. In the Display tab specify formatting for connection designations generated on
the connection definition point. Among these formatting options are, for
example, horizontal and vertical increments of the connection designation from
the connection line, as well as text color, size, etc.
6. Click [OK].
The scheme is now set up and will be used when you are numbering
connections.
EPLAN Training 6
Connection Numbering
EPLAN Training 7
Connection Numbering
2. Move the Designation tab to the foreground and in the toolbar above the
Format groups field, click (New).
EPLAN Training 8
Connection Numbering
3. In the Connection numbering: Formats dialog, in the Connection group
field, select one of the predefined connection groups or the "Browse..." entry.
4. If you selected "Browse..." and opened the Device tag list dialog, select one
of the DT's in the project and click [OK].
5. In the Extent field specify the range of connections that are to receive the
same format for their connection designations. Select an entry from the drop-
down list.
Note:
If you have selected the "Net" entry, you can use the net extension to expand
the area of influence for numbering.
6.
7. In the Available format elements field select a format element and move it
over to the right using the arrow button into the list of selected format
elements.
EPLAN Training 9
Connection Numbering
Different subsequent dialogs will appear, depending on the formatting
element. Depending on the format element selected, this can be one of the
following dialogs: Format: Properties, Format: Counter, Format: Page / column
/ row or Format: Separator.
9. If desired, you can change the sequence of the formatting elements using the
arrow buttons.
EPLAN Training 10
Connection Numbering
2. In the Format groups field select a format group and click (Edit).
Note:
EPLAN Training 11
Connection Numbering
If you have selected the "Net" entry, you can use the net extension to expand
the area of influence for numbering.
EPLAN Training 12
Connection Numbering
4.
5. In the Selected format elements field select an entry and click (Edit) to
change the formatting. Or, in the Available format elements field select a
format element and move it over to the right using the arrow button into the list
of selected format elements in order to define an additional format element.
EPLAN Training 13
Connection Numbering
EPLAN Training 14
Connection Numbering
6. In the subsequent dialog (Format: Properties, Format: Counter, Format:
Page / column / row or Format: Separator) define the desired formatting.
7. If desired, you can change the sequence of the formatting elements using the
arrow buttons.
8. Click [OK].
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 15
Connection Numbering
Project data > Connections > Numbering > Settings
EPLAN Training 16
Connection Numbering
2. In the Format groups field select a format group and click (Delete).
EPLAN Training 17
Connection Numbering
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 18
Connection Numbering
2. Select the Designation tab and click [Net extension].
EPLAN Training 19
Connection Numbering
3. In the Net extension dialog use the arrow button to move the desired
functions from the Selection list into the Net extended with following
objects list.
The net will then no longer end at the selected functions, but rather it will be
extended by them.
The net extension applies to all format groups contained in the "Net" scope.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 20
Connection Numbering
You have selected connections in the graphical editor, or you have selected one or
more pages or a project in the Pages - <Project name> navigator dialog.
Once you have called up the menu item, the connections are first automatically
newly generated.
1. In the Settings field of the Place connection definition points dialog select
a scheme from the drop-down list that will specify the settings for connection
numbering. Click [...] to open the Settings: Connection numbering dialog.
Define the numbering settings here and store them in a scheme.
2. Activate the check box Apply to entire project in order to extend the
connection numbering for the entire project. If you have called up the dialog for
a selected project from the Pages - <Project name> navigator dialog, the
check box is already selected and grayed out.
3. Click [OK].
The connection definition points are placed on the schematic pages. They
receive "????" as a designation if the associated connection still has no
designation.
EPLAN Training 21
Connection Numbering
6 Designating Connections
Via the Designate connections dialog you can designate those connection definition
points that are able to possess a connection designation.
Precondition:
You have selected connections in the graphical editor, or you have selected one or
more pages or a project in the Pages - <Project name> navigator dialog.
Once you have called up the menu item, the connections are first automatically
newly generated.
EPLAN Training 22
Connection Numbering
1. In the Settings field of the Designate connections dialog select a scheme
from the drop-down list that will specify the settings for connection numbering.
Click [...] to open the Settings: Connection numbering dialog. Define the
numbering settings here and store them in a scheme.
2. In the table specify the start value and the increment for numbering each
displayed connection group.
3. In the Overwrite group box specify the connection definition points for which
the designation should be overwritten.
4. Select the Mark as "manually set" check box to assign the "Manually set"
property to all connection definition points for which a connection designation
is set during this numbering process.
5. Activate the check box Apply to entire project in order to extend the
connection numbering for the entire project. If you have called up the dialog for
EPLAN Training 23
Connection Numbering
a selected project from the Pages - <Project name> navigator dialog, the
check box is already selected and grayed out.
6. Select the Preview of result check box so that before the new connection
designations are adopted, the Designate connections: Preview of result
dialog is displayed.
7. Click [OK].
Precondition:
You have selected connections in the graphical editor, or you have selected one or
more pages or a project in the Pages - <Project name> navigator dialog.
EPLAN Training 24
Connection Numbering
1. In the Designate connections dialog specify the settings for connection
designations and select the Preview of result check box.
2. Click [OK].
4. Select Popup menu > Keep old connection designations if you would like
to enter the old connection designation in the New connection designation
field for the selected connection.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 25
Connection Numbering
selected for the numbering, as long as the connection definition points have
been placed there.
EPLAN Training 26
Connection Numbering
Precondition:
You have selected connections in the graphical editor, or you have selected one or
more pages or a project in the Pages - <Project name> navigator dialog.
Project data > Connections > Numbering > Realign and reformat
Once you have called up the menu item, the connections are first automatically
newly generated.
EPLAN Training 27
Connection Numbering
3. Select the Retain "manually set" numberings check box to retain the
alignment and formatting for connection definition points with the "Manually
set" setting.
4. Activate the check box Apply to entire project in order to extend the
connection numbering for the entire project. If you have called up the dialog for
a selected project from the Pages - <Project name> navigator dialog, the
check box is already selected and grayed out.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 28
Connection Numbering
Once you have called up the menu item, the connections are first automatically
newly generated.
1. Select a scheme from the drop-down list in the Settings field of the Delete
connection designations dialog.
The filter settings defined in this scheme are taken into account when
deleting the connection designations.
2. If you wish to change the filter settings, click [...] next to the Settings field.
3. Define the desired filter settings using the Settings: Connection numbering
dialog. Select the appropriate check boxes for the desired connection types
and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 29
Connection Numbering
4. In the Delete connection designations dialog use the radio buttons to
specify whether you only want to delete the connection designations or also
the empty connection definition points.
5. Select the Retain "manually set" check box to retain the alignment and
formatting for connection definition points with the "Manually set" setting, to
not delete them, and to retain their designation.
6. Select the check box Apply to entire project in order to extend the deletion to
the entire project.
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 30
Connection Numbering
EPLAN Training 31
Numbering Devices Online
EPLAN Training 1
Numbering Devices Online
EPLAN Training 2
Numbering Devices Online
Precondition:
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > Numbering (online)
1. In the Settings: Numbering (online) dialog, click [...] next to the Numbering
format field.
EPLAN Training 3
Numbering Devices Online
3. Enter a descriptive name into the Name field and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 4
Numbering Devices Online
4. Change to the DT tab.
5. To allow all devices in the "General DT" device group to be numbered online,
select the General DT check box.
EPLAN Training 5
Numbering Devices Online
7. In the Available format elements field of the DT format dialog, select the
"Counter" format element and click (Move right).
8. In the Format dialog, in the Minimum number of digits field, enter the
number of positions to be used for the DT counter and click [OK].
The format element is entered into the Selected format elements field.
9. Select all of the desired format elements sequentially. Pay attention to the
rules for the Online numbering format.
EPLAN Training 6
Numbering Devices Online
11. To define the online numbering for all other device groups and connections,
proceed in the same manner in the DT and Connection Points tabs.
EPLAN Training 7
Numbering Devices Online
EPLAN Training 8
Numbering Devices Online
Precondition:
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > General
1. In the Settings: General dialog, in the Set preceding sign group box, select
the General functions check box.
2. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 9
Numbering Devices Online
A DT is determined and assigned online for every device that you insert. The counter
for DT is incremented by one in the process.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have selected an online numbering format in which the online numbering
for the selected device group is activated.
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > Numbering (online)
2. Click [OK].
All of the symbols that you insert into the schematic are numbered.
EPLAN Training 10
Numbering Devices Online
2. Click [OK].
All of the devices that you insert into the schematic are numbered. The DT
contains a question mark as a flag.
EPLAN Training 11
Numbering Devices Online
Precondition:
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > Numbering (online)
1. In the Settings: Numbering (online) dialog, click [...] next to the Numbering
format field.
EPLAN Training 12
Numbering Devices Online
2. Select a user defined scheme from the Schemes field.
EPLAN Training 13
Numbering Devices Online
3. Change to the DT tab.
4. Deselect the check box for each device group that is not to be numbered
online.
EPLAN Training 14
Numbering Devices Online
1. In the dialog Settings: Numbering (online) dialog, in the On insertion of
symbols group box, select the Empty field option.
2. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 15
Numbering Devices Online
Precondition:
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > Numbering (online)
EPLAN Training 16
Numbering Devices Online
2. Click [OK].
All of the devices that you insert via macros or copies into the schematic
are inserted unchanged.
2. Click [OK].
All of the devices that you insert via macros or copies into the schematic
are numbered on insertion.
EPLAN Training 17
Numbering Devices Online
1. In the Settings: Numbering (online) dialog, in the On insertion of macros
and copies group box, select the Number with flag "?" option.
2. Click [OK].
All of the devices that you insert via macros or copies into the schematic
are numbered on insertion. The DT contains a question mark as a flag.
EPLAN Training 18
Numbering Devices Online
1. In the Settings: Numbering (online) dialog, in the On insertion of macros
and copies group box, select the With prompt option.
2. Click [OK].
When you insert devices via macros or copies into the schematic, the
Insertion mode dialog opens.
3. Select the desired option from the Insertion mode dialog and click [OK].
and inserting
EPLAN Training 19
Numbering Devices Online
EPLAN Training 20
Numbering Devices Online
3. With the left mouse button pressed, pull a rectangle around all the schematic
elements that you wish to copy or cut.
EPLAN Training 21
Numbering Devices Online
4. Select the menu item Edit > Copy or Edit > Cut.
EPLAN Training 22
Numbering Devices Online
2. Select the menu item Edit > Paste.
When you move the cursor over the schematic, the schematic elements
hang on the cursor.
EPLAN Training 23
Numbering Devices Online
3. Click the position in the schematic where the schematic elements from the
EPLAN Clipboard are to be inserted.
If, in the Settings: Numbering (online) dialog, the With prompt option is
selected, then the Insertion mode dialog opens.
4. Define the manner in which the schematic elements are to be numbered and
click [OK].
3. Select the menu item Edit > Paste, and insert the schematic elements in the
same manner.
In this procedure, you can again specify the manner in which the schematic
elements are to be numbered, using the Insertion mode dialog.
EPLAN Training 24
Numbering Devices Online
EPLAN Training 25
Numbering Devices Offline
EPLAN Training 1
Numbering Devices Offline
1 General Procedure........................................................................................3
EPLAN Training 2
Numbering Devices Offline
1 General Procedure
Device numbering consists of the following possible steps:
Limiting the Scope of Numbering: You limit the scope of numbering using filters.
Viewing and Adjusting the Result: You view the numbering result and adjust it.
Accepting the Numbering in the schematic: You accept the numbering in the
schematic.
EPLAN Training 3
Numbering Devices Offline
EPLAN Training 4
Numbering Devices Offline
Precondition:
4. Click [OK].
In the Number (offline): Preview of result dialog the devices are shown
with the new numbering. In this dialog you can edit the DT numbering.
EPLAN Training 5
Numbering Devices Offline
5. To accept the DT numbering, click [OK].
EPLAN Training 6
Numbering Devices Offline
Preconditions:
In the page navigator, the graphical editor or the device navigator, you have
selected devices for numbering and under Project data > Devices >
Numbering in the Number (offline) dialog, you have selected the Preview of
results check box.
The Numbering (offline): Preview of result dialog is opened and contains newly
numbered devices.
EPLAN Training 7
Numbering Devices Offline
For longer DTs with similar structure, there is the option of copying one or more DTs
and inserting them in a different place.
1. Hold down the [SHIFT] key and select all the rows to be copied.
3. Position the mouse pointer in the row into which the selected contents should
be copied.
EPLAN Training 8
Numbering Devices Offline
4. Choose Popup menu > Paste.
The new DT will be removed. The original DT is inserted into the row and
highlighted.
EPLAN Training 9
Numbering Devices Offline
EPLAN Training 10
Numbering Devices Offline
Preconditions:
You have selected devices for numbering in the page navigator, the graphical
editor, or in the device navigator.
You have opened the Number dialog (Project data > Devices> Number).
[Extras] > Numbering
EPLAN Training 11
Numbering Devices Offline
2. In the New scheme dialog, enter a name in the Name field and a description
into the Description field for the numbering format.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 12
Numbering Devices Offline
4. In the Available format elements field, select the "Page", "Column", or "Row"
format element, and click (Accept).
5. In the Format Page / Column / Row dialog in the Minimum number of digits
field, specify the number of digits to be displayed for the selected format
element, and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 13
Numbering Devices Offline
6. To define the sequence of format elements, select a format element in the
Selected format elements field and click (One line up) or (One line
down) as many times as necessary until the element is in the desired position.
EPLAN Training 14
Numbering Devices Offline
2. Click (Delete).
EPLAN Training 15
Numbering Devices Offline
EPLAN Training 16
Numbering with PLC Data
EPLAN Training 1
Numbering with PLC Data
EPLAN Training 2
Numbering with PLC Data
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > Number using PLC
data
2. In the Settings: Number using PLC data dialog, click (New) above the
Format groups field.
EPLAN Training 3
Numbering with PLC Data
3. In the Number using PLC data: Format dialog, select the group of devices
from the Group drop-down list for which you want to determine the format.
You can choose between terminals, pins, and devices.
4. In the Extent drop-down list, select the scope of numbering for the selected
group.
Note:
If you have selected the "Net" entry, then you can use the net extension to
increase the area affected by the numbering scheme, as described in the
section Defining Net Extensions.
EPLAN Training 4
Numbering with PLC Data
5.
6. In the Available format elements field select a format element and move it
over to the right using into the list of selected format elements.
EPLAN Training 5
Numbering with PLC Data
7. Define the formatting in the subsequent dialog.
8. If desired, you can change the sequence of the formatting elements using the
arrow buttons.
9. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 6
Numbering with PLC Data
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 7
Numbering with PLC Data
Precondition:
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > Number using PLC
data
3. In the Net extension dialog use the arrow button to move the desired
functions from the Selection list into the Net extended with following
objects list.
The net will then no longer end at the selected functions, but rather it will be
extended by them.
EPLAN Training 8
Numbering with PLC Data
The net extension applies to all format groups contained in the "Net" scope.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 9
Numbering with PLC Data
Precondition:
1. In the Properties <...> dialog in the <Function category> tab, activate the
"Continue numbering with PLC data beyond this function" property
(Properties group box).
2. Click [OK].
When numbering with PLC data, those devices will also be numbered
which are connected to this function.
EPLAN Training 10
Numbering with PLC Data
Precondition:
1. In the Properties <...> dialog, in the PLC connection point tab, activate the
Prevent numbering with PLC data property.
2. Click [OK].
When numbering with PLC data, devices connected to this function will not
be numbered.
EPLAN Training 11
Numbering with PLC Data
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 12
Numbering with PLC Data
Note:
When numbering with PLC data, only digital or analog inputs and outputs are taken
into account. Devices connected to general PLC connection points are not
numbered.
Preconditions:
In the graphical editor, PLC connection points are selected, or one or more
pages are selected in the page navigator on which PLC connection points are
located.
EPLAN Training 13
Numbering with PLC Data
1. Select a scheme defining the settings for the numbering from the drop-down
list in the Setting field.
In the Format groups used field, the groups of devices which will be
numbered are shown.
3. Select the Mark as "Numbered using PLC data" check box so that functions
changed by numbering will be flagged.
During numbering, the "Numbered using PLC data" property will be set for
these functions.
4. Select the Preview of result check box to see a preview of the numbering
results before the new device tags / designations are adopted.
EPLAN Training 14
Numbering with PLC Data
5. If necessary, change the device tags or designations in the Number using
PLC data: Preview of result dialog, and click [OK].
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 15
Numbering with PLC Data
EPLAN Training 16
Functions
Functions
EPLAN Training 1
Functions
1 Inserting Functions.......................................................................................3
1.1 Add functions via symbols ........................................................................3
EPLAN Training 2
Functions
1 Inserting Functions
Functions can be added to the project as follows:
You work with the graphics-oriented interface. In the graphical editor, call up
symbol selection and select a symbol. A function definition is defined at the
symbol, with which it is inserted. (The symbol and the function are grouped
together to make a component.)
You insert a macro into the project which contains functions (components). A
function definition is assigned to the component, or it has a special logic
function stored in it.
You work with the logic-oriented engineering approach and want to work with
predefined devices. You select a device (and thus a part); this device has data
concerning its functions. Now, select one of these functions. All symbols are
offered which are suitable to the display of this function. Now, select a symbol
and place it. At the same time, the device is created with all its functions. The
information on the functions come in with the part.
You select (in the navigator) a function (or definition) directly and add it (placed
or unplaced) into the project.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 3
Functions
1. Select the desired symbol from the Symbol selection dialog and click [OK].
A function definition is defined at the symbol; this is placed with the symbol
as a function.
EPLAN Training 4
Functions
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, you can edit the properties of the function.
4. Click [OK].
The new and changed properties are stored in the component and
displayed there (as long as they are selected for display).
EPLAN Training 5
Functions
2 Changing Functions
If a function is used in a project, then the function definition in turn provides particular
pre-defined properties. The function definition data is only comprised of default
values and can be overwritten for every individual component. You can also add
extra properties.
Precondition:
You have placed a function (i.e. a component) on a schematic page. Or you have
generated a function in one of the navigators.
EPLAN Training 6
Functions
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, you can change the properties of the function.
Use the different tabs and input fields to do this.
5. Click [OK].
The current properties are displayed on the component (as long as they are
selected for display).
You have placed a function (i.e. a component) on a schematic page. Or you have
generated a function in one of the navigators.
EPLAN Training 8
Functions
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, select the <Function category> tab.
4. In the Connection point designation field, select an entry from the drop-
down list or enter the connection point designation manually.
5. In the Connection point description field, select an entry from the drop-down
list or enter the connection point description manually.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 9
Functions
You have placed a function (i.e. a component) on a schematic page. Or you have
generated a function in one of the navigators.
EPLAN Training 10
Functions
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, select the Symbol / function data tab and click
[Logic].
EPLAN Training 11
Functions
4. In the Connection point logic dialog, edit the table of properties for the
desired connection points of the function, such as the connection point type,
the potential type, or the number of targets.
5. Click [OK].
You have placed a function (i.e. a component) on a schematic page. Or you have
generated a function in one of the navigators.
EPLAN Training 13
Functions
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, select the Symbol / function data tab and click
[Logic].
EPLAN Training 14
Functions
4. In the Connection point logic dialog in the Symbol connection point field,
assign the connection points of the symbol to the connection points of the
function. Normally, connection point "1" of the function is allocated to
connection point "1" of the symbol etc. You can change this allocation by using
the drop-down list.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 15
Functions
If the function should have fewer connection points than the symbol used, you need
to switch the symbol. The new symbol then brings the new function with it.
You can also exchange function definitions using search and replace.
Precondition:
You have placed a function (i.e. a component) on a schematic page. Or you have
generated a function in one of the navigators.
EPLAN Training 16
Functions
2. Select the menu item Edit > Properties.
EPLAN Training 17
Functions
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, in the Symbol / function data tab, click [...]
next to the Definition field.
4. In the Function definitions dialog, page through the tree and select the
desired function definition.
In the tabs to the right of the dialog, the properties and connection point
data of the selected function definition are displayed.
5. Click [OK].
6. If necessary, edit the connection point data in the Connection point logic
dialog, or switch the symbol.
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 18
Functions
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 19
Functions
5 Swapping Symbols
Precondition:
You have placed a function (i.e. a component) on a schematic page. Or you have
generated a function in one of the navigators.
EPLAN Training 20
Functions
2. Select the menu item Edit > Properties.
EPLAN Training 21
Functions
3. In the Properties <...> dialog, in the Symbol / function data tab, click [...]
next to the Number / name field.
4. Select the desired symbol from the Symbol selection dialog and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 22
Functions
EPLAN Training 23
Device Navigator
Device Navigator
EPLAN Training 1
Device Navigator
1 Displaying and Sorting the Project Data in the Device Navigator ............3
1.1 Hierarchical sorting of project data............................................................3
1.2 Tabular sorting of project data ..................................................................4
EPLAN Training 2
Device Navigator
EPLAN Training 3
Device Navigator
EPLAN Training 4
Device Navigator
2. Select Popup menu > Configure columns.
In the Column configuration dialog all of the properties are displayed that
you can in turn use as column names.
3. To select a property as a column name, select the check box in front of the
property.
4. To define which property is to be displayed in the first column of the list view,
first select the desired property.
EPLAN Training 5
Device Navigator
5. Then click (Move up) as many times as necessary until the property is at
the top of the list.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 6
Device Navigator
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 7
Device Navigator
2. Select the Active check box.
EPLAN Training 8
Device Navigator
The Properties <...> dialog opens. The name of this dialog depends on the
device you have selected to edit..
EPLAN Training 9
Device Navigator
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 10
Device Navigator
1. Select Popup menu > New.
EPLAN Training 11
Device Navigator
2. Select a function definition in the Selection field of the Function definitions
dialog.
3. To obtain a preview of the symbol, in the Attributes tab, select the Basic
symbol preview check box.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 12
Device Navigator
5. In the Properties <...> dialog select the <Function category>.
tab.
In the Displayed DT field, the visible device tag of the selected device is
displayed.
1. Select a device.
EPLAN Training 13
Device Navigator
2. Select Popup menu > New.
EPLAN Training 14
Device Navigator
3. Select a function definition in the Selection field of the Function definitions
dialog.
4. To obtain a preview of the symbol, in the Attributes tab, select the Basic
symbol preview check box.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 15
Device Navigator
6. In the Properties <...> dialog select the <Function category> tab.
EPLAN Training 16
Device Navigator
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have created a non-placed function.
Project data > Devices > Navigator.
EPLAN Training 17
Device Navigator
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 18
Device Navigator
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You created a function in the device navigator.
You have opened a symbol library.
You opened a symbol library.
Project data > Devices > Navigator.
1. Select a function.
EPLAN Training 19
Device Navigator
2. To place a function multi-line, select Popup menu > Place > Multi-line.
EPLAN Training 20
Device Navigator
3. To place a function single-line, select Popup menu > Place > Single-line.
4. To place a function as an overview function, select Popup menu > Place >
Overview.
EPLAN Training 21
Device Navigator
2. Select the desired symbol from the Symbol selection dialog and click [OK].
Tip:
You can place the function using Drag & Drop, by dragging a highlighted function
from the navigator onto your open page in the graphical editor. The function's
representation type is automatically chosen independent of the page type.
EPLAN Training 22
Device Navigator
Precondition:
2. Keep the mouse button pressed and pull the element from the navigator into
the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 23
Device Navigator
EPLAN tells you if you can insert the function by indicating this with the
mouse .
EPLAN adapts the function to your page type, regardless of the function's
representation type in the navigator.
EPLAN Training 24
Device Navigator
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 25
Device Navigator
EPLAN Training 26
Device Navigator
2. Activate the menu items View > Graphical preview.
1. Select a device.
EPLAN Training 27
Device Navigator
2. Select Popup menu > Go to (graphic).
EPLAN opens the schematic page in the graphical editor and positions the
cursor on the component.
EPLAN Training 28
Device Navigator
EPLAN Training 29
Device Navigator
2. Select Popup menu > Insert into list of search results.
EPLAN Training 30
Device Navigator
3. Select Find > Show results > Results List 1 tab.
EPLAN Training 31
Device Navigator
EPLAN Training 32
Devices
Devices
EPLAN Training 1
Devices
3 Placing Devices...........................................................................................10
3.1 Insert symbols in the graphical editor......................................................10
3.2 Place devices from the navigator ............................................................11
3.3 Delete placements ..................................................................................13
EPLAN Training 2
Devices
EPLAN Training 3
Devices
2. In the Function template tab define a function template for every function in
the device: To do this, click (New).
3. In the first cell, use [...] to open the function selection and select a function
definition.
EPLAN Training 4
Devices
4. Click [OK].
5. Enter the technical data of the function into the other cells on the Function
template tab.
6. In the Special group box, you can allocate a symbol and technical data to the
part.
The symbol is placed when no function templates exist, i.e. the table is
empty.
If function templates exist, then the data entered here is not accounted for,
but you can still use this for filtering.
7. Click [Apply].
EPLAN Training 5
Devices
EPLAN Training 6
Devices
2. Click [OK].
The part is added to the device list with the permitted unit quantity of "1".
1. In the Properties <...> dialog, enter a part number. Click [...] to open the part
selection and select an existing part.
2. In the Number allowed field enter the number of these parts that may be used
in the project.
EPLAN Training 7
Devices
3. In the System part and Device description field, enter the installation
requirements and a description of the functionality of the part. The device list
can be sorted according to these descriptions by clicking the column headers.
4. Click [OK].
The part is added to the device list with the permitted unit quantity.
Precondition:
1. If required, in the Properties <...> dialog, change the values in the Part
number, Number allowed, System part, and Device description fields.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 8
Devices
Popup menu > Delete
The selected parts are deleted from the device list. This has no effect on the
placement of the relevant part. It merely means that the relevant part is no longer
monitored.
EPLAN Training 9
Devices
3 Placing Devices
Devices can be placed from the device list, graphical editor, or the navigators.
Placing devices in the schematic is a quicker way of connecting devices to parts than
the customary procedure of symbol placement with subsequent part selection.
Preconditions:
You have opened a page in the graphical editor.
You have entered a symbol or macro for the part in the parts management, or
defined a device using the function templates.
EPLAN Training 10
Devices
Precondition:
You have opened a navigator, e.g. Project data > Cables > Navigator or Project
data > Terminal strips > Navigator.
EPLAN Training 11
Devices
2. Select Popup menu > Place > Multi-line.
Tip:
You can placed devices using drag and drop, by dragging a selected device from the
navigators onto your opened page in the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 12
Devices
Precondition:
1. Select a component and then select the menu item Edit > Delete placement.
EPLAN Training 13
Devices
Preconditions:
You have opened a page in the graphical editor.
You have entered a symbol or macro for the part in the parts management, or
defined a device using the function templates.
EPLAN Training 14
Devices
2. Select Popup menu > Place via > Parts data.
The symbol or macro defined for the part in the parts management, hangs
on the cursor.
If the part has several functions, then the next function will subsequently
hang on the cursor.
EPLAN Training 15
Devices
4. Place the further functions of the device, or cancel the process using Edit >
Cancel action.
If you place all the functions of a device sequentially, then the "Acquire DT
from left" is also accounted for in the process.
2. Select Popup menu > Place with and subsequently a menu item from the
submenu: Function selection, Symbol selection, or Macro selection.
EPLAN Training 16
Devices
3. Select the desired function, symbol or macro and click [OK].
Tip:
You can placed devices using drag and drop, by dragging a selected device from the
device list onto your opened page in the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 17
Devices
EPLAN Training 18
Part / Device Selection
EPLAN Training 1
Part / Device Selection
8 Parts Preselection.......................................................................................28
EPLAN Training 2
Part / Device Selection
1 Selecting Parts
In part selection, you assign one or more parts to a device. This assigns the data to
the device, as it was entered in the parts manager in the Function Templates tab in
the Specific group field.
Precondition:
You have opened the Properties <...> dialog and moved the Parts tab to the
foreground.
EPLAN Training 3
Part / Device Selection
1. Click [...] in the Part number field.
2. In the Part selection dialog, navigate through the tree structure and select
one or more desired parts.
EPLAN Training 4
Part / Device Selection
3. Click [OK].
4. Click [OK].
All part numbers entered in the Properties <...> dialog are searched for in
the parts database and the corresponding parts are stored in the project. In
the process, the relevant data source for each part is also read, according to
the parts data. The function templates for the part are also saved.
The part properties of the first part selected are written to the current device
(e.g. cable type, conductor cross-section, etc.).
The data entered for the component (e.g., the connection point
designation) is retained and is not overwritten by data from parts
management. These deviations are flagged during a project check.
5. If you want to, change the properties and close the Conflict dialog by clicking
[OK].
The new data is accepted. Function templates from the parts are ignored.
If you click [Cancel] the old properties are retained.
Warning:
If you want to assign multiple part numbers to a symbol, you must make sure that an
empty row is highlighted for each new assignment. Otherwise the highlighted part
number will be overwritten with the new one.
EPLAN Training 5
Part / Device Selection
2. In the Part selection dialog search through the tree structure and select one
or more desired parts.
3. Click [OK].
A new device is created. The device is sorted into the project structure
independently from the marked element.
The parts data is written to the device. In this way, a new device is created
through part selection.
Example:
Assume that you have marked an arbitrary device under the installation location PT1.
Now open part selection through the New device function, and select a conctactor.
Under PT1, the device K1 is created with all the functions of a contactor.
EPLAN Training 6
Part / Device Selection
1. Highlight an entry and go to Popup menu > Add part or Popup menu >
Exchange part.
EPLAN Training 7
Part / Device Selection
2. In the Part selection dialog search through the tree structure and select one
or more desired parts.
3. Click [OK].
The new part is assigned to the marked device. In Exchange part, the old
part is replaced, while in Add part existing part references are retained.
EPLAN Training 8
Part / Device Selection
1. Select Popup menu > Add part.
EPLAN Training 9
Part / Device Selection
2. In the Part selection dialog search through the tree structure and select one
or more desired parts.
3. Click [OK].
The parts data is written into the device list. A new entry is created for the
part to be monitored.
EPLAN Training 10
Part / Device Selection
3 Selecting Devices
In device selection, you assign one device to another device; the assigned device
may contain one or more parts. The data from the function definitions is assigned to
the device. These are entered in the parts management, in the function definitions
table of the Function template tab.
Precondition:
You opened the Properties <...> dialog for a component and brought the Parts tab
to the front.
EPLAN Training 11
Part / Device Selection
1. Click [OK].
In the Parts list all items are shown from the parts management that
correspond to the selected device.
EPLAN Training 12
Part / Device Selection
2. If you want to, for example, change the selection criteria for the device
selection, click [Properties].
EPLAN Training 13
Part / Device Selection
3. In the Settings dialog edit: Device selection the settings and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 14
Part / Device Selection
4. If you want to enter additional functions, click [...] next to Automatic filter.
5. In the Automatic Filter dialog: Device selection, make the filter settings for
the technical values of the parts and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 15
Part / Device Selection
6. Highlight a part in the Parts.
list.
The Accessories list shows the accessories of the highlighted part (if
applicable).
7. Select the part you want from the Parts list (or an accessory from the
Accessories list), and click below the list. (If you highlighted an accessory
you can transfer the accessory and the part by using .)
You have completed the parts selection. This is shown in the Selected
Parts list: Functions / templates with an additional icon (a check mark)
before the function template of the part.
EPLAN Training 16
Part / Device Selection
8. If not all of the device functions have templates assigned to them, select
another part from the Parts or Accessories.
list.
In the list Selected part: Functions / templates the corresponding
function templates of the part are shown in alternating colors. Preview rows
are shown in italics.
9. Click below the list to transfer the parts in the Selected Parts list:
Functions / templates . If you want to, select more parts until all functions are
covered.
All part numbers entered in the Properties <...> dialog are searched for in
the parts database and the corresponding parts are stored in the project. In
the process, the relevant data source for each part is also read, according to
the parts data. The function templates for the part are also saved.
The part properties of the first part selected are written to the current device
(e.g. cable type, conductor cross-section, connector designation, technical
dimensions, etc.).
The data from the function templates of the stored parts are written to the
current device (main function) and its auxiliary functions.
The data entered for the component (e.g., the connection point
designation) is retained and is not overwritten by data from parts
management. A project check will display messages highlighting any of these
deviations.
EPLAN Training 17
Part / Device Selection
EPLAN Training 18
Part / Device Selection
2. In the Select Devices dialog, select the part(s) you want as described above.
3. Click [OK].
The parts data is transferred into the Bill of materials <Project name>
dialog, to update the parts references.
EPLAN Training 19
Part / Device Selection
Data entry is possible either manually or using part selection or using device
selection, which is where you can reference data that is saved in parts management.
You can assign up to 50 different parts records to a function. The parts data is stored
in the project.
Preconditions:
You have double-clicked on a component and in the Properties <...> dialog you
have moved the Parts tab to the foreground.
You have either entered a part number manually or performed a part selection or
a device selection.
1. From the drop-down list Category, select the "Part reference data" entry.
After a part or device selection, the corresponding values from the part are
displayed there; for manual entry of the part number, the fields are empty.
EPLAN Training 20
Part / Device Selection
2. Change the existing values, or enter new ones.
3. Click [OK].
Precondition:
You have double-clicked on a component and in the Properties <...> dialog you
have moved the Parts tab to the foreground.
The parts selected will be deleted from the function and the part data
removed from the project. Manually entered data will be irretrievably lost, but
the data entered using the part selection can be re-entered by reselecting the
part.
EPLAN Training 21
Part / Device Selection
The configuration of commercial data for part selection also applies to device
selection, i.e., there is only one common configuration.
Precondition:
You have double-clicked on a component and in the Properties <...> dialog you
have moved the Parts tab to the foreground.
EPLAN Training 22
Part / Device Selection
2. In the dialog Settings: Part selection dialog select a user-defined template
from the drop-down list.
4. In the Settings: internal parts selection the check box in the column Stored,
so that the corresponding parts properties can be stored in the project. You
can select multiple lines from the table.
5. Click [OK].
The parts stored in the project are updated with data from the internal parts
database. This stores a new part.
EPLAN Training 23
Part / Device Selection
Utilities > Parts > Current Project > Parts Database
The parts stored in the projects are transmitted to the internal parts database.
During this process, the function templates of the stored parts are stored into the
parts in the internal database.
Warning:
Only the parts not yet present in the parts database are synchronized. Already
existing parts are not updated.
EPLAN Training 24
Part / Device Selection
A part is generated from the part data stored in the schematic. It is saved as a part
stored in the project.
The part generated contains function templates for all functions of the device.
EPLAN Training 25
Part / Device Selection
Precondition:
You highlighted a project or individual pages in the page navigator, or you highlighted
a component in the graphical editor.
1. Click [OK] to confirm the safety warning reminding you that deleting the part
properties from the project can't be undone.
EPLAN Training 26
Part / Device Selection
2. In the Delete Stored Parts Properties dialog, select the check box for the
properties you want to delete.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 27
Part / Device Selection
8 Parts Preselection
The parts preselection is a list of parts that you create yourself and save under a
specific name. It can be used as a filter in parts selection and device selection (with
the exception of parts selection via the COM interface.) The parts preselection is
saved specifically for a project.
Precondition:
You have double-clicked on a component and in the Properties <...> dialog you
have moved the Parts tab to the foreground.
1. In the Settings: Device selection dialog, next to the Selection list field, click
[...].
EPLAN Training 28
Part / Device Selection
2. From the expanded list, select a user defined scheme that you want to
change or create a new scheme.
by using (New).
If the parts preselection already contains parts, they will be displayed in the
list.
EPLAN Training 29
Part / Device Selection
3. Using (New) above the parts list open the Select Parts dialog.
EPLAN Training 30
Part / Device Selection
4. Page through the tree structure, and mark the parts that you would like to
place in the parts preselection.
5. Click [OK].
The scheme for pre-selecting parts is saved and shown in the Settings
dialog: Select devices in the drop-down selection list.
EPLAN Training 31
Part / Device Selection
EPLAN Training 32
Spare Items
Spare Items
EPLAN Training 1
Spare Items
EPLAN Training 2
Spare Items
Graphical placements
External placements
Part placements
All elements that are not functions or that cannot exist "unplaced" (angle, T-
node, interruption points, ...)
Precondition:
You have opened a project and are viewing a schematic in the graphical editor.
EPLAN Training 3
Spare Items
1. Use the mouse to select the placed function(s) that are to be returned.
EPLAN Training 4
Spare Items
2. Select the menu item Edit > Delete placement.
The selected functions that can be returned are converted into unplaced functions
(and deleted from the page).
Notes:
If a single object is selected that cannot be returned, then the menu item is
grayed-out.
If multiple objects are selected that cannot be returned, then the menu item is
also grayed-out.
Otherwise, If multiple objects are selected then only the returnable functions are
considered and all other functions in the selection remain unchanged.
EPLAN Training 5
Spare Items
EPLAN Training 6
Structure Identifier Management
EPLAN Training 1
Structure Identifier Management
6 Checking Identifiers....................................................................................28
6.1 Check usage ...........................................................................................28
6.2 Check syntax ..........................................................................................28
8 Deleting Identifiers......................................................................................33
EPLAN Training 2
Structure Identifier Management
1 Creating an Identifier
Precondition:
You have opened a project in which identifier blocks are used, for instance "Higher-
level function" and "Mounting location".
In the Identifiers dialog, new structure identifiers can be created for each identifier
block, whereby the positioning depends on the current selection in the table: New
structure identifiers are sorted above the currently selected identifier.
Note:
The project setting Conversion to uppercase (under Options > Settings >
Projects > "Project name" > Devices > General) is used here.
1. In the Identifier dialog, select the tab of the identifier block that you want to
edit.
2. Click (New).
A new line is created above the current cursor position in the table, which is
empty except for the entry "No" in the Usage column. (If there is still another
empty identifier in the table, then the Status column will show a yellow
warning triangle and the Message description field will show the explanation
of this symbol).
3. Enter the designation of the new structure identifier into the Designation field.
If you enter a designation which already exists, then the Status will show a
yellow warning triangle and the Message description field will show the
explanation of this symbol.
EPLAN Training 3
Structure Identifier Management
4. Enter an additional description into the Description box.
6. Use the buttons on the toolbar to copy, add, delete, or move structure
identifiers.
7. Click [Apply].
If you confirm your entries with [OK] (instead of with [Apply], the Identifiers dialog
will close after you have responded to the confirmation prompt.
EPLAN Training 4
Structure Identifier Management
Note:
The project setting Conversion to uppercase (under Options > Settings >
Projects > "Project name" > Devices > General) is used when creating new
identifiers.
Preconditions:
EPLAN Training 5
Structure Identifier Management
In the settings, the Use Place identifiers dialog check box (Options > Settings
> User > Display > Identifier) is selected.
You have opened a project in which identifier blocks are used, for instance
"Higher-level function" and "Mounting location".
EPLAN Training 6
Structure Identifier Management
2. If you would like to obtain an overview of the existing structure identifiers, click
[...] next to the Full page name box.
3. In the Full page name dialog, click [...] next to the corresponding box for the
identifier block.
The <Identifier block> dialog lists all existing structure identifiers. The
display shows the contents of both Designation and Description.
EPLAN Training 7
Structure Identifier Management
4. Click [Cancel] to close the list.
5. In the Page name dialog, enter a new structure identifier into one of the fields
for the identifier block (e.g. for higher-level function or mounting location).
6. Click [OK].
The Page name dialog is closed. In the New page dialog, the full page
name is correspondingly updated.
8. Edit the position of the new structure identifier in the Place identifiers dialog
by using the buttons.
EPLAN Training 8
Structure Identifier Management
9. In the Description box enter a descriptive text for the new structure identifier.
11. Proceed analogously for all of the other pages to be generated in the New
page dialog.
Preconditions:
EPLAN Training 9
Structure Identifier Management
In the settings, the Use Place identifiers dialog check box (Options > Settings
> User > Display > Identifier) is selected.
You have opened a project in which identifier blocks are used, for instance
"Higher-level function" and "Mounting location".
EPLAN Training 10
Structure Identifier Management
2. Select the desired symbol in the Symbol selection dialog.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 11
Structure Identifier Management
5. In the Full DT box of the component-specific Properties <...> dialog, click [...].
EPLAN Training 12
Structure Identifier Management
6. If you would like to obtain an overview of the existing structure identifiers, click
[...] next to the appropriate field for the identifier block.
7. Click [Cancel].
8. In the Full DT dialog, enter a new structure identifier into one of the fields for
the identifier block (e.g. for "higher-level function" or "mounting location").
9. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 13
Structure Identifier Management
11. Edit the position of the new structure identifier in the Place identifiers dialog
by using the buttons.
12. In the Description box enter a descriptive text for the new structure identifier.
EPLAN Training 14
Structure Identifier Management
In the settings, the Use Place identifiers dialog check box (Options > Settings
> User > Display > Identifier) is selected.
You have opened a project in which identifier blocks are used, for instance
"Higher-level function" and "Mounting location".
1. Select the menu item Page > Page macro > Insert.
3. Click on [Open].
EPLAN Training 15
Structure Identifier Management
4. In the Adjust page structure dialog, specify the handling of page
designations for the target macro.
5. If you would like to obtain an overview of the existing identifiers, click [...] next
to the respective block for the target identifier block.
6. Click [Cancel].
EPLAN Training 16
Structure Identifier Management
7. In the Adjust page structure dialog, enter a new structure identifier into one
of the boxes for the target identifier block (e.g. for "Higher-level function" or
"Mounting location").
8. Click [OK].
9. Edit the position of the new structure identifier in the Place identifiers dialog
by using the buttons.
10. In the Description field, enter a descriptive text for the new identifier.
EPLAN Training 17
Structure Identifier Management
3 Editing an Identifier
Different options for editing structure identifiers are available. These can be activated
either through the popup menu or by using the buttons.
Precondition:
You have opened a project which uses structure identifiers, for instance "Higher-level
function" and "Mounting location" in the project structure.
1. In the Identifier dialog select the tab of the identifier block you want to edit.
EPLAN Training 18
Structure Identifier Management
2. Select the structure identifier to be moved in the table. Multiple selection is
possible here.
The selected lines are moved to the top / to the end of the table.
5. Click [Apply].
EPLAN Training 19
Structure Identifier Management
6. Answer the prompt.
Note:
Movement is also possible by holding the left mouse button down; here, however, the
entire line and not just a single column must be selected. The selected structure
identifiers can then be dragged over several lines into a new position. A moving
rectangle, which hangs on the mouse pointer, indicates that this function is active. A
red line indicates the two other structure identifiers between which the line will be
inserted as soon as the mouse button is release.
Precondition:
You have opened a project in which identifier blocks are used in the project structure,
for instance "Higher-level function" and "Mounting location".
EPLAN Training 20
Structure Identifier Management
1. In the Identifier dialog, select the tab of the identifier block that you want to
edit.
2. Click in the Designation field of the structure identifier you want to rename.
4. Click [Apply].
Using this function, not just the pages but also the structure identifiers are changed in
the devices. Any existing formatting (e.g. a line break) remains unchanged.
EPLAN Training 21
Structure Identifier Management
Preconditions:
You have opened a project in which identifier blocks are used in the project
structure, for instance "Higher-level function" and "Mounting location".
1. In the Identifier dialog, select the tab of the identifier block that you want to
edit.
2. Click in the Designation field of the main identifier you want to rename.
EPLAN Training 22
Structure Identifier Management
4. Click [Apply].
Example:
In the project, the identifier block "Higher-level function" is used. The structure
identifier INST1 assigned to the identifier block has the sub-identifiers HLF1.1 and
HLF1.2.
The structure identifier HLF1 is now renamed to HLF3. If the question regarding the
renaming of sub-identifiers is answered with [Yes], then EPLAN changes HLF1.1
and HLF1.2 to HLF3.1 and HLF3.2. For [No], only the main identifier is changed, but
not the sub-identifiers. In this case, then, after the action is complete the identifiers
HLF3, HLF1.1, and HLF1.2 exist.
Precondition:
You have opened a project in which identifier blocks are used in the project structure,
for instance "Higher-level function" and "Mounting location".
EPLAN Training 23
Structure Identifier Management
1. In the Identifier dialog, select the tab of the identifier block that you want to
edit.
2. Click in the Designation field of the structure identifier you want to rename.
4. Click [Apply].
Note:
If pages with the same name result from the merging of structure identifiers, then the
process is canceled with an appropriate message.
EPLAN Training 24
Structure Identifier Management
4 Sorting Identifiers
The structure identifiers in the respective tabs can be sorted using the [Sort] editing
function. The default setting when the structure identifier management is called up is
sorting by position.
Precondition:
You have opened a project in which identifier blocks are used in the project structure,
for instance "Higher-level function" and "Mounting location".
1. In the Identifier dialog, select the tab of the identifier block whose structure
identifiers you want to sort.
3. Select [Sort] > By position, to again show the structure identifiers in the order
in which they were ordered in the original database.
4. Click [Apply].
The new sort order is written to the database when the structure identifiers are
updated; until that time this is only a temporary order.
EPLAN Training 25
Structure Identifier Management
Precondition:
You have selected a project in which identifier blocks are used in the project
structure, for instance "Higher-level function" and "Mounting location".
2. In the Replace dialog, enter the search terms and replacement text.
3. Select the Match case check box if upper and lower case should be taken into
account during the search and replace.
6. Click [Apply].
EPLAN Training 26
Structure Identifier Management
7. Answer the prompt.
Notes:
Searching is always performed only in one column and always downwards, and
replacement is limited to Designation and Description.
The default value in the Find what field is the character string of the field
currently selected or, in the case of a multiple selection, the content of the field
last selected.
EPLAN Training 27
Structure Identifier Management
6 Checking Identifiers
Precondition:
You have opened a project in which identifier blocks are used in the project structure,
for instance "Higher-level function" and "Mounting location".
The Usage column is filled with the number of times each structure
identifier appears in the schematic, or with the text "No" if the identifier is not
(or is no longer) used in the schematic. If the structure identifier is not used,
but a sub-identifier exists, then the entry "*" is displayed.
Since the values in the Usage column are not stored, there is always a "?" value in
the column when structure identifier management is opened, until you call up the
command (or call it up again).
Note:
During this check, graphical pages are also processed to which a structure identifier
has been assigned, or on which objects with structure identifiers are located.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 28
Structure Identifier Management
You have opened a project in which identifier blocks are used in the project structure,
for instance "Higher-level function" and "Mounting location".
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Devices > DT syntax check
1. In the DT syntax checkdialog, select the Enable check check box, if the
syntax of device tags is to checked during entry.
2. In the group boxes Identifier blocks, Device tags, and Count numbers,
specify the scope of the test for the components of the DT.
3. Click [OK].
4. Select the menu item Project data > Structure identifier management.
7. Click [Settings] to view the settings for the DT syntax check and to change
them if necessary.
8. Click [Ignore] if the entry error was intentional but should be retained as an
exception.
EPLAN Training 29
Structure Identifier Management
9. Or click [Cancel] to edit the designation of the structure identifier again.
EPLAN Training 30
Structure Identifier Management
7 Updating Identifiers
Use this option to update all structure identifiers in the project.
Warning:
Updating of structure identifiers via [OK] or [Apply] is a process which cannot be
undone.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project in which identifier blocks are used, for instance
"Higher-level function" and "Mounting location".
Depending on your answer to the prompt, the project is updated. If you started the
update with [Apply], the Identifiers dialog stays open and you can continue to edit
structure identifiers. If you started the process with [OK], structure identifier
management is closed.
When updating the data, the device tags in the schematic and the page data is
updated. A changed sort order for structure identifiers is also written back to the
project and can have far-ranging effects on the order of pages and connections.
EPLAN Training 31
Structure Identifier Management
Placeholders for device tags in automatically generated pages, such as the table of
contents, terminal plan, and so on, will be adjusted only after the corresponding
update of report pages.
EPLAN Training 32
Structure Identifier Management
8 Deleting Identifiers
Note:
The deletion of structure identifiers is only possible if they are no longer used as page
identifiers or on devices. (Such identifiers show the value "No" in the Usage column
of the Identifiers dialog once you have selected [Extras] > Check usage).
Precondition:
You have opened a project in which identifier blocks are used in the project structure,
for instance "Higher-level function" and "Mounting location".
The table is updated, meaning that the "?" characters in the Usage column
are replaced with the current values.
2. Select the identifiers to be deleted in the table ("No" entry in the Usage
column).
EPLAN Training 33
Structure Identifier Management
3. Click (Delete).
The lines are deleted and all lines under them move up one position.
4. Click [Apply].
Notes:
Alternatively to this procedure, you can also remove structure identifiers no
longer in use from the database globally with [Extras] > Clean up all.
If you attempt to delete a structure identifier that is still in use in the schematic, a
message appears to that effect and the action is canceled.
If a page or a device is deleted whose structure identifiers are not used in any
other place in the project, then this identifier is still not removed from the
database. Deletion of structure identifiers is only possible in structure identifier
EPLAN Training 34
Structure Identifier Management
management.
EPLAN Training 35
Structure Identifier Management
EPLAN Training 36
Layer Management
Layer Management
EPLAN Training 1
Layer Management
EPLAN Training 2
Layer Management
There are standard EPLAN layers that are always present and cannot be deleted.
The layer names and descriptions of these standard layers are also write-protected.
The layer names of the standard layers always begin with "EPLAN". For example, the
layer for general symbol graphics is called EPLAN300. The other properties of the
standard layers, such as color, line type, etc., can be configured on a project basis.
You can also create your own layers and define their names and properties.
Note:
Prior to changing the layer management settings for a project, you should first export
a configuration file. In this way you have saved the default settings and can restore
them for those layers by importing them at a later date.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 3
Layer Management
1. Select the menu item Options > Layer management.
2. In the Layer Management - <Project Name> dialog, select the node (or a
layer below the node) for which you want to create a layer, and click on
(New).
A new row is created in the table. The Layer field automatically contains
the standard value NEW_LAYER_1. The properties will be copied from the
selected layer. (If a node is selected, the properties of the first layer below the
node are copied.) If you immediately create further layers, then these receive
the names NEW_LAYER_2, NEW_LAYER_3 etc.
3. If desired, change the default layer name and the entry in the Description
field. If you change the layer description, then EPLAN automatically sorts the
layer into the appropriate node.
Note:
EPLAN Training 4
Layer Management
4.
5. In the table, determine the properties of the layer, such as color, line type, etc.
6. Click [Apply], to save the layer. ([OK] also saves the layer and closes the
dialog.)
The layer will be sorted into the tree structure depending on the description
given. Periods within the layer description are treated as substructure
delimiters.
The layers used in a project, as well as the EPLAN default layers, cannot be deleted.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 5
Layer Management
1. Select the menu item Options > Layer management.
2. In the Layer management <Project name> dialog, select the desired layer(s)
and click (Delete).
3. Click [Apply], to delete the selected layer(s). ([OK] also deletes the layer(s)
and closes the dialog.)
EPLAN Training 6
Layer Management
Caution:
If you rename a layer with a name that already exists, then the two layers are
combined into a single layer. The properties of the edited layer are lost.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 7
Layer Management
2. In the Layer management <Project name> dialog, select the desired layer
and change the layer name in the Layer field.
3. Click [Apply], to save the changes. ([OK] also saves the changes and closes
the dialog).
All objects in the edited layer are transferred to the new layer and the
edited layer is deleted.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 8
Layer Management
1. Select the menu item Options > Layer management.
EPLAN Training 9
Layer Management
3. If desired, change the target directory and the name of the file to be exported
and click [Save].
If you import a configuration file containing user-defined layers that are not present in
the current project, then these layers are created. User-defined layers that exist in
both the configuration file and in the current project are reconfigured according to the
settings in the configuration file.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 10
Layer Management
The Layer import dialog is closed. The layer management adopts the
settings in the imported configuration file.
EPLAN Training 11
Layer Management
EPLAN Training 12
Message Management
Message Management
EPLAN Training 1
Message Management
EPLAN Training 2
Message Management
You have opened a project. You have selected one or more pages or a project in the
page navigator, or you have opened a page in the graphical editor.
1. Click [...] next to the Settings field of the Check project dialog.
In the table on the right side of the dialog, the messages possible for this
class are displayed.
EPLAN Training 3
Message Management
4. Use the drop-down list in the Category field to determine whether the
message should be displayed as an error, a warning, or a note.
5. Use the drop-down list in the Type of check field to determine whether the
check should be run both online and offline (setting "Online / offline") or only
offline (setting "Offline"), or whether the corresponding check should not be
run (setting "No").
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 4
Message Management
Precondition:
You have opened a project. You have selected one or more pages or a project in the
page navigator, or you have opened a page in the graphical editor.
1. In the Check project dialog, select a scheme from the Setting drop-down list,
which specifies the settings for the check run. Via [...] open the Settings:
Messages and checks dialog, where you can define your own scheme.
2. If you have selected individual pages for the check or have called the dialog
from the graphical editor, you can still extend the check run to the entire
project. To do so, select the Apply to entire project check box.
EPLAN Training 5
Message Management
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN checks the project or the selected pages according to the settings
specified in the scheme. The results of the check run are written to the
message database. The results of any previous check run are removed.
If messages occur during the check (because certain checks could not be
executed, for instance), these are written into the list of system messages. A
notification informs you of this fact.
4. Select the menu item Project data > Messages > Management.
5. If systems messages occurred during the check run, open the list of system
messages using Utilities > System messages.
Preconditions:
EPLAN Training 6
Message Management
In the Settings: Messages and checks dialog, certain function areas are
assigned the check type "Online / offline".
1. Select the menu item Project data > Messages > Management.
EPLAN checks all check criteria assigned the check type "Online / offline"
in the project settings. Any messages occurring are written to the message
database and displayed in the Message management - <Project name>
dialog immediately.
Notes:
For processed messages, you can select the Completed check box and filter on
this property in order to hide them.
EPLAN Training 7
Message Management
The messages are marked with icons depending on the type of error. Critical
messages can therefore be identified immediately, even if the messages in the table
are not sorted or filtered.
Precondition:
You have selected one or more pages or a project in the page navigator, or you have
opened a page in the graphical editor.
1. Select the menu item Project data > Messages > Management.
Note:
Use the [F1] key to call up thorough help for each message, including examples and
suggestions for correction.
EPLAN Training 8
Message Management
1. In the Message management - <Project name> dialog next to the Filter field,
click [...].
2. In the Filter: Messages dialog, specify the message classes in the table for
which messages should be displayed, e.g. terminals, plugs, cables, etc. To do
this, select the Selection check box in the column.
3. Using the check boxes below the table, specify the trades from which
messages should be displayed (Electrical engineering, Fluid power, and
General).
EPLAN Training 9
Message Management
4. Specify the categories (error, warning, note) to be displayed. Check the
corresponding check boxes.
5. Select the Completed messages check box if you also would like to display
messages already flagged as resolved.
6. Click [OK].
The last filter criteria selected also remain in effect after the dialog is
closed, and are again active when the dialog is reopened.
Note:
When opening a project or switching projects, the current state of project-wide
messages is always displayed when message management is called up. However,
the existing filters can influence this display.
EPLAN Training 10
Message Management
2. Double-click the message.
The erroneous object is selected in the graphical editor and the cursor is
placed on the insertion point of the object.
EPLAN Training 11
Message Management
4. Change the data which caused the error and click [OK].
5. Use Project data > Messages > Check project to start a new check run to
check whether the error has been resolved.
All messages present in the project are read in again. The updating of the
project messages always applies to the entire project, and in multi-user
operation, for all users working on the project.
EPLAN Training 12
Bills of Materials
Bills of Materials
EPLAN Training 1
Bills of Materials
1 Using the Tree and List View of Bill of Materials Navigator ......................3
1.1 Use tree view ............................................................................................3
1.2 Using the List View ...................................................................................5
1.3 Switch from tree view to list view ..............................................................8
3 Adding Parts................................................................................................33
EPLAN Training 2
Bills of Materials
Precondition:
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select the Tree tab.
EPLAN Training 3
Bills of Materials
2. Select Popup menu > View and then in the following menu select the
hierarchical level to be shown in the tree view.
EPLAN Training 4
Bills of Materials
View > Part number: The display includes the part number, identifier, and full
DT.
View > Part number / structure identifier: The display includes the part
number, structure identifier, and DT short designation.
View > Manufacturer: The display includes the manufacturer, part number,
identifier, and full DT.
View > Supplier: The display includes the supplier, part number, identifier, and
full DT.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 5
Bills of Materials
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select the List tab.
EPLAN Training 6
Bills of Materials
2. Choose the Popup menu > Configure columns.
EPLAN Training 7
Bills of Materials
3. In the Column configuration dialog, you can determine which information
should be displayed in the list (i.e. part number, DT, quantity, and so on).
Select the corresponding check boxes.
4. Click [OK].
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 8
Bills of Materials
You have opened at least one project.
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select the Tree tab.
2. Select the items / parts which you would like to edit in the list view or whose
data you would like to view.
EPLAN Training 9
Bills of Materials
3. Select Popup menu > List with preselection.
The list view is opened with an automatic filter (preselection), in which the filter
contains the currently selected elements, that is, the properties that are used as
structure identifiers are consolidated in a filter.
Example:
In the tree view, there is a higher-level function =A1 containing a location +O1. This in
EPLAN Training 10
Bills of Materials
Note:
If no filter can be derived from the mark (for instance in the case of a multiple
selection) then this menu item cannot be called up.
Automatic preselection generates the "Selection" filter, which appears in the drop-
down list in the Filter field in the upper portion of the Bill of Materials- <Project
name> dialog. To suppress it temporarilty, deselect the Active check box. You can
also simply rename it in the Filter dialog in order to be able to reuse it at any time.
EPLAN Training 11
Bills of Materials
Precondition:
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select the List tab.
EPLAN Training 12
Bills of Materials
2. Choose the Popup menu > Configure columns.
EPLAN Training 13
Bills of Materials
3. In the Column configuration dialog, select the Placement check box.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 14
Bills of Materials
5. Select Popup menu > Edit part for the non-placed part to be edited, i.e. for a
part which has no entry in the Placement column. You can select multiple
parts.
EPLAN Training 15
Bills of Materials
6. Click [...] in the Part number field of the Edit part dialog.
EPLAN Training 16
Bills of Materials
8. Click [OK].
10. Assign different values to the properties on the right side by overwriting the
entries in the fields.
EPLAN Training 17
Bills of Materials
Precondition:
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select the List tab.
EPLAN Training 18
Bills of Materials
2. Choose the Popup menu > Configure columns.
EPLAN Training 19
Bills of Materials
3. In the Column configuration dialog, select the Placement and
Representation type check boxes.
4. Click [OK].
The list view is extended with the Placement and Representation type
columns.
EPLAN Training 20
Bills of Materials
5. Double-click the part to be edited that has already been placed and which has
the "Panel layout" entry in the Representation type column.
Or select Popup menu > Properties (in this case, multiple selection is
possible.)
6. In the Properties <...>: Part placement dialog, define the required settings for
the Part placement itself, the Display and the Format.
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 21
Bills of Materials
Precondition:
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select the List tab.
EPLAN Training 22
Bills of Materials
2. Choose the Popup menu > Configure columns.
EPLAN Training 23
Bills of Materials
3. In the Column configuration dialog, select the Project part check box.
4. Click [OK].
5. Double-click the project part that you wish to edit and assign it the appropriate
data in the Edit part dialog.
6. Click [OK].
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 24
Bills of Materials
You have opened at least one project.
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select the List tab.
EPLAN Training 25
Bills of Materials
2. Choose the Popup menu > Configure columns.
EPLAN Training 26
Bills of Materials
3. In the Column configuration dialog, select the Placement check box.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 27
Bills of Materials
5. Select Popup menu > Place for the non-placed part to be edited, that is, for a
part which has no entry in the Placement column, then select an option from
the subsequent menu. You can't select multiple parts here.
EPLAN Training 28
Bills of Materials
6. Select Place > With parts data, if at least one graphical macro and the values
for width and height are defined. In this case no other input is required and the
part can be placed into the graphic as described in the next step.
If you selected Place > With symbol selection, then select the symbol you
would like to assign to the part from the Symbol selection dialog, then click
[OK].
If you selected Place > With function selection, then select the function you
would like to assign to the part from the Function selection dialog, then click
[OK].
If you selected Place > With macro selection, then select the macro that you
would like to assign to the part from the Select macro dialog, then click [OK].
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 29
Bills of Materials
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select the part to be
replaced.
EPLAN Training 30
Bills of Materials
2. Select Popup menu > Replace Part.
4. Click [OK].
The parts previously assigned to the device will be replaced by the newly
selected ones. The quantity of the parts remains the same.
Example:
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 31
Bills of Materials
Project data > Devices / parts > Bill of materials navigator
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select the part to be deleted.
EPLAN Training 32
Bills of Materials
3 Adding Parts
In contrast to the adding of project parts, you use this menu item to assign one (or
more) parts to the current device.
Precondition:
1. In the Parts List- <Project name> dialog, select the device(s) that are to be
assigned further part(s).
3. In the Parts selection dialog, select the part or parts to be added. (Multiple
selection is possible.)
4. Click [OK].
Note:
All functions of the Parts selection can be used, and the parts-specific presettings
will be taken into account.
EPLAN Training 33
Bills of Materials
Precondition:
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select Popup menu > Add
project part.
EPLAN Training 34
Bills of Materials
2. In the Parts selection dialog, select the part or parts to be added. (Multiple
selection is possible.)
3. Click [OK].
The new project parts will be inserted into the tree in alphabetical order.
Note:
All functions of the Parts selection can be used, and the parts-specific presettings
will be taken into account.
EPLAN Training 35
Bills of Materials
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 36
Bills of Materials
2. Click [...] in the Part number field of the Edit Part dialog.
3. Select one or more parts from the Parts selection. (Multiple selection is
possible.)
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 37
Bills of Materials
5. Edit the Number of units / quantity of the new part or parts, if necessary.
6. Click (Delete) to remove parts from the device if they are no longer needed.
7. Select [Settings] > Part Selection (project), in order to edit the settings for
parts selection. Or select [...] in the Data source field to change the default
settings for the data source.
EPLAN Training 38
Bills of Materials
8. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 39
Bills of Materials
Preconditions:
You have opened at least one project.
You have selected the parts whose data should be synchronized with the master
data.
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select Popup menu >
Synchronize Parts Data.
Parts synchronization is performed for the selected parts from the parts
database and overwrites the stored project parts.
Note:
If no parts are selected when this menu item is called up, then the synchronization
will be performed for the entire project.
EPLAN Training 40
Bills of Materials
7 Renumbering Items
Preconditions:
You have opened at least one project.
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select Popup menu > Add
item numbers.
EPLAN Training 41
Bills of Materials
2. In the Number items dialog, select a sorting scheme from the Sorting drop-
down list.
3. Or click [...], to edit an existing scheme or create a new scheme using the
Sorting dialog..
4. Enter the starting value for numbering into the Start field.
5. In the Increment field, enter the increment by which the numbers are
increased.
6. In the Field width field, determine the number of digits planned for the item
numbers.
7. If you have marked individual items, select the Apply to entire project check
box if you would like to renumber all of the items of the project, regardless of
the current selection. (If you haven't marked any items, the field will be
deselected, since in this case the entire project is taken automatically).
EPLAN Training 42
Bills of Materials
8. Select the Preview of results check box to open the Number items: Preview
of Results dialog, which allows you to view and, if necessary, edit the new
numbering.
9. Click [OK].
If the Preview of result check box is not selected, the new numbering will
be written directly to the bill of materials. Otherwise the Number items:
Preview of Results dialog opens.
EPLAN Training 43
Bills of Materials
10. In the Number items: Preview of Results dialog, enter the Item numbers
into the Target column.
EPLAN Training 44
Bills of Materials
Precondition:
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select Popup menu >
Export.
EPLAN Training 45
Bills of Materials
2. In the Export Bill of Materials dialog, select the drive and directory defining
where the export file should be generated from the Save in drop-down list .
3. In the File name field, enter the name for the export file to be generated.
4. Select one of the entries defining the format for the export file to be generated,
from the File Type drop-down list.
5. Click [Save].
The bill of materials will be exported to the specified file name in the
specified directory.
EPLAN Training 46
Bills of Materials
Precondition:
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select Popup menu >
Import.
EPLAN Training 47
Bills of Materials
2. In the Import Bill of Materials dialog, use the Search in drop-down list to
define the drive and directory where the import file is located.
3. Select one of the entries defining the import file type from the File Type drop-
down list.
5. Click [Open].
The records are imported. If errors occur during the import, then a
corresponding message is displayed, the details of which can be seen in the
message management (Project data > Messages > Management) .
Note:
If a part reference is imported that is already assigned to a DT, the DT must already
exist. Otherwise, a part reference for a Project part will be created.
EPLAN Training 48
Bills of Materials
Precondition:
1. In the Bill of materials - <Project name> dialog, select Popup menu >
Settings.
2. In the Settings: Parts dialog, select the Connection part check box in the
Include parts group box.
3. Click [OK].
Notes:
If a part is stored in a connection definition point though which more than one
connection runs, this part will be written to each of those connections. The part
quantity can in this case only be obtained through a connection list report.
If, on the other hand, a connection runs through more than one connection
definition point, and each of these connection definition points has the same
part definition, then the part appears only once.
EPLAN Training 49
Bills of Materials
EPLAN Training 50
Finding and Replacing
EPLAN Training 1
Finding and Replacing
EPLAN Training 2
Finding and Replacing
1. In the Find dialog enter the search term in the Find what field.
You can also use placeholders (such as * or ?) in the search.
It is possible to search for multiple related terms. However, you cannot search
for multiple independent phrases.
EPLAN Training 3
Finding and Replacing
2. Use the check box to determine whether upper / lower case will be taken into
account during the search, and whether only entire texts (i.e. exactly as the
text is entered into the input field) will be searched.
3. In the Search in group box you can specify the objects in which you would like
to search for the term. Select the check boxes for the objects in which you
would like to search.
4. Define the search location in the Search location group box. For searches in
the graphical editor you can exclude certain page types from the search here.
If you begin searching for multiple selected pages, the corresponding page
types are preset. Select the check boxes for the page types in which you
would like to search for the term.
5. Specify the list of results in which you would like to save the search results.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN begins the search and then opens the Search results - <project
name> dialog and displays the entries found.
EPLAN Training 4
Finding and Replacing
EPLAN calls up the Search results - <project name> dialog for the active
project. The list of results specified in the menu will be displayed in the
foreground.
If the Search Results - <Project Name> dialog is already open but not in
the foreground it will be filled with data from the active project and brought to
the foreground.
EPLAN Training 5
Finding and Replacing
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 6
Finding and Replacing
1. In the Search Results - <Project Name> dialog select the entry in the results
list whose value you would like to replace. (Multiple selections are possible).
EPLAN Training 7
Finding and Replacing
2. Select Popup menu > Replace.
The value from the (first) selected entry will be displayed in the Search for
field of the Replace dialog.
3. In the Replace with field specify the value that you would like to use to
replace the value shown in the Search for field.
4. Use the check box to determine whether upper / lower case will be taken into
account during the search, and whether only entire texts (i.e. exactly as the
text is entered into the input field) will be searched.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 8
Finding and Replacing
You have performed a search and the Search results - <project name> dialog is
open.
1. Select an entry in the list of search results and select Popup menu >
Properties.
You can also select multiple entries. In this case only the properties common
to all of the objects are displayed.
EPLAN Training 9
Finding and Replacing
2. In the Properties dialog make the desired changes to the object properties.
3. Click [OK].
The Properties dialog will close and you will be returned to the search
results list.
Multi-user operation
All objects to be edited are locked when you select the Properties menu command in
multi-user operation. If all of the objects can't be locked, these objects also can't be
edited, in which a message to that effect will appear. Change your selection if this is
the case.
4 Synchronizing a Selection
If you have several navigators open, you can use the Synchronize selection
command in these dialogs to display the same object. If an object is selected in a
navigator or in the graphical editor, it will also be selected in the other navigators.
This makes it easier to find project data.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 11
Finding and Replacing
2. Select the menu items Find > Synchronize selection.
The selected object will also be selected in all of the other open navigators
that contain this object.
Example:
You have opened the graphical editor, the device navigator and the terminal strip
navigator. Now, in the graphical editor, select a terminal, and then select the menu
items Find > Synchronize selection. In the device navigator, and the terminal strip
navigator, the selected terminal will also be marked. The tree can also be opened at
the appropriate location.
EPLAN Training 12
Finding and Replacing
EPLAN Training 13
Reports
Reports
EPLAN Training 1
Reports
EPLAN Training 2
Reports
EPLAN Training 3
Reports
2. In the Report type column, decide on a report type.
3. In order to assign a form to the report type, click on the corresponding line in
the Form column, and select "Browse..."
EPLAN opens the Select form dialog and shows the directory defined in
the settings as the form directory.
4. To preview a form, select the form and activate the Preview check box.
EPLAN Training 4
Reports
5. To accept the selected form, click [Open].
EPLAN Training 5
Reports
Precondition:
2. Click [New].
EPLAN Training 6
Reports
3. Select a report type in the Select report dialog and click [OK].
4. In the Filter / sorting - <Report type> dialog, select schemes for the filtering,
sorting, and page breaks, and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 7
Reports
5. In the <Report type> dialog, specify a start page for the report.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 8
Reports
1. In the Reports - <project name> dialog, select the Reports tab.
2. Select a report and select Popup menu > Create report template.
EPLAN Training 9
Reports
3. To check or adapt the settings of the report template, select the Templates
tab.
4. Select the template and change the settings in the right-hand area in the
Value column.
EPLAN Training 10
Reports
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have assigned a form to the desired report type.
In the Settings: Output to pages dialog, you have specified all of the desired
settings.
Utilities > Reports > Generate
1. In the Reports- <project name> dialog, select the Reports tab and click
[New].
2. Select the output format Page from the Output format drop-down list.
3. Check whether the project where the report is to be generated has been
entered into the Output project field.
EPLAN Training 11
Reports
4. To select a different project click [...] in the Project selection dialog, select
the desired project and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 12
Reports
5. Select a report overview in the Select report type field.
6. Click [OK].
7. In the Filter / sorting dialog, define the filtering, sorting, and page breaks, if
desired, and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 13
Reports
8. In the <Report type> dialog, enter the page name of the start page into the
first structure identifier.
9. If desired, enter an optional page description and sheet number and then click
[OK].
10. Define the properties of the start page for all other structure identifiers in the
same manner. The structure identifiers that are available depend on the page
sorting assigned to the report type in the Settings: Output to pages dialog.
EPLAN Training 14
Reports
11. To adopt the start page properties for all structure identifiers, select the check
box Apply start to all structure identifiers.
EPLAN Training 15
Reports
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have assigned a form to the desired report type.
Utilities > Reports > Generate
1. In the Reports- <project name> dialog, select the Reports tab and click
[New].
2. Choose the output format Page from the Output format drop-down list.
3. Check whether the project where the report is to be generated has been
entered into the Output project field.
EPLAN Training 16
Reports
4. To select a different project click [...] in the Project selection dialog, select
the desired project and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 17
Reports
5. Select a function-related report type on the Select report type field.
EPLAN Training 18
Reports
7. In the Available field, select the device that is to be included in the report and
then click (Move to the right).
EPLAN Training 19
Reports
11. In the <Report type> dialog, enter the page name of the start page into the
first structure identifier.
12. If desired, enter an optional page description and sheet number and then click
[OK].
13. Define the properties of the start page for all other structure identifiers in the
same manner. The structure identifiers that are available depend on the page
sorting assigned to the report type in the Settings: Output to pages dialog.
EPLAN Training 20
Reports
14. To adopt the start page properties for all structure identifiers, select the check
box Apply start to all structure identifiers.
EPLAN Training 21
Reports
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have access to a fixed or user-defined report template.
Utilities > Reports > Generate
EPLAN Training 22
Reports
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have already generated reports and / or created report templates.
1. Select the menu item Utilities > Reports > Generate project reports.
EPLAN Training 23
Reports
1. In the Reports - <Project name> dialog, select the Reports tab and click
[New].
EPLAN Training 24
Reports
2. Choose the output format "Manual placement" from the Output format drop-
down list.
3. Check whether the project where the report is to be generated has been
entered into the Output project field.
EPLAN Training 25
Reports
4. In the Select report type field, select the report type and click [OK].
When the Filter / sorting dialog opens, define any optional filtering and
sorting and then click [OK].
5. Position the mouse pointer at the location on the page where the report should
be placed.
The report is listed in Utilities > Reports > Generate in the report overview
as an "embedded report".
EPLAN Training 26
Reports
Preconditions:
You have created report pages.
You have opened the project with the report pages in the navigator dialog
Pages - <project name> .
EPLAN Training 27
Reports
All report pages and all embedded reports below the structure identifier
layer will be updated.
EPLAN Training 28
Reports
3. Click [Update].
EPLAN Training 29
Reports
Preconditions:
You have created report pages.
You have opened a project in the page navigator.
If you update report pages automatically, then opening pages takes somewhat longer
than opening without automatic updating.
EPLAN Training 30
Reports
2. Select User > Display > General.
3. In the Settings: General dialog, select the Update reports when opening
pages check box, and click [OK].
If you now open a report page, then the report page will be updated.
EPLAN Training 31
Reports
EPLAN Training 32
Reports
3. In the Settings: General dialog, uncheck the Update reports when opening
pages check box, and click [OK].
If you now open a report page, then the report page will not be updated.
EPLAN Training 33
Reports
EPLAN Training 34
Labeling
Labeling
EPLAN Training 1
Labeling
5 Outputting Labeling....................................................................................19
EPLAN Training 2
Labeling
Precondition:
You have opened a project.
Utilities > Reports > Labeling
EPLAN Training 3
Labeling
3. In the New scheme dialog, enter a name and description, and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 4
Labeling
4. In the Report type dialog, select a report type, and click [OK].
The report type is shown in the Settings: Labeling dialog in the Report
type field.
EPLAN Training 5
Labeling
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 6
Labeling
2. In the dialog Settings: Labeling dialog in the Scheme field, select a user-
defined scheme, or create one.
EPLAN Training 7
Labeling
1. Select the Header, Label, or Footer tab.
2. In the Available format elements field, select a property and then click
(move right).
3. Select the desired property in the Property field in the Property dialog.
EPLAN Training 8
Labeling
4. In the Length group box, select an option for the length of the labeling field,
and click [OK].
The format element is entered into the Selected format elements field.
5. To output a separator after the labeling text of a property, select the format
element "Separator" in the Available format elements field, and click
(move right).
7. Repeat this procedure until you have selected all the format elements you
want.
In the Preview field, you will see a preview of all the selected format
elements.
EPLAN Training 9
Labeling
2. To delete a format element from the selection, select the format element in the
Selected format elements field, and click (Delete).
3. To change the settings of a format element, select the format element in the
Selected format elements field, and click (Edit).
EPLAN Training 10
Labeling
EPLAN Training 11
Labeling
2. In the dialog Settings: Labeling dialog in the Scheme field, select a user-
defined scheme, or create one.
3. On the File tab in the Type of file field, select the file type Text file
(*.txt).
EPLAN Training 12
Labeling
4. Click [...] next to the Target file field, and enter the storage location and the
name of the labeling file into the Open dialog.
5. Click [Options].
EPLAN Training 13
Labeling
6. To generate a text file for a Windows application, select the ANSI character set
in the Character set field of the Settings: Text export dialog.
8. Click [...] next to the Application field, and use the Open dialog to select the
*.exe of the editor to use to open the labeling file.
9. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 14
Labeling
EPLAN Training 15
Labeling
2. In the dialog Settings: Labeling dialog in the Scheme field, select a user-
defined scheme, or create one.
EPLAN Training 16
Labeling
3. On the File tab in the Type of file field, select the file type Excel file
(*.xls).
EPLAN Training 17
Labeling
4. Click [...] next to the Target file field, and enter the storage location and the
name of the labeling file into the Open dialog.
5. Click [...] next to the Template field, then use the Open dialog to select an
Excel template *.xls.
EPLAN Training 18
Labeling
5 Outputting Labeling
Precondition:
You have opened a project.
In the Settings: Labeling dialog, you have specified the settings for a fixed or
user-defined labeling scheme.
Utilities > Reports > Labeling
1. Select one of the possible labeling scheme from the Settings drop-down list.
In the Report type field, the report type is displayed on which the scheme
is based.
2. To limit the output of labeling data, select the Active check box next to the
Filter drop-down list and select a filter scheme.
3. To specify the order of labeling data, select the Active check box next to the
Sorting drop-down list and select a sorting scheme.
EPLAN Training 19
Labeling
4. In the Language drop-down list, select the language in which the labeling text
should be output.
5. Click [...] next to the Target file field, and enter the storage location and the
name of the labeling file into the Open dialog.
6. In the Repetitions per label field, specify how many times the labeling text of
each label should be output to the labeling file.
7. In the Repetitions of total output field, specify how many times the entire
labeling text should be output to the labeling file.
8. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 20
Labeling
EPLAN Training 21
Parts Management
Parts Management
EPLAN Training 1
Parts Management
EPLAN Training 2
Parts Management
1 Creating a Part ..............................................................................................5
1.1 Create a part .............................................................................................5
1.2 Create variants..........................................................................................6
2 Editing a Part.................................................................................................7
2.1 Copy / cut parts.........................................................................................7
2.2 Add a part .................................................................................................8
2.3 Paste technical data..................................................................................9
2.4 Paste function templates...........................................................................9
2.5 Enter parts data ......................................................................................10
5 Creating Modules........................................................................................17
5.1 Assign module items...............................................................................18
6 Filtering Parts..............................................................................................23
6.1 Filter based on fields...............................................................................23
6.2 Text-based filtering .................................................................................28
EPLAN Training 4
Parts Management
1 Creating a Part
Utilities > Parts > Management
In the Parts management dialog, you can create, edit, and organize your master
data. Using [Extras] > Settings, select the database you want to edit.
In the left area of the dialog, the data to be managed is displayed in a tree or list,
where the hierarchical structure of the tree contains the following main groups:
Electrical engineering
Fluid power
Mechanics
Construction
Connection points
Customers
Manufacturers / suppliers.
Within a trade, the parts are divided into "Components", "Assemblies", and possibly
"Modules". Cables and housings are included in the individual parts group.
The part type Components of the various trades is further broken down into product
groups according to DIN and / or manufacturer ([Extras] > Settings).
Note:
The product groups are only displayed if they contain at least one part.
Precondition:
You have selected the Part types level in the tree, or if the tree view of the
components has been specified in more detail, the level of product groups. Or you
have selected a part entry in the list.
EPLAN Training 5
Parts Management
1. Select Popup menu > New.
2. Enter the data for the part into the tabs on the right side of the dialog, first
assigning a descriptive part number.
Precondition:
2. Provide the designation for the new variant of the current part in the New
variant dialog. Valid designations are 0 through 9 and A through Z.
Note:
Part and variant numbers must be unique. If you accidentally enter a designation
which already exists, EPLAN warns you as soon as you click [Apply] or [Close]. The
record can only be saved after you have assigned a new part number.
EPLAN Training 6
Parts Management
2 Editing a Part
Utilities > Parts > Management
In the Parts management dialog, you can create, edit, and organize your master
data. Using [Extras] > Settings, select the database you want to edit.
In the left area of the dialog, the data to be managed is displayed in a tree or list,
where the hierarchical structure of the tree contains the following main groups:
Electrical engineering
Fluid power
Mechanics
Construction
Connection points
Customers
Manufacturers / suppliers.
Within a plant, the parts are divided into "Components", "Assemblies", and possibly
"Modules". Cables and housings are included in the individual parts group.
The part type Components of the various trades is further broken down into product
groups according to DIN and / or manufacturer ([Extras] > Settings).
Note:
The product groups are only displayed if they contain at least one part.
Precondition:
1. Select the Popup menu > Copy or Popup menu > Cut.
EPLAN Training 7
Parts Management
The part is copied into the buffer. When cutting, it is also removed from the
list.
Precondition:
EPLAN creates the new part in the current level of the hierarchy with the
part number <original_part_number>_1.
Example:
2. Edit the copied data in the tabs on the right side of this dialog, or enter new
data.
During insertion, only the relevant data is taken, i.e., copied data might
possibly not be inserted because the target part cannot store that data.
Example:
You copy the cable HELU.33 with order number ABC and a bending radius of
50 cm, and you add this part as a general single part. As a result, you have
the single part HELU.33_1 (in the "General" product group) with order number
ABC. Since individual parts have no bending radius, the value of 50 cm has no
effect.
EPLAN Training 8
Parts Management
Precondition:
You have copied the part whose technical data should be copied to the Clipboard
using Popup menu > Copy or Popup menu > Cut, and selected the parts or
variants into which the technical data should be copied.
The data is copied into the appropriate fields of the part or parts, while any
already existing data is discarded. The technical data (the data on the General
tab (all fields), function templates, and special technical data) are taken into
account. It is here too that only the relevant data is inserted, i.e., copied data
possibly might not be inserted because the target part can't store that data.
Precondition:
You have copied the part whose function definitions should be copied to the
Clipboard using Popup menu > Copy or Popup menu > Cut, and selected the parts
or variants into which the function definitions should be copied.
The data is copied into the corresponding fields of the part or parts.
EPLAN Training 9
Parts Management
Precondition:
1. Use the tabs on the right side of the dialog to enter data for the selected part
or parts.
If multiple parts are selected, then only that data is shown which is identical
or undetermined (i.e., "empty"); this can be entered or changed globally for all
selected parts. Compare the dialog-specific information with the fields in the
individual tabs.
EPLAN Training 10
Parts Management
Part variants have identical part numbers with identical sales data, but with partly
differing technical data. The variants are displayed as the last nodes in the tree
structure of parts management, once multiple variants are stored in an part. (In the
list view, the parts are displayed under one another, so for three variants the part
number will be listed three times in a row.)
A part always has at least one variant. When a part is created, it receives one variant
with the unique designation "1", but it is only displayed in the tree with its part
number. If a part has more than one variant, then all variant designations are
displayed under the part number. This display behavior applies for filtered data as
well: If a filter is set, then variants are also filtered, meaning that only those variants
are displayed which correspond to the filter.
Precondition:
2. Provide the designation for the new variant of the current part in the New
variant dialog. Valid designations are 0 through 9 and A through Z.
Warning:
EPLAN Training 11
Parts Management
If more than one part is selected, then this function can't be executed.
Precondition:
In the tree, you have selected exactly one entry at the variant level, or you have
selected the part number of the variant to be deleted in the list.
Depending on your response, the variant is deleted. If it was the next-to-last variant,
i.e., if the part now has only one variant left, then the hierarchical level of the variants
is closed.
Note:
Only a single variant may be deleted at a time. If more than one variant is selected,
the action is canceled with a corresponding message.
EPLAN Training 12
Parts Management
These options in the popup menu are impossible for variants, since they always
apply to the entire part. Therefore, if you call up one of these options on the level of a
variant designation, then the part to which the variant belongs to is cut or copied, and
then inserted, along with all of its current variants.
EPLAN Training 13
Parts Management
4 Creating Assemblies
An assembly is a collection of parts belonging to one device (e.g., a pushbutton with
an NO contact, the appropriate bracket, and the pushbutton head). The assembly
has its own part number and can contain subassemblies. The parts contained in
assemblies also contain information about part variants. Specially for device selection
and for reports, then, the technical data for variants will also be taken into account.
Precondition:
In the tree, you have selected the assemblies level or you have selected an assembly
part in the list.
2. Enter the data for the assembly into the tabs on the right side of the dialog,
first assigning a descriptive part number.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 14
Parts Management
2. Click [...] in the Part number field.
3. Select the desired part from the tree or list structure of parts selection.
Multiple selection is not possible here, i.e., the uppermost selected part is
always used.
4. Click [OK].
The part is written into the Part number field of the Assembly tab.
6. If necessary, overwrite the value of the current variant in the Variant field.
9. Click (move up) and (move down), in order to change the order of
display.
10. Click [Apply] to write the entries and changes to the database without leaving
parts management.
EPLAN Training 15
Parts Management
Note:
The default values for a newly generated line are taken from the line currently
selected, i.e., its data on number and part number are used. If no entry is marked,
then an empty line (with preset quantity = 1) will be generated.
EPLAN Training 16
Parts Management
5 Creating Modules
Modules are needed for working with devices. They have the same properties as
parts, but additionally contain lists of subparts structured by device tag (DT) (so-
called module items). A module is thus set of parts that belong to several nested
devices (for example, a motor control unit installed in a 19" rack). It can also contain
assemblies. The parts contained in modules also contain information about part
variants. Specially for device selection and for reports, then, the technical data for
variants will also be taken into account.
Precondition:
In the tree, you have selected the modules level or you have selected a module part
in the list.
2. Enter the data for the module into the tabs on the right side of the dialog, first
assigning a descriptive part number.
EPLAN Training 17
Parts Management
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 18
Parts Management
3. Select the desired part from the tree or list structure of parts selection.
Multiple selection is not possible here, i.e., the uppermost selected part is
always used.
4. Click [OK].
The part is written into the Part number field of the Module tab.
EPLAN Training 19
Parts Management
5. Assign the device tag in the DT cell.
7. If necessary, overwrite the value of the current variant in the Variant field.
EPLAN Training 20
Parts Management
10. Click (move up) and (move down), in order to change the order of
display.
11. Click [Apply] to write the entries and changes to the database without leaving
parts management.
Note:
The default values for a newly generated line are taken from the line currently
EPLAN Training 21
Parts Management
selected, i.e., its data for number, part number, and DT are used. If no entry is
marked, then an empty line (with preset quantity = 1) will be generated.
EPLAN Training 22
Parts Management
6 Filtering Parts
Utilities > Parts > Management
The filtering of parts offers an effective option for limiting the number of parts
displayed, increasing ease of use. You can filter in parts management in two ways:
text-based
field-based.
The text-based filter shows in the left-hand side of the window only those parts for
which an arbitrary field in the field contains the text specified by the filter. The field-
based filter performs the search only in particular record fields (e.g., for the field
"Type number"). In this filter, the entire field contents are checked to ensure that they
match the search text.
Note:
The filtering of records is possibly only in part-indexed databases. This means that in
the "manufacturer / supplier" and "customer" databases, no filtering can be
performed!
Precondition:
You have opened a parts database using [Extras] > Settings in the Parts
management dialog.
EPLAN Training 23
Parts Management
1. Click [...] in the Field-based filter field.
2. In the Filter dialog, select a scheme from the drop-down list and edit it as
needed, or click (New) to create a new scheme.
3. Click (New) on the toolbar for the filter criteria in order to insert a new
criterion.
EPLAN Training 24
Parts Management
4. In the Criteria selection dialog, select the property to be used as a filter
criterion, or select the "OR" entry in order to specify an OR combination.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 25
Parts Management
7. Select the Negated check box to invert the filter settings.
Example:
You have selected the "Manufacturer" criterion and set the filter to "= SIE".
Select Negated for all of the parts to be found that do not come from the
manufacturer SIE.
8. In the Operator cell, open the drop-down list of possible operators and select
the desired one.
10. Repeat these steps in order to specify additional filter criteria and further limit
the selection of parts. If multiple fields are selected, they are logically
combined with AND (by default), but you can force an OR combination by
selecting OR from the Criteria selection dialog.
12. Activate the filter setting by selecting the Active check box beside the Field-
based filter field.
Notes:
A filter criterion can also be opened in the Criteria selection dialog by double-
clicking it.
Once the filter criteria have been specified, they can be replaced by others by
clicking [...] in the Criterion field, and by simply replacing them with a different
EPLAN Training 26
Parts Management
For a field-based filter, the text entered is checked to ensure that it corresponds
exactly to the data field contents.
Example:
If you filter the parts databases on, for instance, on the manufacturer short name
"HER", then parts where "HER1" is entered in the corresponding data field will not be
found.
Warning:
Wildcard characters such as * and ? must not be used in the text to be found; they
will be interpreted as "normal" characters. If data with Units are used as filter criteria,
e.g., the "Installation distance" or the "Weight" (Mounting data tab), you must enter
the corresponding value without the units if it should be used for filtering. When
filtering based on file names like the names for a graphical macro or an external
document, each file name must be entered with path and file extension.
Once a filter is used, the entire parts database is filtered, i.e., the number of parts will
be reduced and the name of the scheme displayed in the drop-down list on the left
beside the [...] button. The evaluation of filtration takes only those parts into account
which contain all the fields selected.
Example:
To delete an entire line from a field-based filter (Filter dialog), proceed as follows:
EPLAN Training 27
Parts Management
2. Click (Delete) on the toolbar for the filter criteria, in order to delete the line
and its criteria.
Precondition:
You have opened a parts database using [Extras] > Settings in the Parts
management dialog.
2. Enter the text to be searched for in the Partial text field of the Full text
search dialog. The text entered can be in this case only a part of the term to
be searched. For instance, if you filter the individual part database on the text
"capacitor", then parts will also be displayed in which the text "power
capacitor" appears.
3. Select the Match case check box if a difference should be noted between
texts such as SIE and Sie when filtering.
4. Select the part type for which you want to execute the search by selecting the
appropriate check box.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 28
Parts Management
6. Activate the filter setting by selecting the Active check box beside the Full
text filter field.
The search text can be extended with logical operators. These are && (AND) and ||
(OR). The search always applies to one field of the part.
Example:
You are searching for SIE&&39. The part with order number SIE.62392 is found. The
part with order number SIE.55 and type number 39, on the other hand, will not be
found.
Once a filter is used, all properties of the different part types are searched, the
number of parts correspondingly reduced, and the search text is displayed in the filter
field on the left next to the [...] button.
Warning:
Wildcard characters such as * and ? must not be used in the text to be found; they
will be interpreted as "normal" characters.
EPLAN Training 29
Parts Management
Precondition:
You have opened a parts database using [Extras] > Settings in the Parts
management dialog.
1. In the File field of of the Export records dialog, enter the file name for the
export file or click [...] to select the file interactively. The export type is
determined based on the extension of the file type (XML, text, CSV, etc.).
2. Select the desired file type from the File type drop-down list. Depending on
the export format determined here, another dialog is opened in which the
export behavior is given in more detail (e.g., how to handle separator
characters, etc.).
3. In the Part type group box, select the check boxes of the data that you would
like to export.
4. In the Trade group box, select the check boxes of the trades that you would
like to export.
EPLAN Training 30
Parts Management
5. Change the scope of the fluid data to be exported by selecting / deselecting
the check box.
6. Click [OK].
Preconditions:
You have opened a parts database using [Extras] > Settings in the Parts
management dialog.
You have marked the records to be exported in the tree or in the list.
Utilities > Parts > Management > Popup menu > Export
1. In the File field of of the Export records dialog, enter the file name for the
export file or click [...] to select the file interactively. The export type is
determined based on the extension of the file type (XML, text, CSV, etc.).
2. Select the desired file type from the File type drop-down list. Depending on
the export format determined here, another dialog is opened in which the
export behavior is given in more detail (e.g., how to handle separator
characters, etc.).
3. Click [OK].
The selected data is exported and a progress bar shows the process.
Note:
If the current selection contains nodes (in the tree view) then all the records under
EPLAN Training 31
Parts Management
EPLAN Training 32
Parts Management
You have opened a parts database using [Extras] > Settings in the Parts
management dialog.
1. In the File field of of the Import records dialog, enter the file name for the
import file or click [...] to select the file interactively. The import type is
determined based on the extension of the file type (XML, text, CSV, etc.).
2. Select the desired file type from the File type drop-down list. Depending on
the import format determined here, another dialog is opened in which the
import behavior is given in more detail (e.g., how to handle separator
characters, etc.).
3. Use the options to specify the treatment of new or existing records during
import.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 33
Parts Management
In the Parts management dialog, you can create, edit, and organize your master
data. Using [Extras] > Settings, select the database you want to edit.
In the left area of the dialog, the data to be managed is displayed in a tree or list,
where the hierarchical structure of the tree contains the following main groups:
Electrical engineering
Fluid power
Mechanics
Construction
Connection points
Customers
Manufacturers / suppliers.
Warning:
The master person data can only be viewed and edited in the tree structure; the list
shows only the parts data but no manufacturers, suppliers, or customers.
Precondition:
In the tree, you have selected the level of customers or manufacturers / suppliers.
EPLAN Training 34
Parts Management
2. Enter the data for the customer or manufacturer / supplier into the Address
tab on the right side of the dialog, first assigning a descriptive short name.
Note:
The short names of customers and manufacturers / suppliers must be unique. If you
accidentally enter a name which already exists, EPLAN warns you as soon as you
click [Apply] or [Close]. The record can only be saved after you have assigned a
new name.
Precondition:
In the tree, you have selected exactly one customer or manufacturer / supplier.
1. Select the Popup menu > Copy or Popup menu > Cut.
You have copied or cut a customer (manufacturer / supplier) into the buffer.
EPLAN creates the new record in the current level of the hierarchy with the
short name <original_short_name>_1.
2. Edit the copied data in the Address tab on the right side of this dialog, or enter
new data.
Example:
EPLAN Training 36
Parts Management
Precondition:
1. Use the Address tab on the right side of the dialog to enter data for the
selected record or records.
If multiple records are selected, then only that data is shown which is
identical or undetermined (i.e., "empty"); this can be entered or changed
globally for all selected records.
EPLAN Training 37
Parts Management
10 Editing Prices
Precondition:
You have defined the currencies and currency abbreviations in the settings ([Extras]
> Settings > [Currency]).
Example:
Assume you want to order cables. The manufacturer sells the cables in lots of 4 rolls
at 25 m each for 200 US dollars per lot. The minimum order amount is thus 100 m of
cable. The price unit is "25", the quantity unit "m", and the quantity per packaging "4".
So you enter the following values into the fields:
Price unit: 25
Quantity unit: m
Quantity/packaging: 4
Purchase price/unit: 50 USD
Purchase price/package: 200 USD
Precondition:
You have defined the currencies and currency abbreviations in the settings ([Extras]
> Settings > [Currency]).
EPLAN Training 38
Parts Management
1. Select [Extras] > Prices for the selected part or parts.
Note:
You can only select one option at a time for a currency, i.e., you can calculate either
the "Purchase price/unit" or the "Purchase price/package".
Example:
Assume that the purchase price per package is 200 US dollars for the cable, and the
Quantity/packaging is "4". You can now calculate the other purchase price by
selecting the option Purchase price/unit for currency 1 in the Calculate prices
dialog, and clicking [OK]. The purchase price/unit will then be displayed as "50 USD"
EPLAN Training 39
Parts Management
There is no currency conversion via the options for the Currency 2 field in the
Calculate prices dialog, but rather a purchase price calculation. For this to work,
however, you must enter a purchase price in the field for currency 2 in the Prices /
miscellaneous tab.
Precondition:
You have defined the currencies and currency abbreviations in the settings ([Extras]
> Settings > [Currency]).
EPLAN Training 40
Parts Management
2. In the Convert group box of the Convert currencies dialog, specify the
direction in which conversion should be performed.
3. In the Selection group box, specify which prices should be converted. Select
the appropriate check box or check boxes.
Note:
In the Currencies group box of this dialog, the specified exchange rate configured
under [Extras] > Settings > [Currency] is displayed.
EPLAN Training 41
Parts Management
If you want to use foreign-language designations, for instance for deliveries overseas,
you can create and edit the master parts data in different languages. A display
language can then be defined for parts management which is independent of the
display language currently selected in EPLAN, and foreign-language entries for the
following fields can be managed:
Precondition:
You have positioned the mouse cursor in one of the fields listed above for one or
more part(s) and entered the text in the source language.
If there are already translations in the dictionary for the term entered, the
Found words dialog is opened, listing all the texts in the source language
beginning with the letters entered.
2. In the Found words dialog, select the matching translation text by double-
clicking or by clicking [OK].
EPLAN Training 42
Parts Management
3. Edit the translation text in the Multilingual input.
4. Click [OK].
Example:
Enter the text "Tacho" into the "Designation 2" field. Select Popup menu >
Translate. The Found words dialog lists the following entries:
DE: Tacho EN: Tachometer
DE: Tachogenerator EN: Tachometer generator
Double-click the entry you want. The Multilingual input is opened and you can edit
the translation.
Precondition:
You have positioned the mouse cursor in one of the fields listed above for one or
more part(s) and entered the text in the source language.
EPLAN Training 43
Parts Management
1. Select Popup menu > Multilingual input.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 44
Parts Management
Precondition:
You have positioned the cursor in one of the fields listed above for one or more parts.
EPLAN Training 45
Parts Management
In addition to the tree view, which shows the data in a hierarchical structure, the List
tab is available, with which you can display all parts, but not manufacturers,
suppliers, or customers; only those properties are displayed which all parts have (for
instance, part numbers, product group, etc.).
List and tree update each other. This means that if a part is selected in the tree, it is
also selected in the list (and vice versa). If a node (that is, a hierarchical level) is
selected in the tree, then in the list, the first part is selected which is located below
that level.
The field-based, full text, and automatic filters are also used in the list view.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 46
Parts Management
1. In the Column configuration dialog, select the properties which should be
displayed in the list, by selecting the corresponding check box.
EPLAN Training 47
Parts Management
2. Use the buttons on the toolbar to influence the order of the display.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 48
Parts Management
EPLAN Training 49
Rights Management
Rights Management
EPLAN Training 1
Rights Management
EPLAN Training 2
Rights Management
1 Managing Users
The rights management allows you to create users and assign them to particular user
groups. You can also subsequently edit or delete users.
1. To the left of the Rights management dialog, select the User folder, and click
[New].
2. In the User dialog, enter a name and short description of the new user.
Note:
In EPLAN, the user name is always managed in capital letters (as in
Windows). This means that, in EPLAN, the users "Paul Smith" and "PAUL
SMITH" define the same person with the same rights.
EPLAN Training 3
Rights Management
3.
4. You can assign a password in the Password field. To avoid typing errors on
entry, you must enter the password a second time into the Confirm password
field.
5. Click [OK].
The dialog is closed and you are returned to the Rights management
dialog. The user is now created in EPLAN, but still has no editing rights since
they do not yet belong to a group.
6. Assign the user to one or more groups as described in the section "Editing
Users".
EPLAN Training 4
Rights Management
1. To the left of the Rights management dialog, select the User folder.
2. Select a (self-defined) user name in the right-hand field and click [Edit].
3. In the User dialog, change the name, description and password and then click
[OK].
The dialog is closed and the changed data is displayed in the Rights
management dialog.
EPLAN Training 5
Rights Management
Note:
The EPLAN pre-defined users cannot be changed or deleted.
1. To the left of the Rights management dialog, select the User folder.
EPLAN Training 6
Rights Management
2. Select a (self-defined) user name in the right-hand field and click [Delete].
EPLAN Training 7
Rights Management
1. in the Rights management dialog, click the plus sign next to the User folder
to open the folder and select a user name.
The existing user groups are displayed in the right-hand side of the dialog.
2. Select the check box corresponding to the user groups for which you wish the
user to be a member of.
The editing rights of the respective groups are assigned to the user. The
assignments are stored as soon as you leave the dialog by clicking [OK].
EPLAN Training 8
Rights Management
1. To the left of the Rights Management dialog, select the Groups folder, and
click [New].
2. In the Group dialog, enter a name and short description of the allowed editing
rights of the new user group.
EPLAN Training 9
Rights Management
3. Click [OK].
The group is created but editing rights have not yet been assigned.
4. Assign editing rights to the group as described under "Editing user groups".
1. To the left of the Rights management dialog, select the Group folder.
2. Select a (self-defined) user group in the right-hand field and click [Edit].
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 10
Rights Management
The dialog is closed and the changed data is displayed in the Rights
management dialog.
Note:
The EPLAN pre-defined user groups cannot be changed or deleted.
1. To the left of the Rights management dialog, select the Group folder.
2. Select a (self-defined) user group in the right-hand field and click [Delete].
1. in the Rights management dialog, click the plus sign next to the Group folder
to open the folder and select a user group.
EPLAN Training 11
Rights Management
2. Select the check box in front of the user groups in which the current user is to
be a member. Click the plus sign to open the subordinate rights.
If all subordinate rights are deselected, then the check box for the
superordinate entry is displayed in gray.
Tip:
The editing rights are thematically grouped. You can assign the entire editing
rights for a particular thematic area by selecting the check box in front of
the superordinate entry.
3.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 12
Rights Management
EPLAN checks if the user is correctly set up and the password is correct. If
this is the case then you are logged on under your user name.
2. Enter the user name and password into the Logon dialog and click [OK].
EPLAN checks if the user is correctly set up and the password is correct. If
this is the case then you are logged on under the new user name.
EPLAN Training 13
Rights Management
EPLAN Training 14
Revision Control
Revision Control
EPLAN Training 1
Revision Control
4 Comparing Projects......................................................................................8
EPLAN Training 2
Revision Control
Precondition:
1. Select the menu item Utilities > Revision control > Complete project.
If you have not yet completed all of the pages of the project, a message will
be displayed.
2. Click [Yes] in the message window in order to use the comments on the
revision as the description for the page modification. (If you click [No], the
process will be canceled, and you can complete the pages manually).
First, all of the pages are completed. The project is then write-protected
(i.e. it is written as an *.elr project).
2. In the Description of the page modification dialog, you can enter the
revision data (index, description, and reason for change) for the modified
pages.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 3
Revision Control
EPLAN Training 4
Revision Control
2 Generating Revisions
Precondition:
1. In the Generate revision dialog, enter a name for the revision in the Revision
name field.
2. In the Comment field you can enter a short description of the revision, but the
field may also be left blank.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN generates the revision and is then saved with the extension *.ell.
EPLAN Training 5
Revision Control
1. In the Generate comparison project dialog, enter a name for the comparison
project in the Project name field.
2. In the Comment field you can enter a short description of the comparison
project, but the field may also be left blank.
3. Select the check box Generate temporary comparison project if you would
like to generate a non-write-protected project that you can delete again later.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN generates the comparison project with the file extension *.elr.
2. In the Open project dialog in the Files of type field, select the entry "Revision
of EPLAN project (*.elr)".
EPLAN Training 6
Revision Control
3. Select the desired project (if necessary, switch to a different directory) and
click [Open].
EPLAN Training 7
Revision Control
4 Comparing Projects
Differences between two projects are registered by comparing particular properties
with one another. In the Compare projects dialog, you can determine which projects
will be compared. The properties to be compared are determined in the Comparison
settings dialog. If the value of the properties is identical for two projects, then no
difference is registered between them.
Preconditions:
The result of the comparison is written to a MS Access database. To be able to
interpret a comparison run, you therefore need to have the program MS
Access installed on your computer.
The database for the result of the project comparison is determined in the project
settings in the Settings: Revision dialog.
1. Select the desired project in the page navigator and select the menu item
Utilities > Revision control > Compare projects.
2. In the Compare projects dialog, select the check box Show only associated
comparison projects.
Then only the comparison projects of the marked project will be shown in
the list. Otherwise, the list will show all of the projects in the project directory
(except for the one marked).
3. In the list, select Compare with to select the comparison project you would
like to compare with the currently opened project.
4. In the Comparison settings field, select the scheme which determines the
settings for the comparison. (If you have not stored your own schemes, then
only the standard scheme will be offered here. In this case create a new
scheme by Specifying comparison settings.)
EPLAN Training 8
Revision Control
5. In the Text field, enter the text to be used to mark the revision changes in the
properties.
6. Click [OK].
The comparison run is executed and the result of the comparison is written
to the given database.
To make the modifications visible in the project, you must generate revison
markers.
Notes:
Such a comparison run can take a relatively long time for large projects; this also
depends on the number of properties you have selected for comparison. It can
therefore make sense to execute runs overnight or on a dedicated computer.
To evaluate the results of a comparison run, you will need an external database
program, such as MS Access.
EPLAN Training 9
Revision Control
1. In the Compare projects dialog, click [...] beside the Comparison settings
field.
2. From the drop-down list in the Comparison settings dialog, select a user-
defined scheme that you would like to change, or use (New) to create a
new scheme.
3. In the tabs in the lower part of the dialog, you can determine the properties of
the different objects which should be compared. These tabs are all structured
in the same way: In the Do not compare field, all of the properties are initially
selected that can be compared. The properties in the Compare field are those
which have been selected for comparison.
4. In the field Do not compare, select the desired properties, and move them
using the arrow button into the Compare field.
5. To undo the selection, if necessary, use the second arrow button to move the
property selected in the Compare field back into the Do not compare field.
6. Click [OK].
Your settings are saved in the scheme selected, and then you are returned
to the Compare projects dialog.
EPLAN Training 10
Revision Control
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 11
Revision Control
If you have created a revision and are still working in it, changes are
automatically marked ("change tracking").
If you have compared two projects, you must first generate the revision markers
in order to show the changes in the project.
Revision changes in the schematic are shown with graphical markers. Under the
project settings in the Settings: Revision dialog, define the appearance and size of
this graphic.
Changes in properties are shown with marker text entered into the "Revision marker
(change tracking)" or "Revision marker (project comparison)" properties. In addition,
the modified object is shown with a graphical marker.
In a project comparison, you enter this text in the Compare projects dialog.
Preconditions:
You have already executed a comparison run, so that changed information is
present in the database for the comparison result.
The project into which you would like to write the revision markers is open.
1. In the Open dialog, select the database in which the results of the comparison
run are stored. By default, the database Revision.mdb is set in the
..\Projects directory.
2. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 12
Revision Control
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 13
Revision Control
Precondition:
A check mark before the menu item signifies that the item is activated.
2. If necessary, update the display using the menu item View > Redraw.
Precondition:
2. If necessary, update the display using the menu item View > Redraw.
EPLAN Training 14
Revision Control
If you move the mouse pointer over a changed object in a revision, then a tooltip is
displayed containing information about the revision.
To make it easier to find changes in the properties of objects, you can use the Find
function.
1. In the Find function in the Find what field, enter the text that you provided for
the idenfication of revision changes in the Compare revision dialog.
2. In the Search in group box, select the All properties of all components
check box.
3. In the Search location group box, determine whether the entire project or only
the current page should be searched, and then select the Logic pages check
box.
4. Click [OK].
The results of the search are displayed in the Search results dialog.
EPLAN Training 15
Revision Control
Precondition:
1. In the Delete revision markers dialog, select which markers you would like to
delete: Check the corresponding check boxes.
2. Click [OK].
The selected revision markers will be deleted from the current revision.
EPLAN Training 16
Revision Control
Precondition:
Note:
You can reactivate the write protection by completing the project.
EPLAN Training 17
Revision Control
EPLAN Training 18
Dictionaries
Dictionaries
EPLAN Training 1
Dictionaries
1 Opening a Dictionary....................................................................................3
2 Creating a Dictionary....................................................................................5
2.1 Add dictionary language ...........................................................................6
2.2 Delete dictionary language .......................................................................7
EPLAN Training 2
Dictionaries
1 Opening a Dictionary
As standard, EPLAN dictionaries are stored in the ..\Translation directory.
1. Select Utilities > Translation > Edit dictionary > Management tab.
EPLAN Training 3
Dictionaries
3. Select the directory where the dictionary is located.
5. Click [Open].
The dictionary is entered into the Dictionary field. You can now edit it.
EPLAN Training 4
Dictionaries
2 Creating a Dictionary
You can create and manage multiple dictionaries. Select the appropriate dictionary
for each of your projects.
2. To create a new database for the dictionary, enter a file name into the File
name field and select the Microsoft Access databases (*.mdb) file type.
EPLAN Training 5
Dictionaries
3. Click [Save].
EPLAN displays all of the languages that can be accepted into the
dictionary.
EPLAN Training 6
Dictionaries
3. One after the other, select all of the languages that should be available in the
dictionary.
EPLAN Training 7
Dictionaries
2. Select a language in the Dictionary languages field.
3. Click (Delete).
EPLAN Training 8
Dictionaries
3 Creating Keywords
You can add an unlimited number of keywords to the dictionary. Keywords are case-
sensitive. Each keyword has a source language. The keyword always must contain a
translation text in the source language, because this text is used as a reference for all
of the other target languages.
Precondition:
You have created a dictionary or have access to a dictionary.
You have opened a dictionary.
Utilities > Translation > Edit dictionary > Edit words tab
1. Select the source language for the current keyword in the Source language
field.
Example:
If you specify de_DE, German will be the source language for all of the other
target languages.
EPLAN places the insertion mark in the Keyword field in the line for the
source language translation text.
3. First enter the source language translation text in the Keyword field.
4. Then enter the translation texts for the other dictionary languages in the
Keyword field.
EPLAN Training 9
Dictionaries
5. If desired, enter a short description into the Comment field.
6. Click (Save).
EPLAN Training 10
Dictionaries
Precondition:
You have access to a dictionary containing keywords.
You have opened a dictionary.
Utilities > Translation > Edit dictionary > Edit words tab
3. Select the keyword and edit the translation texts in the Keyword field.
4. Click (Save).
EPLAN Training 11
Dictionaries
EPLAN Training 12
Dictionaries
Precondition:
You have access to a dictionary containing keywords.
You have opened a dictionary.
Utilities > Translation > Edit dictionary > Do not translate tab
1. Click (New).
3. Click (Save).
EPLAN Training 13
Dictionaries
Precondition:
You have access to a dictionary containing keywords.
You have opened a dictionary.
Utilities > Translation > Edit dictionary
2. In the Source language field, select the language that is used for the keyword
in the dictionary.
3. In the Find field enter the existing keyword, and select it in the keyword list.
4. Place the mouse pointer in the Keyword field where it is that you would like to
insert the separator suggestion in the translation text.
Example:
Tacho|meter
EPLAN Training 14
Dictionaries
6. Click (Save).
EPLAN Training 15
Dictionaries
EPLAN Training 16
Translation
Translation
EPLAN Training 1
Translation
EPLAN Training 2
Translation
1 Defining a Dictionary
You have to select a dictionary in order to translate a project. This selection is saved
on a user basis.
Precondition:
2. Next to the Dictionary field click [...] and select the desired dictionary in the
Open dictionary dialog.
EPLAN Training 3
Translation
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 4
Translation
2. To select text elements for translation, select the Free texts check box.
3. To exclude text elements from translation, deselect the Free texts check box.
2. To select path function texts for translation, select the Path function texts
check box.
3. To exclude path function texts from translation, deselect the Path function
texts check box.
EPLAN Training 5
Translation
2.3 Properties
Texts whose contents are generated from properties and project data are placed in
project pages. Texts whose contents are generated from descriptive properties can
be translated. These properties are divided into the item, form, plot frame, project,
page, symbol, and symbol library areas.
2. Select the desired file range from the Extent drop-down list.
3. To select a property for the translation, select the check box in front of the
desired property.
4. To exclude a property from the translation, deselect the check box in front of
the desired property.
EPLAN Training 6
Translation
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 7
Translation
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 8
Translation
2. To select one page type for the translation, select the check box in front of the
desired page type.
3. To select multiple page types, hold down the [CTRL] key or the [SHIFT] key,
select all of the desired page types, and then select the check box in front of
one of the selected page types.
2. To exclude one page type for the translation, deselect the check box in front of
the desired page type.
EPLAN Training 9
Translation
3. To exclude multiple page types from the translation, hold down the [CTRL]
key or the [SHIFT] key, select all of the desired page types, and then deselect
the check box in front of one of the selected page types.
EPLAN Training 10
Translation
Precondition:
2. In the Translation group box next to the Languages field click (New).
EPLAN Training 11
Translation
3. From the drop-down list select all of the languages into which the project
should be translated.
2. In the Display group box next to the Languages field click (New).
3. From the drop-down list select all of the languages in which the project pages
should be displayed.
EPLAN Training 12
Translation
Precondition:
You have opened a project.
You have defined the translation settings.
2. Click [Translate].
If EPLAN finds translated texts assigned to the source text, they will be
entered into the list below.
EPLAN Training 13
Translation
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have defined a dictionary.
You have defined the translation and display languages.
1. Select the Project tab, then select the Translate on input check box and click
[OK].
EPLAN Training 14
Translation
2. Select the menu item Page > Navigator.
EPLAN Training 15
Translation
3. Double-click a page.
EPLAN Training 16
Translation
4. Select the menu item Insert > Graphic > Text.
EPLAN Training 17
Translation
5. In the Properties dialog in the Text tab, enter a word that is already in the
selected dictionary as a keyword with translation texts.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 18
Translation
7 Performing a Translation
During translation you can translate across multiple pages.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project that contains translatable texts.
You have defined a dictionary.
You have determined which texts and page types can generally be translated.
You have defined the translation and display languages.
EPLAN Training 19
Translation
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
The project contains translation texts.
1. In the Pages - <Project Name> navigator dialog, select the project from which
the translation texts are to be deleted.
EPLAN Training 20
Translation
2. Select the menu items Utilities > Translation > Remove translation from
project.
In the Select languages dialog, all of the translation languages that you
have selected in the project-related settings as translation languages are
displayed.
3. Press the [CTRL] key and in the Select language dialog select all of the
translation languages whose translation texts should be deleted.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 21
Translation
The translation texts are deleted. The selected languages are no longer
translation languages.
EPLAN Training 22
Translation
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 23
Translation
2. Select the Project tab.
3. To export full sentences select the Translate whole sentences only check
box.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 24
Translation
1. Select the menu item Utilities > Translation > Settings.
EPLAN Training 25
Translation
2. Check whether the desired source language is listed as the translation
language in the Translation group box in the Languages field.
3. If the language is not present, click (New), and select the desired language.
5. If the language is not present, click (New), and select the desired language.
6. Select the desired language in the Display group box in the Languages field.
EPLAN Training 26
Translation
7. Click (up one row) until the language is in the first row.
EPLAN Training 27
Translation
2. Check whether the desired target languages are listed as the translation
languages in the Translation group box in the Languages field.
3. If the languages are not present, click (New), and select the desired
languages.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 28
Translation
5. Select the menu item Page > Navigator.
EPLAN Training 29
Translation
6. To export a missing-word list for the entire project, select the project name in
the Pages - <Project Name> navigator dialog.
7. To export a missing-word list for one or more pages, select one or more pages
in the Pages - <Project Name> navigator dialog.
EPLAN Training 30
Translation
9. Select the menu items Utilities > Translation > Export missing-word list.
10. In the Export missing-word list select and save the location as well as a file
type.
11. In the File name field enter a file name and click [Save].
EPLAN Training 31
Translation
12. Press [Ctrl] and select the desired target languages in the Languages dialog.
EPLAN Training 32
Translation
EPLAN Training 33
Panel Layout
Panel Layout
EPLAN Training 1
Panel Layout
EPLAN Training 2
Panel Layout
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
Project data > Devices / parts > Panel layout > Generate mounting panel
1. In the Part selection dialog, in the generic product group Mechanics, open
the hierarchy level Housing.
EPLAN Training 3
Panel Layout
3. Click [OK].
The mounting panel symbol is scaled to the entered size (only values larger
than 0.0 are accepted!) and hangs on the cursor.
5. Enter a device tag in the Displayed DT field on the Mounting panel tab.
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 4
Panel Layout
The mounting panel is created.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
1. Select Insert > Box / connection point / mounting panel > Mounting panel.
The box symbol representing the mounting panel hangs on the cursor.
EPLAN Training 5
Panel Layout
2. Place the rectangle representing the mounting panel.
3. Enter a device tag in the Displayed DT field on the Mounting panel tab.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 6
Panel Layout
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
In the Settings: Panel layout dialog, (Popup menu > Settings) you have not
selected the Manual input option.
1. Select the items in the tree view that have not yet been placed. (Multiple
selection is possible.)
EPLAN Training 7
Panel Layout
2. Select Popup menu > Place on mounting panel.
3. Position the part placement on the mounting panel with a mouse click.
4. Proceed in this way for all additional part placements selected in the tree.
The newly placed parts are removed from the "Not placed" hierarchy level and
moved to the hierarchy level of the populated mounting panel.
EPLAN Training 8
Panel Layout
Notes:
Even if you do not move the cursor during placement, the symbols will be placed
from left to right. If a symbol extends over the edge of the mounting panel, an
error message will inform you of this.
If you have selected the Manual input option in the Panel layout dialog (Popup
menu > Settings) you must first specify the dimensions of the device in the
Extension and distance dialog prior to placing the device.
EPLAN Training 9
Panel Layout
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
In the Settings: Panel layout dialog, (Popup menu > Settings) you have not
selected the Manual input option.
2. Click [OK].
The part symbol is scaled to the entered size (only values larger than 0.0
are accepted!) and hangs on the cursor.
EPLAN Training 10
Panel Layout
3. Place the part on the mounting panel.
6. Click [OK].
7. Proceed in a similar manner for all the parts that you would like to place.
When the part is placed, a check is performed that the current page is of type "Panel
layout" and that the part placement is within a mounting panel. If these conditions are
not met, the part is not placed and an appropriate message is displayed.
EPLAN Training 11
Panel Layout
When generating part placements, the function definition is derived from the part
master data (Technical data tab in the Parts management dialog) in the following
manner:
Product
Product group Function definition
subgroup
Terminals Mounting rail Part placement terminal strip
Terminals (no preference) Part placement terminal
Part placement plug male pin /
Plugs (no preference)
female pin
PLC (no preference) Part placement PLC card
(all product groups except terminals
(no preference) Part placement normal item
/ plugs / PLC)
Note:
If you have selected the Manual input option in the Panel layout dialog (Popup
menu > Settings) you must first specify the dimensions of the device in the
Extension and distance dialog prior to placing the device.
EPLAN Training 12
Panel Layout
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
In the Settings: Panel layout dialog, (Popup menu > Settings) you have
selected the Manual input option.
1. Select the items in the tree view that have not yet been placed. (Multiple
selection is possible.)
EPLAN Training 13
Panel Layout
4. Define the dimensions of the part placement using the Extension and
distance dialog.
5. Click [OK].
6. Move the cursor along the object to move the part placement.
8. Proceed in this way for all additional part placements selected in the tree.
The newly placed parts are removed from the "Unplaced" hierarchy level and moved
to the hierarchy level of the populated DIN rail. If part placements already exist on the
DIN rail, then new placements can only occur in free areas.
Note:
Even if you do not move the cursor during placement, the symbols will be placed
from left to right. If a symbol extends over the edge of the mounting panel, an error
message will inform you of this.
EPLAN Training 14
Panel Layout
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
1. In the graphical editor, select the panel layout page where you would like to
draw a locked area.
Note:
As soon as part placement is attempted in a locked area, the placement is prevented,
and an appropriate message is displayed.
EPLAN Training 15
Panel Layout
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 16
Panel Layout
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have inserted a part placement or have double-clicked a part placement (or
selected Popup menu > Properties; in this way, multiple part placements can
be selected).
3. Click [OK].
4. Click [...] in the Part field to allocate a part to the part placement.
EPLAN Training 17
Panel Layout
6. Click [OK].
7. Edit the part placement properties by entering a string of characters into the
Value field, selecting a value from a drop-down list, etc.
9. In the Property selection dialog, select further properities that you would like
to set. (Multiple selection is possible.)
The properties are appended to the end of the list in the Property name
column.
12. Select the properties that you no longer require. (Multiple selection is
possible.)
The properties are deleted from the list, i.e., without the values that you
previously allocated in the Property selection dialog, so that they may be re-
allocated, if needed.
EPLAN Training 18
Panel Layout
14. Change to the Display tab.
15. From the Property arrangement drop-down list, select the User defined
entry to define your own display layout.
16. In the list of properties, select the property for which you would like to define
the display settings.
The default values for the individual fields are taken from the Standard
defaults.
19. Define the formatting settings for the part placement by selecting entries from
the drop-down list, selecting / deselecting check boxes, etc.
Note:
Every device can contain several part references with different quantity values.
However, a part reference can only be placed with a quantity of "1". This means that
several part placements with the same device tags may be placed on a mounting
area.
EPLAN Training 19
Panel Layout
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 20
Panel Layout
Example:
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have selected Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" >
Management > Message management and in the Settings: Message
management dialog, in the Check-related settings field you have clicked
[...].
3. Define the individual errors and messages in the table on the right-hand side
of the Category and Type of check dialogs by selecting an entry from the
drop-down list for each one.
EPLAN Training 21
Panel Layout
4. Click [OK].
Once you have performed this, when making part placements on the mounting panel,
these are then checked according to the settings; if disagreement is found, then a
suitable message is displayed.
EPLAN Training 22
Panel Layout
8 Generating Legends
Legends gather and display information, or store information from the graphic in a
free area.
If the legends are created on the same page where the mounting panel is located,
then we speak of a Window legend; Window legends are freely positionable
graphical objects, and have an insertion point and symbol properties, and / or a
device tag.
The legend can also be output as a separate form. In this case no legend is shown in
the graphical editor on the panel layout page. However, items will display item
numbers but no device tags. We call this type of legend a Page legend.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 23
Panel Layout
2. If in the Reports - <Project name> dialog, the enclosure legend is not yet
contained in the Pages hierarchy level, select [Settings] > Output to pages.
3. In the Settings: Output to pages dialog, select a form for the Panel layout
report type, and if necessary, specify any additional settings.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 24
Panel Layout
5. In the Reports - <Project name> dialog, click [New].
6. In the Select report dialog, define the Output format and Output project.
EPLAN Training 25
Panel Layout
8. Select the Manual selection check box if you would like to select the
mounting panels for which a legend is to be generated.
9. Click [OK].
10. In the Manual selection dialog, select the mounting panels for which a legend
is to be generated.
12. In the Enclosure legend <...> dialog, define the structure identifier and
designation of the pages on which the legends are to be generated.
EPLAN Training 26
Panel Layout
Preconditions:
You have opened a project that contains mounting panels.
EPLAN Training 27
Panel Layout
2. If in the Reports - <Project name> dialog, the enclosure legend is not yet
contained in the Embedded reports hierarchy level, select [Settings] >
Output to pages.
3. In the Settings: Output to pages dialog, select a form for the Panel layout
report type, and if necessary, specify any additional settings.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 28
Panel Layout
5. Click [New].
6. In the Select report dialog, in the Output format list, select the Manual
placement entry.
8. Click [OK].
The program checks which items are on the page and creates a provisional bill of
materials with all of the part data for the items positioned on the mounting panel.
EPLAN Training 29
Panel Layout
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
1. In the Mounting panel tab of the Properties <...> dialog, click (New) on
the toolbar above the property list.
EPLAN Training 30
Panel Layout
2. In the Property selection dialog, select the Suppress generation of legend
property.
3. Click [OK].
The property is appended to the end of the list in the Property name
column.
4. Select the check box in the Value column of the Suppress generation of
legend property.
EPLAN Training 31
Panel Layout
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 32
Panel Layout
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
In the tree view you have selected the mounting panel whose legend items are
to be updated. (Multiple selection is not possible here).
Project data > Devices / parts > Panel layout navigator > Popup menu > Edit
legend item
EPLAN Training 33
Panel Layout
1. In the Edit legend item dialog, use the buttons to move the
legends up / down, or to the beginning / end of the list.
EPLAN Training 34
Panel Layout
2. Click [Number].
4. Click [OK].
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 35
Panel Layout
The legend items are updated. The updated entries can be displayed in the List of
project data (Popup menu > Configure columns in the list and selection of the
Legend item check box).
EPLAN Training 36
Panel Layout
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
1. In the Panel layout - <Project name> dialog, select the part placements that
are to be updated.
EPLAN Training 37
Panel Layout
2. Select Popup menu > Update main elements.
EPLAN Training 38
Panel Layout
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
1. In the graphical editor, open the panel layout page for which the update is to
be performed.
EPLAN Training 39
Panel Layout
2. Select Popup menu > Update part dimensions.
The current part dimensions are added to the part placements. In the process, the
current dimensions of the part are internally checked for every part and for every
differing value, a message is displayed allowing you to accept or discard the update.
EPLAN Training 40
Panel Layout
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
1. Select the item to whose graphical representation in the graphical editor you
would like to spring to, in the tree or the list in the Panel layout - <Project
name>.
EPLAN Training 41
Panel Layout
2. Select Popup menu > Go to (graphic).
The graphical editor forks to the page where the main function is located. The main
funtion is optically highlighted in the process.
EPLAN Training 42
Panel Layout
EPLAN Training 43
Change of Standard
Change of Standard
EPLAN Training 1
Change of Standard
EPLAN Training 2
Change of Standard
1. Specify a recognizable project name without file name extension in the Target
Project Name field of the Project tab.
2. Click [...] next to the Storage location field to select a location for the project.
EPLAN Training 3
Change of Standard
3. In the Find folder dialog select the directory where you want to save the new
project and click [OK].
4. Click [Next].
EPLAN Training 4
Change of Standard
1. To specify a template for the target project, use [...] on the Rotation /
Mirroring tab to select a project template *.ept .
2. From the Rotation / Mirroring drop-down list, select the way in which you
want to rotate and mirror.
EPLAN Training 5
Change of Standard
3. Click [Next].
EPLAN Training 6
Change of Standard
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
If multiple projects are open: You have selected a project in the page
navigator.
You have set up a target project.
Utilities > Change of standard > Project tab > [Next]
3. In the New scheme dialog enter a recognizable name and a descriptive text
for the scheme in the Description field and click [OK].
In the Settings: Rotation / mirroring dialog the new scheme is now
available as a user-defined scheme in the Scheme drop-down list.
EPLAN Training 7
Change of Standard
4. From the Rotate drop-down list select the number of degrees the schematic
elements should rotate in their configuration in the schematic.
5. To mirror the configuration of the schematic elements on the page, select the
Mirror check box.
EPLAN Training 8
Change of Standard
To adjust a project to a different standard you can replace existing plot frames and
forms with different ones.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
If multiple projects are open: You have selected a project in the page
navigator.
You have set up a target project.
You have specified template and rotation / mirroring schemes.
Utilities > Change of standard > Project tab > [Next] > Rotation / mirroring tab >
[Next]
1. In the Master data tab in the Name column, select a form, a plot frame, or a
function definition library to be replaced.
EPLAN Training 9
Change of Standard
2. Within the same row, click [...] in the New name column.
3. In the following dialog select the form, the plot frame, or the function definition
library to be used for the target project and click [Open].
EPLAN Training 10
Change of Standard
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
If multiple projects are open: You have selected a project in the page
navigator.
You have set up a target project.
You have specified template and rotation / mirroring schemes.
Utilities > Change of standard > Project tab > [Next] > Rotation / mirroring tab >
[Next]
EPLAN Training 11
Change of Standard
2. Within the same row, click [...] in the New name column.
3. In the Select Symbol Library dialog, select the symbol library to be used for
the target project and click [Open].
4. To assign the entire symbol library click [Next] in the Master data tab and do
the same in the Symbols tab.
EPLAN Training 12
Change of Standard
5. To assign the source symbol library symbols to the target symbol library
symbols, select the Individual assignment check box in the Master data tab
and click [Next].
The source and target symbol libraries are entered in the Symbols tab.
EPLAN Training 13
Change of Standard
7. Click [Next].
EPLAN Training 14
Change of Standard
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
If multiple projects are open: You have selected a project in the page
navigator.
You have set up a target project.
You have replaced the necessary forms and plot frames.
You have selected a target symbol library in the Master data tab and selected
the Individual assignment check box.
Utilities > Change of standard > Project tab > [Next] > Rotation / mirroring tab >
[Next] > Master data tab > [Next]
EPLAN Training 15
Change of Standard
2. In the dialog Settings: Symbol assignment dialog, in the Scheme field,
select the scheme you want to edit or click and create a scheme.
EPLAN Training 16
Change of Standard
2. In the Select Source Symbol Library dialog select the symbol library you
want to create for the assignment and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 17
Change of Standard
3. In the Select Target Symbol Library dialog select the symbol library you
want to create for the assignment and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 18
Change of Standard
The symbols from the selected target symbol library are entered in the
Assign symbols table and assigned to source symbols.
EPLAN Training 19
Change of Standard
5. Click [Next].
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 20
Change of Standard
3. Select a symbol and click [OK].
4. Click in the Target Symbol Name column in the Settings: Assign Symbols
tab.
EPLAN Training 21
Change of Standard
8. Click [Next].
EPLAN Training 22
Change of Standard
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
If multiple projects are open: You have selected a project in the page
navigator.
You have set up a target project.
You have specified template and rotation / mirroring schemes.
You have replaced the necessary plot frame, forms, symbol libraries, and
symbols.
Utilities > Change of standard > Project tab > [Next] > Rotation / mirroring tab >
[Next] > Master data tab > [Next]
1. To change the page structure, select an identifier scheme for the page
structure from the Pages drop-down list in the Structure tab.
EPLAN Training 23
Change of Standard
2. To change separators click [...] next to Separator and specify the desired
separator in the Extended Project Structures dialog.
EPLAN Training 24
Change of Standard
3. To change the identifier schema for devices, select an identifier scheme in the
corresponding drop-down list.
4. Click [Next].
EPLAN Training 25
Change of Standard
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
If multiple projects are open: You have selected a project in the page
navigator.
You have set up a target project.
You have specified template and rotation / mirroring schemes.
You have replaced the necessary plot frame, forms, symbol libraries, and
symbols.
You have specified the project structure.
Utilities > Change of standard > Project tab > [Next] > Rotation / mirroring tab >
[Next] > Master data tab > [Next] > Structure tab > [Next]
EPLAN Training 26
Change of Standard
2. Select a numbering format from the Device Numbering drop-down list.
EPLAN Training 27
Change of Standard
EPLAN Training 28
Symbol Editor
Symbol Editor
EPLAN Training 1
Symbol Editor
11 Editing Symbols..........................................................................................28
11.1 Insert symbols in the graphical editor......................................................28
11.2 Edit symbols in the symbol editor............................................................29
13 Copying Symbols........................................................................................36
14 Deleting Symbols........................................................................................38
16 Checking Symbols......................................................................................41
EPLAN Training 2
Symbol Editor
2. In the Sequence group box specify whether the connection points should be
numbered according to the "from top to bottom and left to right " method or the
"from left to right and top to bottom" method.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 3
Symbol Editor
4. Select Insert > Connection point " Direction".
EPLAN Training 4
Symbol Editor
6. In the Connection point number field in the Connecting point dialog specify
the connection point number (or use the "Next free number" default).
7. Select the desired Connection point direction from the drop-down list.
8. From the drop-down list on the left select one or more of the property sets
(Connection point designation and Connection point description).
9. Specify the settings for the corresponding texts in the field on the right of the
dialog.
EPLAN Training 5
Symbol Editor
12. Select Popup menu > Cancel action to terminate the action.
Warning:
Multiple symbol connection points can't be located on top of another.
Connection point data will be applied according to your settings for the symbol. The
graphic for the connection point will indicate the connection point direction explicitly,
but later on it is not an integral element of the symbol.
If you have already drawn connection points, and then have inserted the basic
symbol graphic via Insert > Basic symbol, the connection points inserted via the
basic symbol will be renumbered according to the existing connection points (i.e.
counted upwards).
Notes:
The menu items View > Properties as numbers displays the property text
(device tags, function text etc.) to be switched in order to make the display
clearer.
EPLAN Training 6
Symbol Editor
Precondition:
1. If you have more than one symbol library open, go to the Symbol library
selection dialog to select the symbol library whose properties you would like
to edit.
2. Click [OK].
3. In the Symbol library properties - <Library name> dialog use the drop-down
list to select the library you would like to use as the basic symbol library.
EPLAN Training 7
Symbol Editor
4. In the Category drop-down list select the category (data, revision, etc.) whose
properties should be displayed in the lower section of the table.
5. Assign values to the desired properties by entering text in the Value cell or
selecting a value from the drop-down list, etc. Please note read-only properties
cannot be edited.
6. Use the (New) and (Delete) buttons to add additional properties to the
list or delete unnecessary ones. Deletions are also limited to certain
properties.
7. Use the Popup menu to translate texts, configure the display sequence, etc.
8. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 8
Symbol Editor
Precondition:
You have opened a project and are editing a symbol in which all of the variants do
not exist yet.
1. In the Create variant dialog select the target variant that you would like to
generate from the list of variants that are not available yet.
EPLAN Training 9
Symbol Editor
2. In the subsequent Create variant dialog select the variant that is to be used
as the Source variant. In this dialog only the already available variants will be
listed as possible target variants.
3. In the Rotate by field select how many degrees the source variant should be
rotated in order to generate the new variant.
4. Select the Mirror graphic across Y-axis check box if the graphic for the
symbol should be mirrored across the Y-axis (through the point of origin).
5. Select the Rotate connection point designation check box if the text for the
connection point designation should be rotated.
6. Select the Rotate placed properties check box if placed properties should be
rotated.
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 10
Symbol Editor
The variant is generated and displayed on a new page <Symbol
Library>;<Symbol Name>:<Symbol Number>;<Variant Designation>
(e.g. new.test:1;A for variant A for the test symbol with the internal symbol
number 1 in symbol library new.slk). On the Symbol editor toolbar the button
for the new variant will be switched on so that it is easy to move back and forth
between the variants of a given symbol.
Note:
If all variants have been generated, the New variant function is inactive.
Precondition:
You are editing a symbol for which at least one variant exists, in which you have
activated the graphical view of the variant to be deleted.
1. Select the menu items Utilities > Master data > Symbol > Delete variant.
Precondition:
You are editing a symbol for which at least one variant exists.
EPLAN Training 11
Symbol Editor
1. Open the Symbol editor toolbar if it is not already displayed (Popup menu >
Symbol editor in the EPLAN main menu or on any toolbar).
2. Click the variant button for the graphical view you would like to display.
3. If necessary, answer the prompt if changes were made on the current page
that have not yet been saved.
EPLAN Training 12
Symbol Editor
1. In the Create symbol library dialog select a drive and a directory where you
would like to save the new symbol library from the Save in drop-down list.
2. Overwrite the preset file name <New symbol library.slk> with a name of
your choice.
3. If you have changed the drive and directory, but you would like to return to the
EPLAN-specific setting or the setting under Options > Settings > User >
Management > Directories, click the menu items Popup menu > Go to
default in the Path field.
4. Click [Save].
5. If a symbol library with that name already exists in the selected drive and
directory, reply to the prompt regarding overwriting the file.
6. In the Symbol library properties- <Library name> dialog select the basic
symbol library and assign values to the desired properties.
7. Click [OK].
The new symbol library is created, added to the list of open symbol libraries
and can now be edited. The EPLAN then extracts the company code,
EPLAN Training 13
Symbol Editor
workstation number, and the short name of the employee from the system and
user settings and stores this data in the symbol library.
Note:
A project configuration (Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" >
Management > Symbol libraries) can be used to assign an arbitrary number of
symbol libraries to a project. The symbol libraries selected are then stored in the
project.
EPLAN Training 14
Symbol Editor
1. In the Open symbol library dialog select the desired symbol library from the
list. Multiple selection is possible.
Once a symbol library is selected in the list on the left, information including
comments, date of creation, creator, company, and the number of symbols is
displayed on the right.
2. Click on [Open].
EPLAN Training 15
Symbol Editor
3. In the subsequent Symbol selection dialog select the symbols you would like
to open.
4. Click [OK].
Note:
A project configuration (Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" >
Management > Symbol libraries) can be used to assign an arbitrary number of
symbol libraries to a project. The symbol libraries selected are then stored in the
project.
EPLAN Training 16
Symbol Editor
Proceed as follows to generate a symbol overview, i.e. the index of symbols for a
symbol library:
Preconditions:
You have opened a project and haven't opened the symbol editor.
You have selected a form via Options > Settings > Projects > "Project Name"
> Reports > Graphical output > Symbol overview and specified the settings
for the pages you would like to create.
1. If the symbol overview is not listed under the reports, click [New].
2. In the Select report dialog select the Symbol overview report type.
3. If necessary, change the settings for Output project, Created by, and
Created on.
4. Select the Manual selection check box if all of the symbol overviews should
not be automatically documented.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 17
Symbol Editor
6. If you have selected Manual selection then you have to specify in the Manual
selection which symbol libraries should be taken into consideration: Use the
arrow buttons to make a selection from the available libraries.
7. Click [OK].
8. In the Symbol overview dialog specify the settings for the pages to be
generated.
9. Click [OK].
The symbol overview is generated but this process depends on the size of
the selected symbol libraries and may take some time.
The generated report pages are inserted into the specified target project.
The list of reports is extended with the level Symbol overview and, under
this, with the list of documented symbol libraries.
EPLAN Training 18
Symbol Editor
Precondition:
1. In the Import symbol library dialog select the desired symbol library (*.esl)
from the list. Multiple selection is not possible.
Once a symbol library is selected in the list to the left of the dialog,
information including comments, date of creation, creator, company, and the
number of symbols is displayed on the right-hand side.
2. Click on [Open].
3. In the Create symbol library dialog select a drive and a directory where you
would like to save the imported symbol library from the Save in drop-down list.
5. Click [Save].
The symbol library is imported and can now be edited in the current project.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 19
Symbol Editor
You have opened a project.
1. In the Export symbol library dialog select the symbol library (*.esl) to be
exported from the list. Multiple selection is not possible.
Once a symbol library is selected in the list to the left of the dialog,
information including comments, date of creation, creator, company, and the
number of symbols is displayed on the right-hand side.
2. Click on [Open].
3. In the Create export file dialog select a drive and a directory where you would
like to save the exported symbol library from the Save in drop-down list.
5. Click [Save].
The export file is generated with the name provided in the designated drive
and the directory.
Tip:
You can import symbol libraries using Drag & Drop by dragging the selected symbol
library from Windows Explorer and dropping it into the Pages - <Project name>
Navigator dialog of your project.
EPLAN Training 20
Symbol Editor
1. In the Copy symbol library dialog select the file to be copied. Multiple
selection is not possible here.
2. Click on [Open].
3. In the Create symbol library dialog select a drive and a directory where you
would like to save the copied symbol library from the Save to drop-down list.
4. If necessary, overwrite the preset file name of the original with a name you can
recognize.
5. Click [Save].
6. In the Symbol library properties - <Library name> dialog, select the basic
symbol library and assign (new) values to the desired properties of the copied
symbol library.
EPLAN Training 21
Symbol Editor
7. Click [OK].
The copy of the new symbol library is generated, added to the list of open
symbol libraries, and can now be edited.
EPLAN Training 22
Symbol Editor
1. If multiple symbol libraries are open, select the one(s) you would like to close
in the Symbol library selection dialog and click [OK].
If only one symbol library is open, this one will be closed without any further
prompting.
If changes have been made to a symbol and would be lost if the library is
closed, you are prompted whether to save the page or not.
Note:
If the Close / Save action is canceled for a symbol, the symbol library will also not be
closed.
EPLAN Training 23
Symbol Editor
10 Creating Symbols
Precondition:
1. If multiple symbol libraries are open, select the symbol library in which you
would like to create the new symbol in the Symbol library selection dialog.
2. Click [OK].
3. In the Create variant dialog select which symbol variant you would like to
create.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 24
Symbol Editor
5. In the Symbol properties - <Library name> dialog, specify the data for the
symbol to be generated. The next available number will be assigned as the
Symbol number.
6. In the Function definition field click [...] in order to specify the symbol logic in
the Function definitions dialog.
EPLAN Training 25
Symbol Editor
7. Select the Basic symbol preview check box to display the appropriate basic
symbol for the function definition in the preview area.
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [OK].
10. Click [Basic symbol] (toolbar Symbol editor) or select Insert > Basic
symbol.
11. Now place the symbol in order to insert its graphic and use it as a basis for
further editing.
12. Select Popup menu > Cancel action to terminate the action.
EPLAN Training 26
Symbol Editor
The symbol is created and opened in a separate graphical editor so it can
be edited directly. Please note that the insertion point can only be moved, and
can't be deleted.
Notes:
The symbol number "0" is offered as the starting value in an empty symbol.
Negative values and values that exceed the maximum number of 32,000 are not
allowed as symbol numbers.
EPLAN Training 27
Symbol Editor
11 Editing Symbols
Preconditions:
You have opened a project and at least one symbol library.
1. In the Symbol selection dialog, select the symbol(s) you would like to insert.
The preview on the right of the dialog shows the graphic for the selected
symbol as well as all available variants.
2. For faster selection, click [...] in the Filter field if necessary, and then select
the filter criteria or create new ones.
3. Or, enter a character string in the Direct entry field in the list view.
The cursor jumps to the first symbol matching your entry as soon as you
enter a single character, and selects it.
4. In the Tree view select Popup menu > Function-oriented if the hierarchical
display of the symbols should not be performed according to the symbol
library, but according to their functional Category (such as "Coils and
contacts", "Signal devices", etc.).
5. In the list view select Popup menu > Configure columns if you would like to
change the display and / or the order of the symbol properties in the list.
EPLAN Training 28
Symbol Editor
6. Click [OK].
9. Click [OK].
11. Select Popup menu > Cancel action to terminate the action.
Precondition:
1. In the Symbol selection dialog select the symbol(s) you would like to edit.
The preview on the right side of the dialog shows the symbols marked; if you
have selected a node in the tree view, for instance, then all of the elements
under it are shown graphically. (For space reasons, the display of the available
variants is omitted in this case.)
EPLAN Training 29
Symbol Editor
2. For faster selection, click [...] in the Filter field if necessary, and then select
the filter criteria or create new ones.
3. Or, enter a character string in the Direct entry field in the list view.
The cursor jumps to the first symbol matching your entry as soon as you
enter a single character, and selects it.
4. In the Tree view select Popup menu > Function-oriented if the hierarchical
display of the symbols should not be performed according to the symbol
library, but according to their functional Category (such as "Coils and
contacts", "Signal devices", etc.).
5. In the list view select Popup menu > Configure columns if you would like to
change the display and / or the order of the symbol properties in the list.
6. Click [OK].
7. Edit the symbol graphic, i.e. by adding connection points and other graphic-
and function-relevant information.
The defaults for line properties (type, thickness, color, etc.) as well as the
display-specific properties from the connection point designation and the
connection point description are extracted from the corresponding layers
(Options > Layer management > Symbol graphic or Options > Layer
management > Property placement).
Notes:
EPLAN Training 30
Symbol Editor
The grid used is saved in the symbol library properties and applies to all symbols
in this library.
The insertion point for a symbol can be moved but not deleted because it marks
the location where the symbol hangs on the cursor when being placed. The
insertion point is also decisive for the symbol position and therefore also for
the cross-reference.
EPLAN Training 31
Symbol Editor
Precondition:
1. If multiple symbol libraries are open, select the symbol library to which you
would like to import the new symbol in the Symbol library selection dialog.
2. Click [OK].
3. In the Import symbol dialog select the desired symbol (*.esl) from the list.
Multiple selection is not possible.
Once a symbol is selected in the list on the left of the dialog, information
including description, date of creation, creator, company, and the number of
variants is displayed on the right.
4. Click on [Open].
EPLAN Training 32
Symbol Editor
5. In the Symbol properties - <Library name> dialog you specify data about the
symbol that is to be imported and the following defaults will be shown:
Symbol number: next available number
symbol name: "<name of the original>" if this is not already available in the
current symbol library,otherwise "<name of the original> (copy)"
function definition: function definition of the original.
6. Click [OK].
The symbol is imported and can now be edited in the current project.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 33
Symbol Editor
1. In the Symbol selection dialog select the symbol to be exported. Multiple
selection is not possible.
2. Click [OK].
3. In the Export symbol library dialog select a drive and a directory where you
would like to save the new symbol from the Save in drop-down list.
EPLAN Training 34
Symbol Editor
4. Overwrite the file name if you would like to.
5. Click [Save].
The export file is generated with the name provided in the designated drive
and the directory.
Note:
During the export all existing variants of the symbol are also taken into consideration.
EPLAN Training 35
Symbol Editor
13 Copying Symbols
When copying symbols an exact copy of the original symbol is created and it is
possible to transfer symbols from one symbol library to another.
Precondition:
1. In the Symbol selection dialog, select the symbol(s) you would like to copy.
Multiple selection is possible here.
2. Click [OK].
3. In the Copy symbols dialog under Target select the symbol library to which
you would like to copy the symbols: Open the drop-down list in the Symbol
library field.
4. In the Number field overwrite the default or open the drop-down list of
unallocated numbers.
5. In the Name field enter the symbol name by overwriting the default
(<Original name (copy)> for copies in symbol libraries where this name
already exists or <Original name> if no symbol exists with this name).
EPLAN Training 36
Symbol Editor
7. If necessary, select Popup menu > Multi-line input to open the Multi-line
editing dialog and enter the desired text using [Ctrl]+[Enter] to create line
breaks.
8. Or select Popup menu > Line break to insert a line break in the field at the
current cursor position.
9. Select the check box in the With variants field if the symbol should be copied
together with its existing variants . If the check box is deselected, then only the
first existing variant will be copied.
EPLAN Training 37
Symbol Editor
14 Deleting Symbols
Precondition:
2. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 38
Symbol Editor
15 Scaling Symbols
Precondition:
1. In the Symbol selection dialog select the symbol(s) you would like to edit.
The preview on the right side of the dialog shows the symbols marked; if you
have selected a node in the tree view, for instance, then all of the elements
under it are shown graphically. (For space reasons, the display of the available
variants is omitted in this case.)
2. Click [OK].
3. Select the menu items Edit > Scale in the symbol editor.
4. Click once with the left mouse button in the editing window to specify the
starting point for the frame around the elements to be scaled.
5. Move the mouse pointer in the direction you would like to stretch the frame
around the elements to be scaled.
6. Click a second time with the mouse to snap the end point of the rectangle.
EPLAN Training 39
Symbol Editor
7. Click in the symbol editor.
8. Enter the desired value into the Scaling factor field of the Scale dialog.
9. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 40
Symbol Editor
16 Checking Symbols
The following problems can occur when editing symbols:
You can also start the check function manually in order to verify the quality of a
certain symbol. Proceed as follows:
Preconditions:
You have opened a project and at least one symbol library.
1. Confirm the prompt regarding the quality of the symbol: Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 41
Symbol Editor
EPLAN Training 42
Master Data
Master Data
EPLAN Training 1
Master Data
EPLAN Training 2
Master Data
Actual storage and management depends on the type of master data in question, in
which the program distinguishes between the management of:
Parts data
Forms
Plot frames
Macros
Symbol libraries.
If the specified form / plot frame is not in the master data pool, it can be found using
the Complete project function and can even be automatically stored. If missing
master data can't be found in the master data pool, a message is displayed.
EPLAN Training 3
Master Data
The paths to the required databases and files are defined in the defaults for
directories when selecting or editing master data. This information is used by certain
program elements and functions when particular data is required. The settings are
user dependent in order for you to manage and organize your own pool of master
data.
EPLAN Training 4
Master Data
2. In the Browse for Folder dialog select the desired drive and directory.
3. Click [OK].
4. Proceed this way for all further master data types with default directories that
you would like to change. (The default after installing EPLAN is
<Drive_EPLAN>:\<Programs folder>\<Master data type>\<Company
code>.)
5. Click [OK].
The settings are accepted and taken into consideration when calling up the
corresponding data (e.g. when opening or exporting), or they can be reset to
EPLAN Training 5
Master Data
the default directory specified here by selecting Popup menu > Go to default
in the Path field of the appropriate dialog.
EPLAN Training 6
Master Data
Project data can be synchronized later in both directions with the system master
data. Furthermore, certain stored parts properties can be removed from the project.
2. Select Utilities > Parts > Current project --> parts database.
Project parts are synchronized with the master data parts, i.e. they are
accepted into the parts database and overwrite the datasets stored there.
EPLAN Training 7
Master Data
2. Select Utilities > Parts > Parts database --> current project.
Master data parts are synchronized with the project-related data, i.e. the
parts database data is accepted into the project and overwrites the data in the
project.
EPLAN Training 8
Master Data
2. Select Utilities > Parts > Delete stored properties.
EPLAN Training 9
Master Data
3. In the Delete stored parts properties dialog, select the Delete check box for
each part property that you would like to delete from the part stored in the
project.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 10
Master Data
If the selected form is not in the master data pool it can be found via the menu item
Utilities > Master data > Complete current project and, if necessary, automatically
corrected. If missing master data cannot be found in the master data pool, then an
appropriate message is displayed.
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 11
Master Data
2. Select the form to be edited in the Open forms dialog.
3. Click on [Open].
5. In the page navigator, select the page to which you would like to assign the
form.
EPLAN Training 12
Master Data
6. Select Popup menu > Properties.
EPLAN Training 13
Master Data
7. If the Form name property is not yet in the list of properties, click (New)
next to the Category field in the Properties group box of the Page properties
dialog.
EPLAN Training 14
Master Data
8. In the Property selection dialog select the Form name property.
9. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 15
Master Data
10. Open the drop-down list in the Value field for the Form name property.
14. If required, you can change the values of the other properties of the page.
EPLAN Training 16
Master Data
The form is stored in the project and can be assigned to a page at any time
without having to open it again.
EPLAN Training 17
Master Data
If the selected form is not in the master data pool, it can be found via the menu item
Utilities > Master data > Complete current project and, if necessary, automatically
corrected. If missing master data cannot be found in the master data pool, then an
appropriate message is displayed.
Precondition
1. Select Utilities > Master data > Plot frame > Open.
EPLAN Training 18
Master Data
2. Select the plot frame to be edited in the Plot frame selection dialog.
3. Click on [Open].
5. In the page navigator, select the page to which you would like to assign the
plot frame.
EPLAN Training 19
Master Data
6. Select Popup menu> Properties.
EPLAN Training 20
Master Data
7. If the Plot frame name property is not yet in the list of properties, click
(New) next to the Category field in the Properties group box of the Page
properties dialog.
EPLAN Training 21
Master Data
8. In the Property selection dialog select the Plot frame name property.
9. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 22
Master Data
10. Open the drop-down list in the Value field for the Plot frame name property.
12. Select the changed plot frame in the Select plot frame dialog.
EPLAN Training 23
Master Data
13. Click [Open].
14. If required, you can change the values of the other properties of the page.
The plot frame is stored in the project and can be assigned to a page at
any time without having to open it again.
EPLAN Training 24
Master Data
The name of the symbol library from which the macro was generated (drawn) is
stored in the macro. This way the macro preview will use the correct symbol library
for the display.
In the operating system layer, macros are individual files that can be sent to end
customers, for example.
Warning:
Please note that this action will overwrite all other project-related parts data with
master data.
Precondition:
1. Select Utilities > Parts > Parts database --> current project.
Project parts in macros are synchronized with the master data parts, i.e.
the data in the parts database is accepted into the macros.
Precondition:
The project searches for the missing master data contained in the macro, in
which these are then automatically stored.
EPLAN Training 26
Master Data
Symbol selection (Insert > Symbol) only displays those symbols from the stored
symbol libraries and symbol libraries are identified by name (without the path) in
projects.
Precondition:
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Management > Symbol
libraries
1. In the Settings: Symbol libraries dialog, click [...] in a column below Symbol
libraries.
2. In the Select symbol library dialog select the new symbol library.
3. Click on [Open].
4. If you have clicked [...] in the column of an already assigned symbol library,
EPLAN checks whether the original symbol library and the newly selected one
are both compatible. If this is not the case, the process will be interrupted with
a prompt.
If the two symbol libraries are compatible, you have to confirm the exchange in
the Exchange symbol libraries dialog. Click [Yes].
EPLAN Training 27
Master Data
5. If you have clicked [...] in an empty column, the storage process is
automatically started.
6. Select the Synchronize check box if the symbol library should be managed on
a project basis.
7. If necessary, change the preceding sign (the default is the first letter of the
symbol library) so that you can differentiate between the symbol libraries in the
list view in the Symbol selection if you select Popup menu > Name with
preceding sign.
8. Proceed this way for all of the further symbol libraries that you would like to
store in the project.
9. Click [OK].
All symbol libraries specified under Options > Settings > Projects > "Project
name" > Management > Symbol libraries
All symbol libraries opened via Utilities > Master data > Symbol library >
Open or generated via Utilities > Master data > Symbol library > New
Symbol libraries contained in the Assignment 'Property / value to graphic',
Assignment 'Function definition to graphic' and Assignment 'Index to
graphic' form properties.
Note:
If you initiate a symbol library update in the Synchronization of master data
<Project name> dialog (menu items Utilities > Master data > Synchronize current
project), the individual symbols will be checked before the symbol library is replaced.
If incompatible data is found the process is interrupted with a prompt.
EPLAN Training 28
Master Data
Precondition:
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Management > Symbol
libraries
1. In the Settings: Symbol libraries dialog, select the symbol library that you
would like to delete from the project.
2. Click (Delete).
3. If symbols from the selected symbol library are still being used in the project,
click [OK] to confirm the prompt.
EPLAN Training 29
Master Data
Precondition:
Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Reports > Output to page
1. In the Settings: Output to page dialog, open the Form drop-down list for the
reporting type whose settings you would like to edit.
2. Click [Browse].
3. Select the desired form in the Select form dialog. Only the data type
appropriate to the currently selected report type will be displayed under Files
of type.
4. Select the Preview check box in order to display the graphic for the form that
is selected in the list.
5. Click [Open].
The form will be displayed in the Form column and the associated text will
be displayed in the Description (form, plot frame) form property below the
table.
EPLAN Training 30
Master Data
6. Select the Project related check box if the form should be managed on a
project basis.
8. Click [OK].
The form will be stored in the project with the new / changed settings.
EPLAN Training 31
Master Data
Preconditions:
You have opened the project whose master data is to be completed.
You have no editor open for working on master data (Plot frame editor, Form
editor ...).
The project will search for the missing master data and, if it exists, it will be
automatically stored.
Note:
The result of this action is logged in the system messages. This records, for example,
when no data is in the master data pool for missing project master data or when an
error occurs during completion. The relevant information can then be found under
EPLAN Training 32
Master Data
EPLAN Training 33
Master Data
Note:
The master data comparison is not case-sensitive with regard to file names. The file
name ABC.XYZ is identical to abc.xyz.
Preconditions:
You have opened the project whose master data is to be synchronized.
You have no editor open for working on master data (Plot frame editor, Form
editor, etc.).
EPLAN Training 34
Master Data
1. In the Synchronization of master data <Project name> dialog click the
column heading in the tables in order to sort the data alphanumerically either
ascending or descending by column. For example, if you click the column
Type, all entries will be sorted and displayed according to the Master data
type.
2. In the Project master data list select the master data objects that you would
like to transfer to the system master data. (Multiple selection is possible.)
3. Click .
4. In the System master data list select the master data objects that you would
like to transfer to the project master data. (Multiple selection is possible.)
EPLAN Training 35
Master Data
5. Click .
6. Click [Close].
Note:
In both actions, EPLAN informs you in a message window as to how many project /
system master data files were updated and, if the project / system master data were
identical, in which a message is also generated.
Preconditions:
You have opened the project whose master data is to be synchronized.
You have no editor open for working on master data (Plot frame editor, Form
editor, etc.).
EPLAN Training 36
Master Data
1. In the Synchronization of master data <Project name> dialog select
[Update] > Project in order to globally replace all outdated project master
data with newer system master data.
2. Select [Update] > System to globally replace all outdated system master data
with newer project master data.
3. Click [Close].
Notes:
In both actions, EPLAN informs you in a message window as to how many
project / system master data files were updated and, if the project / system
master data were identical, in which a message is also generated.
When updating Symbol libraries the files in question are checked for
compatibility (e.g. regarding connection point designations). If they are not
compatible the process will be interrupted with a prompt.
EPLAN Training 37
Master Data
EPLAN Training 38
Form and Plot Frame Editor
EPLAN Training 1
Form and Plot Frame Editor
EPLAN Training 2
Form and Plot Frame Editor
1 Generating Forms .........................................................................................5
2 Editing Forms................................................................................................9
2.1 Edit static components..............................................................................9
2.2 Insert placeholder texts...........................................................................13
2.3 Add special texts.....................................................................................14
4 Copying Forms............................................................................................20
6 Checking Forms..........................................................................................27
EPLAN Training 3
Form and Plot Frame Editor
20 Updating the Column and Row Designations of Plot Frames.................64
20.1 Specify column and row numbering ........................................................64
20.2 Update column and row numbering ........................................................65
21 Deleting a Column and Row Numbering and Placing Them Again ........66
EPLAN Training 4
Form and Plot Frame Editor
1 Generating Forms
When generating a form, the Form properties - <Form name> dialog is opened, in
which you specify the most important properties of the new form. (This dialog can
also be called up for an opened form after the event to allow you to change the
properties at any time).
Precondition:
1. In the Create form dialog, select the drive and directory, in which the new
form should be saved.
2. In the File name field, enter a descriptive name for the form.
EPLAN Training 5
Form and Plot Frame Editor
3. From the Save as type drop-down list, select the form type (e.g. table of
contents, cable diagram, etc.) that you want to create.
4. In the Path field, select Popup menu > Go to default if you would like to
return to the standard settings for drive and directory. (The default directory is
either the EPLAN-specific default path <Drive_EPLAN>:<Program
Folder>\Forms\<Company Code> or the setting specified under Options >
Settings > User > Management > Directories.)
5. Click [Save].
EPLAN Training 6
Form and Plot Frame Editor
6. If necessary, in the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, select another
form type for the new form from the Form type drop-down list.
EPLAN Training 7
Form and Plot Frame Editor
8. Specify the values for the properties by either entering or overwriting an entry
or selecting a template value from a drop-down list, or jump to a special dialog
in which you can enter additional data.
9. Click [OK].
The new form is stored according to your entries. The file extension
depends on the form type selected and is displayed in the form editor.
If necessary, you can check the form during editing to quickly be made aware of and
to immediately resolve incorrect entries.
Tip:
You can use Drag & Drop to insert existing forms by pulling a marked form from
Windows Explorer into the Pages <Project name> navigator dialog of your
project.
EPLAN Training 8
Form and Plot Frame Editor
2 Editing Forms
As soon as you have opened the form you want to edit in the form editor, you can
edit its components.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form that you would like to edit in the form editor (Utilities
> Master data > Form > Open > [Open]).
Proceed as follows:
EPLAN Training 9
Form and Plot Frame Editor
1. Select Insert > Graphic to add (more) graphic elements such as rectangles,
lines, and so on.
EPLAN Training 10
Form and Plot Frame Editor
2. Select Insert > Graphic > Text to enter text information
EPLAN Training 11
Form and Plot Frame Editor
3. Select Insert > Graphic > Image file to select a graphic in the Select image
file dialog and to insert it, for example, as a logo in the footer of your form.
EPLAN Training 12
Form and Plot Frame Editor
4. Double-click an already added element in order to open the element-specific
Properties dialog and view or change the properties.
Tip:
You can use Drag & Drop to insert text by dragging a selected text from an Office
application into your open form.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form that you would like to edit in the form editor (Utilities
> Master data > Form > Open > [Open]).
EPLAN Training 13
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Placeholder texts are used in forms to define the position for the placement of fields
in a record. They are evaluated and automatically multiplied for each object, where
the position is determined by a predefined offset in the X and Y directions. Use the
"Column width" and "Row height" form properties to specify the offset. Placeholder
texts are only filled during the evaluation run and not updated online.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form that you would like to edit in the form editor (Utilities
> Master data > Form > Open > [Open]).
Special texts for forms are special placeholders for project or page properties. They
are automatically filled in by the program with the appropriate properties depending
on the data entered.
EPLAN Training 14
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened a form in the form editor (Utilities > Master data > Form >
Open > [Open]).
Proceed as follows:
1. In the Page - <Project Name> navigator dialog, select the form whose
properties you would like to view and edit.
EPLAN Training 15
Form and Plot Frame Editor
2. Select Popup menu > Properties.
EPLAN Training 16
Form and Plot Frame Editor
3. In the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, select a different form type
from the drop-down list, if necessary.
EPLAN Training 17
Form and Plot Frame Editor
5. Specify the values for the properties by either entering or overwriting an entry
or selecting a template value from a drop-down list, or jump to a special dialog
in which you can enter additional data.
6. Click (New) on the toolbar above the table Property name / value.
7. In the Property selection dialog, select a new property that you would like to
assign to the form.
EPLAN Training 18
Form and Plot Frame Editor
8. Click [OK].
The form is displayed with changed / new data in the form editor.
EPLAN Training 19
Form and Plot Frame Editor
4 Copying Forms
To copy a form with all its content, save it to another location and / or under a
different name.
Precondition:
1. In the Form selection dialog, select the drive and directory of the form to be
copied.
2. Select the form file to be copied. (Multiple selection isn't possible here).
3. Click on [Open].
4. In the Save as dialog, specify the storage location for the copy of the form.
5. In the File name field, enter a descriptive name for the new form.
EPLAN Training 20
Form and Plot Frame Editor
6. Click [Save].
EPLAN Training 21
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Note:
Dynamic forms can be identified by the Dynamic entry in the drop-down list for the
Form handling form property.
Example:
A device tag list should be created with the following dynamic areas:
Device tag list (page header)
DT / Quantity / Designation
Manufacturer: H1 (group header)
K1 / 10 / Designation 1
K2 / 5 / Designation 2
Kn / 99 / Designation n
Manufacturer: H2 (group header)
K1 / 10 / Designation 1
K2 / 5 / Designation 2
Kn / 99 / Designation n
This information is drawn in the form editor as graphic row frames and written with
each generated row in a report page. In addition, it is also possible to define graphic
or text objects as header, data, or footer elements, i.e. not only placeholder texts.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the dynamic form that you would like to edit in the form editor
(Utilities > Master data > Form > Open > [Open]).
EPLAN Training 22
Form and Plot Frame Editor
2. Click with the mouse to place the initial corner of the rectangle to be drawn.
EPLAN Training 23
Form and Plot Frame Editor
6. In the Placeholder text dialog, click [...] in the Property field of the
Placement tab.
7. In the Placeholder text - <Form type> dialog, select the property that you
want to define as a placeholder for the respective area.
8. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 24
Form and Plot Frame Editor
9. If necessary, edit other placeholder text properties in the Placeholder text
dialog's tabs.
The various defined ranges are combined with form alignment by row (property Form
structure) from "lower left" to "upper left":
If the form alignment is by column, the defined ranges are combined from "lower
right" to "lower left":
Notes:
If several of the same defined ranges (e.g. several data areas) are placed, only
one is taken into consideration for the reports.
EPLAN Training 25
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Like all other forms, dynamic forms can also be automatically checked during
editing (Utilities > Check form), e.g. for the correct use of defined ranges.
EPLAN Training 26
Form and Plot Frame Editor
6 Checking Forms
A special function is available to check at any time during form editing whether your
form is correct or there are errors.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form that you would like to edit in the form editor (Utilities
> Master data > Form > Open > [Open]).
3. Specify drive and directory in which the log file should be saved using the
Open dialog.
4. In the File name field, enter a descriptive name for the log file.
5. Click on [Open].
The system messages that apply to the current form are saved in the
corresponding file and can be printed as needed.
EPLAN Training 27
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form in which you want to define placeholder texts in the
form editor (Utilities > Master data > Form > Open > [Open]).
1. In the Placeholder text dialog, click [...] in the Property field of the
Placement tab.
2. In the Placeholder text - <Form type> dialog, select the element for which
you want to define a placeholder text.
3. If needed, limit the display of possible properties by selecting an entry from the
Category drop-down list.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 28
Form and Plot Frame Editor
6. Change to the Format tab.
EPLAN Training 29
Form and Plot Frame Editor
8. Change to the Language tab.
EPLAN Training 30
Form and Plot Frame Editor
10. Change to the Border tab.
11. If needed, select the Activate alignment box check box and enter the size
and treatment of the text within the frame.
EPLAN Training 31
Form and Plot Frame Editor
12. If the alignment boxes are not only to be taken into account on the report
page, but also drawn, then also select the Draw alignment box check box.
16. Select Popup menu > Cancel action to terminate the action.
The placeholder text is inserted on the form page and can be revised by
double-clicking it.
EPLAN Training 32
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form whose properties you would like to edit in the form
editor (Utilities > Master data > Form > Open > [Open]).
You have opened the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, (Popup menu>
Properties in the form in the navigator dialog Pages - <Project name>).
Proceed as follows:
1. In the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, click [...] in the Value column
of the Regenerate main sub-header property.
3. In the Property selection dialog, select the property(s) that when change, a
new main sub-header is generated on the report page. Multiple selection is
possible here.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 33
Form and Plot Frame Editor
7. Click [OK].
Example:
In the New main sub-header for changes dialog, the Identifier property is selected,
so that a new main sub-header is generated each time the identifier changes.
=A1+O1-A1 /1.2
=A1+O1-A2 /1.3
=A2+O2-A1 /1.2
=A2+O2-A2 /1.3
=A1+O1-K1 /2.2
=A1+O1-K2 /2.3
=A2+O2-K1 /2.2
=A2+O2-K2 /2.3
In the New Main sub-header for changes dialog, the Higher-level function
EPLAN Training 34
Form and Plot Frame Editor
property is also selected next, so that a new main sub-header is generated each time
the identifier and structure identifier for the higher-level function identifier block
changes:
=A1+O1-A1 /1.2
=A1+O1-A2 /1.3
=A2+O2-A1 /1.2
=A2+O2-A2 /1.3
=A1+O1-K1 /2.2
=A1+O1-K2 /2.3
=A2+O2-K1 /2.2
=A2+O2-K2 /2.3
When generating a report (Utilities > Reports > Generate), you must appropriate
specify the additional sort in the New page if property value has changed field.
EPLAN Training 35
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form whose properties you would like to edit in the form
editor (Utilities > Master data > Form > Open > [Open]).
You have opened the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, (Popup menu >
Properties in the form in the navigator dialog Pages - <Project name>).
Proceed as follows:
1. In the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, click [...] in the Value column
of the Format for automatic page description property.
2. In the Format for automatic page description dialog, select the element that
should be used for the automatic page designation from the Available format
elements list. (Multiple selection isn't possible here).
EPLAN Training 36
Form and Plot Frame Editor
7. In the Format: Separator dialog, specify which character you want to use as a
separator.
8. Click [OK].
9. In the Selected format elements list of the Format for automatic page
description dialog, select an entry if necessary and click (Delete) to
remove the selected element from the list.
10. Click (Move up) / (Move down) to move a selected format element up or
down, if possible. (Multiple selection of elements is not possible here).
In the Form properties - < Form name> dialog, the assignments are displayed as
follows in the Value column:
EPLAN Training 37
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Page type / form type: 1
Separators: 5.
Example:
2;1|5;4 for:
Name of first header object, number / length: 1
Separator, number / length: 4
EPLAN Training 38
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form whose properties you would like to edit in the form
editor (Utilities > Master data > Form > Open > [Open]).
You have opened the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, (Popup menu >
Properties in the form in the navigator dialog Pages - <Project name>).
Proceed as follows:
1. In the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, click [...] in the Value column
of the Assignment: Index to graphic property.
3. In the Index field, enter a different value, if necessary. The default is always
<next_highest_number>.
5. In the Symbol selection dialog, select the symbol whose graphic you want to
assign to the index.
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 39
Form and Plot Frame Editor
The associated data is entered into the Symbol library and Description
fields.
7. In the Symbol variant field, select the desired symbol from the drop-down list
of all the existing variants of the current symbol.
9. Click [OK].
The assignments are stored and can be inserted into the form using
placeholders.
In the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, the assignments are displayed as
follows in the Value column:
Example:
1;SPECIAL;307;0|2;IEC_EPLAN_D;12;1
Note:
Take care that only the symbols of the included symbol libraries are displayed.
EPLAN Training 40
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form whose properties you would like to edit in the form
editor (Utilities > Master data > Form > Open > [Open]).
You have opened the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, (Popup menu >
Properties in the form in the navigator dialog Pages - <Project name>).
Proceed as follows:
1. In the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, click [...] in the Value column
of the Assignment of property / value to graphic property.
4. In the Property selection dialog, select the property to which you want to
assign a graphic.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 41
Form and Plot Frame Editor
6. In the Value field, enter the value that the property should have.
8. In the Symbol selection dialog, select the symbol whose graphic you want to
assign to the property.
9. Click [OK].
The associated data is entered into the Symbol library and Description
fields.
10. In the Symbol variant field, select the desired symbol from the drop-down list
of all the existing variants of the current symbol.
The assignments are stored and can be inserted into the form using
placeholders.
In the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, the assignments are displayed as
follows in the Value column:
EPLAN Training 42
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Example:
20400;0;SIE;SPECIAL;310;0|1120;0;A*;IEC_EPLAN_D;7;1
Note:
Take care that only the symbols of the included symbol libraries are displayed.
EPLAN Training 43
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form whose properties you would like to edit in the form
editor (Utilities > Master data > Form > Open > [Open]).
You have opened the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, (Popup menu >
Properties in the form in the navigator dialog Pages - <Project name>).
Proceed as follows:
1. In the Form properties - <Form name> dialog, click [...] in the Value column
of the Assignment: Function definition to graphic property.
4. In the Function definitions dialog, select the function definition to which you
want to assign a graphic.
EPLAN Training 44
Form and Plot Frame Editor
5. Click [OK].
7. In the Symbol selection dialog, select the symbol whose graphic you want to
assign to the function definition.
8. Click [OK].
The associated data is entered into the Symbol library and Description
fields.
9. In the Symbol variant field, select the desired symbol from the drop-down list
of all the existing variants of the current symbol.
The assignments are stored and can be inserted into the form using
placeholders.
In the Form properties dialog, the assignments are displayed as follows in the Value
column:
Example:
200;1;1;SPECIAL;30;0|100;99;1;IEC_EPLAN_D;211;1
Note:
Take care that only the symbols of the included symbol libraries are displayed.
EPLAN Training 46
Form and Plot Frame Editor
There are also special placeholders for generated graphics that are used in terminal
diagrams, terminal bills of materials, and terminal connection diagrams as jumper
graphics. For example, these include the placeholders "Jumper graphics (jumper
level)", "Graphic for internal wire jumpers", "Graphic for saddle jumpers", etc.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened a suitable form in the form editor in which you want to replace
placeholder texts with graphics (Utilities > Master data > Form > Open >
[Open]).
You have specified the Index to graphic, Function definition to graphic, and
Property / value to graphic assignments in the Form properties - <Form
name> dialog.
1. In the Placeholder text dialog, click [...] in the Property field of the
Placement tab.
EPLAN Training 47
Form and Plot Frame Editor
2. In the Placeholder text - <Form type> dialog, select the element (e.g.
terminal properties) for which placeholder text is available for graphics.
3. Limit the scope of possible data by selecting the Settings entry from the
Category drop-down list.
5. Click [OK].
7. Click [OK].
10. Select Popup menu > Cancel action to terminate the action.
EPLAN Training 48
Form and Plot Frame Editor
The placeholder text is inserted on the form page and can be replaced in
the appropriate report by the graphic selected in the form properties.
EPLAN Training 49
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Precondition:
1. In the Create plot frame dialog, select the drive and directory, in which the
new plot frame should be saved.
2. In the File name field, enter a descriptive name for the plot frame.
3. In the Path field, select Popup menu > Go to default if you would like to
return to the standard settings for drive and directory. (The default directory is
either the EPLAN-specific default path <Drive_EPLAN>:<Program
Folder>\PlotFrames\<Company Code> or the setting specified under
Options > Settings > User > Management > Directories.)
4. Click [Save].
5. In the Plot frame properties- <Plot frame name> dialog, select the
properties to be shown in the list from the Category drop-down list.
6. Specify the values for the properties, either by making or overwriting an entry
or by selecting a preset value from a drop-down list.
EPLAN Training 50
Form and Plot Frame Editor
7. Click [OK].
The new plot frame is saved according to your entries and displayed in the
plot frame editor.
EPLAN Training 51
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Tip:
You can show the column division of the plot frame via View > Columns. This makes
the overview easier when inserting new elements.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the plot frame that you would like to edit in the plot frame
editor (Utilities > Master data > Plot frame > Open > [Open]).
Proceed as follows:
1. Select Insert > Graphic to add (more) graphic elements such as rectangles,
lines, and so on.
3. Select Insert > Graphic > Image file to select a graphic in the Select image
file dialog and to insert it, for example, as a logo in the footer of your plot
frame.
EPLAN Training 52
Form and Plot Frame Editor
4. Double-click an already added element in order to open the element-specific
Properties dialog and view or change the properties.
5. Proceed in a similar manner for all static components of the plot frame.
Tip:
You can use Drag & Drop to insert text by dragging a selected text from an Office
application into your open plot frame.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the plot frame that you would like to edit in the plot frame
editor (Utilities > Master data > Plot frame > Open > [Open]).
In addition to static elements, plot frames consist of and this is the more important
aspect special texts. This includes placeholders for project and page properties that
are filled in accordance to the data entered from the program. You can also insert
row and column texts that are then taken into consideration in the reports.
EPLAN Training 53
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened a plot frame in the plot frame editor (Utilities > Master data >
Plot frame > Open > [Open]).
Proceed as follows:
1. In the Page - <Project Name> navigator dialog, select the plot frame whose
properties you would like to view and edit.
3. In the Plot frame properties- <Plot frame name> dialog, select the
properties to be shown in the list from the Category drop-down list.
4. Specify the values for the properties, either by making or overwriting an entry
or by selecting a preset value from a drop-down list.
5. Click [New] on the toolbar above the table Property name / Value.
6. In the Property selection dialog, select a new property that you would like to
assign to the plot frame.
EPLAN Training 54
Form and Plot Frame Editor
7. Click [OK].
The plot frame is displayed with changed / new data in the plot frame
editor.
EPLAN Training 55
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Precondition:
1. In the Plot frame selection dialog, select the drive and directory of the plot
frame to be copied.
2. Select the desired plot frame file. (Multiple selection isn't possible here).
3. Click on [Open].
4. In the Save as dialog, specify the storage location for the copy of the plot
frame.
5. In the File name field, enter a descriptive name for the new plot frame.
6. Click [Save].
The plot frame is copied and the copy opened for editing.
EPLAN Training 56
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form in which you want to define special texts in the form
editor (Utilities > Master data > Form > Open > [Open]). You have opened
the plot frame in which you want to define special texts in the plot frame editor
(Utilities > Master data > Plot frame > Open > [Open]).
2. In the Special text <...> dialog, click [...] in the Property field of the
Placement tab.
3. In the Property selection dialog, select the page or project property that
should be inserted in the plot frame / form.
4. If needed, limit the display of possible properties by selecting an entry from the
Category drop-down list.
EPLAN Training 57
Form and Plot Frame Editor
5. Click [OK].
11. If needed, select the Activate alignment box check box and enter the size
and treatment of the text within the frame.
12. If the alignment boxes are not only to be taken into account on the report
page, but also drawn, then also select the Draw alignment box check box.
EPLAN Training 58
Form and Plot Frame Editor
14. Positioning the special text on the plot frame / form page.
16. Select Popup menu > Cancel action to terminate the action.
The special text is inserted on the plot frame / form page and can be
revised by double-clicking it.
Note:
EPLAN internally notes the last selected property and suggests it again when next
inserting. All settings made during the placement are also used.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the plot frame in which you want to define row and column
texts in the plot frame editor (Utilities > Master data > Plot frame > Open >
[Open]).
1. In the subsequent menu, select whether a column text or a row text should
be inserted into the plot frame.
EPLAN Training 59
Form and Plot Frame Editor
2. In the Format tab of the Special text <...> dialog, specify the formatting
settings for the row and column text.
3. Click [OK].
The special text is inserted on the plot frame page and can be revised by
double-clicking it.
Note:
The Utilities > Place column and row text again can be used to delete these
special texts and automatically placed on the border areas of the defined columns
and rows.
EPLAN Training 60
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form that you would like to edit in the form editor (Utilities
> Master data > Form > Open > [Open]).
Proceed as follows:
3. Select View > Hide placeholders to display the placeholder texts again.
Preconditions:
EPLAN Training 61
Form and Plot Frame Editor
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form that you would like to edit in the form editor (Utilities
> Master data > Form > Open > [Open]). Or you have opened the plot frame
that you would like to edit in the plot frame editor (Utilities > Master data >
Plot frame > Open > [Open]).
Proceed as follows:
3. Select View > Properties as numbers to display the property texts as texts
again.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened the form that you would like to edit in the form editor (Utilities
> Master data > Form > Open > [Open]). Or you have opened the plot frame
that you would like to edit in the plot frame editor (Utilities > Master data >
Plot frame > Open > [Open]).
Proceed as follows:
The column division is displayed in the form / plot frame using lines.
EPLAN Training 62
Form and Plot Frame Editor
2. Edit the form / plot frame as desired.
EPLAN Training 63
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Precondition:
1. Select Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" > Management >
Pages.
2. In the Path numbering group box, specify whether the numbering should be
page or project related or by structure identifier by selecting the appropriate
option.
3. Click [OK].
With the page-dependent counting method, counting of column areas starts from
scratch for each page, i.e., EPLAN always starts with the configured starting value
and increments it until the last column of the page is reached. For numbering by
project, column numbers are counted through each page, so that counting starts with
the starting value on page 1 and counted to x on the last page. (Please note that all
pages are counted here, unless you activate the plot frame property Display column
designations on non-logic pages.)
The following plot frame properties (Category Settings) are established for the
report:
EPLAN Training 64
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Start value (column): The column numbers of the grid are normally numbered
from left to right (starting with 0). A different starting value can be provided
here.
Start value (row) The row numbers of the grid are normally numbers from top to
bottom (starting with 0). A different starting value can be provided here.
Page orientation / paper format: Specifies the way in which the schematic
pages are divided into areas: Landscape or Normal Format.
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have opened a schematic page to which a plot frame has been assigned.
The path designations are updated according to the selection made under
Settings.
EPLAN Training 65
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have placed column or row texts in the plot frame (Insert > Special text >
Column text or Insert > Special text > Row text).
The column and row numbers are deleted and placed again. During the generation of
special texts, the formatting last used is selected.
Example:
The two illustrations below show column and row numbers before and after selection
of the menu item, where P1 through P3 symbolized the columns and A through C the
rows.
EPLAN Training 66
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Before:
After:
EPLAN Training 67
Form and Plot Frame Editor
Precondition:
You have selected a form via Options > Settings > Projects > "Project" > Reports
> Graphical output > Forms documentation or Plot frame documentation and
specified the settings for the pages you would like to create.
1. If the form documentation / plot frame documentation is not listed under the
reports, click [New].
2. In the Specify report dialog select the Form documentation or the Plot
frame documentation option.
3. If necessary, change the settings for Output project, Creator, and Creation
date.
4. Click [OK].
6. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 68
Form and Plot Frame Editor
The documentation is generated. This process can take some time,
depending on the number and complexity of the data.
7. Click [Close].
The newly generated pages are inserted into the target project selected. In
the list of reports, the level Form documentation / Plot frame
documentation is inserted, and the list of pages contained in the
documentation appears there.
EPLAN Training 69
Form and Plot Frame Editor
EPLAN Training 70
Connection Point Designations and Identifiers
EPLAN Training 1
Connection Point Designations and Identifiers
EPLAN Training 2
Connection Point Designations and Identifiers
Export your own identifier sets, connection point designations, and connection
point descriptions (if you have created any)
Import your own identifier sets, connection point designations, and connection
point descriptions (the EPLAN entries are overwritten during this import)
Add your own identifier sets, connection point designations, and connection
point descriptions to the new function definitions.
EPLAN Training 3
Connection Point Designations and Identifiers
The Connection point designations tab lists the function definitions with
their connection points. One line is shown for each connection point.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 4
Connection Point Designations and Identifiers
1. Select the Connection point descriptions tab.
The Connection point descriptions tab lists the function definitions with
their connection points. One line is shown for each connection point.
3. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 5
Connection Point Designations and Identifiers
2. In the New identifier set dialog specify the designation for the identifier set
and click [OK].
3. Enter the identifiers for the individual functions into the various cells. Identifiers
can consist of multiple characters.
EPLAN Training 6
Connection Point Designations and Identifiers
4. Click [OK].
1. In the Current identifier set box select the desired identifier set from the
drop-down list.
2. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 7
Connection Point Designations and Identifiers
1. Select the columns with the identifier sets you want to export.
3. In the Export dialog, switch to the desired directory and enter a file name.
EPLAN Training 8
Connection Point Designations and Identifiers
4. Click [Save].
3. In the Export dialog, switch to the desired directory and enter a file name.
4. Click [Save].
EPLAN Training 9
Connection Point Designations and Identifiers
EPLAN Training 10
Connection Point Designations and Identifiers
2. In the Import dialog, switch to the desired directory and enter a file name.
3. Click [Open].
The identifier sets are transferred from the XML file into the dialog.
EPLAN Training 11
Connection Point Designations and Identifiers
2. In the Import dialog, switch to the desired directory and enter a file name.
3. Click [Open].
EPLAN Training 12
Connection Point Designations and Identifiers
EPLAN Training 13
Automating Project Actions
EPLAN Training 1
Automating Project Actions
EPLAN Training 2
Automating Project Actions
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 3
Automating Project Actions
2. In the New script dialog, in the Name field, enter a meaningful name for the
script.
3. Click [OK].
2. In the Available actions field, select a project action and then click .
3. Once EPLAN has opened a dialog, define the settings for the selected project
action and click [OK].
EPLAN Training 4
Automating Project Actions
4. Select all of the project actions that you would like to automate, in the same
manner.
5. To define the sequence in which the project actions are to be executed, select
a project action in the Selected actions field and click (Move up) or
(Move down), as many times as necessary until the element is in the
desired position.
6. Click (Save).
7. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 5
Automating Project Actions
Preconditions:
You have opened a project.
You have created a script.
2. Select the desired script from the Active script drop-down list.
EPLAN Training 6
Automating Project Actions
1. Select the menu item Options > Settings > Projects > "Project name" >
Management > Automated processing.
3. If you have not yet created a log file, in the [Open] dialog, select a storage
location and enter a file name with the type *.log.
4. If you have already created a log file, in the [Open] dialog, select the existing
*.log log file.
EPLAN Training 7
Automating Project Actions
5. Click on [Open].
EPLAN Training 8
Automating Project Actions
2. Select a project in the page navigator.
EPLAN Training 9
Automating Project Actions
3. Select the menu items Utilities > Automated processing > Run.
EPLAN Training 10
Automating Project Actions
1. To select several projects, hold down the [Ctrl] key and select the desired
projects.
EPLAN Training 11
Automating Project Actions
2. Select Popup menu > Automated processing.
3. To use the currently active project-related script for each project, select the
Use separate script for each project option.
4. To use the same project-spanning script for all projects, select the Use script
from selected project for all projects option.
EPLAN Training 12
Automating Project Actions
5. In the Name field, select the project whose script is to be used for all other
selected projects.
In the Project selection dialog, all of the projects are displayed that will be
automatically processed.
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [Close].
EPLAN Training 13
Automating Project Actions
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 14
Automating Project Actions
3. In the Open dialog, select the executable *.exe file of a text editor and click
[OK].
EPLAN Training 15
Automating Project Actions
4. In the Settings: Automated processing dialog click [OK].
Precondition:
1. Select the menu items Utilities > Automated processing > Settings.
EPLAN Training 16
Automating Project Actions
2. In the dialog Settings: Automated processing dialog select the script you
want to edit from the Script name field.
3. Click (Edit).
EPLAN Training 17
Automating Project Actions
4. Edit the source code, save the script and close the editor.
EPLAN Training 18
Automating Project Actions
EPLAN Training 19
Automating Project Actions
2. In the Run dialog, in the Open field, enter the command cmd.
3. After the Drive:\> prompt, enter the file path and file name of the executable
file EPLAN.exe and a space.
Example:
C:\>D:\Program Files\EPLAN\EPLAN\Version\BIN\EPLAN.exe
Example:
C:\>D:\Program Files\EPLAN\EPLAN\Version\BIN\EPLAN.exe
ExecuteScript /
me\EPLAN\EPLAN\Version\Projects\ESS\demo_d.edb\script.cs
5. After this, enter the parameter /ProjectName: and the file path and file name
of the *.elk project.
Example:
C:\>D:\Program Files\EPLAN\EPLAN\Version\BIN\EPLAN.exe
ExecuteScript
/ScriptFile:D:\Program
Files\EPLAN\EPLAN\Version\Projects\ESS\demo_d.edb\script.cs
EPLAN Training 20
Automating Project Actions
/ProjectName:D:\Program
Files\EPLAN\EPLAN\Version\Projects\ESS\demo_d.elk
6. Press [Enter].
The command line opens EPLAN and performs the project actions defined
in the script.
7. To examine the status, select the menu item Utilities > System messages.
EPLAN Training 21
Automating Project Actions
EPLAN Training 22
Settings
Settings
EPLAN Training 1
Settings
EPLAN Training 2
Settings
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 3
Settings
2. Double-click the desired folder / subfolder.
3. To display the settings, select the desired settings area in the tree.
4. Change the desired settings in the right-hand side of the settings dialog.
EPLAN Training 4
Settings
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 5
Settings
2. Select [Extras] > Create project template.
3. Select the storage location and the name of the project template.
EPLAN Training 6
Settings
4. Click [Save].
You reach the Create project dialog, the so-called Project Wizard.
EPLAN Training 7
Settings
2. Give the new project a name.
4. Select the desired template in the Open dialog and click [Open].
6. Click [Finish].
EPLAN Training 8
Settings
Precondition:
EPLAN Training 9
Settings
2. Double-click the desired folder / subfolder.
3. To display the settings, select the desired settings area in the tree.
4. Click the desired field or check box in the right-hand side of the settings dialog.
EPLAN Training 10
Settings
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 11
Settings
Precondition:
You have selected an object in the page navigator or the graphical editor.
1. In the Settings dialog, in the Category drop-down list, select the Settings
entry.
EPLAN Training 12
Settings
3. Enter the desired value.
4. Click [OK].
Example:
You wish to use a plot frame in all pages of a project. You also wish to use a different
plot frame on one specific page. To do this, you define the plot frame <Plot frame
name> for all pages in your project and then only change the plot frame setting for
the single page that you wish to be different.
EPLAN Training 13
Settings
EPLAN Training 14
System Messages
System Messages
EPLAN Training 1
System Messages
3 Setting the Path and Size of the System Message File .............................5
EPLAN Training 2
System Messages
You can open the system messages at any time, even when no project is currently
open.
EPLAN Training 3
System Messages
All messages output during the session until now are stored to the system
message file.
EPLAN Training 4
System Messages
1. Select the menu item Options > Settings > Workstation > Messages >
System.
2. If you want to change the path of the system messages file, enter the new
path in the field Path of system messages file.
Alternatively, click on [...] next to the field and explore the tree structure of the
Browse for folder dialog to define a new path.
3. If you want to limit the size of the system messages file, enter a new value in
the field Size of system messages file. (The default value is 30 MB.)
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 5
System Messages
EPLAN Training 6
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
EPLAN Training 1
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
6 Reading out Project Parameters for Plot Frames from EPLAN 5 ...........16
EPLAN Training 2
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 3
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
1. In the EPLAN 5 symbol library import select a master data drive from the
Master data drive drop-down list where you want to save the imported data.
The drives where an ...\EPLAN4\... directory can be found are displayed as
the default here.
3. In the Symbol file selection dialog, select the EPLAN 5 symbol library to be
imported. In doing so, the Path with <Selected_master data
drive>:\EPLAN4\N is made available. (The File type "Symbol file (*.sym)"
cannot be changed).
Multiple selection is not possible here.
Example:
EPLAN 5 is installed under C:\Programme\EPLAN4. The path is
C:\Programme\EPLAN4\N where the customer identifiers BMW and ESS are
located and each of them contain the symbol libraries.
4. Click on [Open].
5. In the Connection point designation position group box specify the entries
for the horizontal and vertical position of the connection point designations.
These fields are prepopulated with the default values "1.30 mm" and "2.0
mm".
EPLAN Training 4
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
6. In the Mulit-line or Single-line option fields in the Symbols group box specify
whether the symbol library is for single-line or multi-line symbols.
7. From the Original library drop-down list select the table to be used for
assigning old and new symbols. Based on an internal comparison the program
suggests an assignment table here. If no suitable table can be found, the
drop-down list remains empty and you can select the table manually.
9. In the Symbol library selection dialog, specify where and under what name
the file should be saved.
10. Select Popup menu > Go to default in the Path field to specify the standard
path indicated in the settings for symbol libraries (Options > Settings > User
> Management> Directories). The File type "Symbol library (*.slk)" is
assigned automatically.
12. From the EPLAN 5 character set drop-down list select the character set (not
the language!) for the symbol library. The entry is prepopulated with 437.
The symbols are transferred and a progress bar shows the process.
Original EPLAN 5 symbols are not converted, but rather assigned to the
corresponding symbols. Symbols generated or changed by the user, on the
other hand, are saved in a new symbol library and any problems are stored as
properties in this symbol library.
EPLAN Training 5
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
Notes:
The processing symbol for contacts and coils are automatically created in the
new symbol library (according to the EPLAN 5 method).
All properties that can be switched on via the EPLAN 5 parameter setting
Described block (Utilities > Parameters > Project > Graphic > Device tag,
Device tag 1 tab) are placed on those symbols. The properties are then
placed on the corresponding layers and docked next to one another in the
sequence they were shown in EPLAN 5. The text sizes for the properties are
set to From layer.
EPLAN Training 6
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
Any problems that occurred during the data transfer are shown in the upper right
portion of the dialog. One click on a property will select the corresponding symbol in
the list. If the problem is solved, the property can be manually set to "Completed".
Precondition:
You have selected an EPLAN 5 symbol library for transfer and defined the
appropriate entries in the EPLAN 5 symbol library import dialog.
2. Click [...] in the Function definition field of the Symbol data group box (right
portion of the dialog).
EPLAN Training 7
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
4. Click [OK].
7. In the Completed column select the check box to indicate that the problem
has been "solved".
8. Proceed in the same way for all other symbols you would like to revise.
9. Click [Close].
Note:
Default for the basic symbol library is Base_DIC if "DIC", "DIN" or "IEC" occur in the
symbol library names. If the symbol library name contains the character string "JIC",
the Base_JIC basic symbol library is set. The same process applies to "MSR"
(Base_MSR), "Single" (Base_Single) and "PNE" (Base_Pneumatic).
EPLAN Training 8
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
1 = upper left
2 = lower left
3 = upper right
4 = lower right.
The sequence of connection points is important, however, for correctly assigning the
function definition connection points to the symbol so that every function definition
matches the connection point assignment of every variant of a symbol without
changes. After the transfer of a symbol library, the symbols are assigned function
definitions. In order to avoid problems associated with having to revise the sequence
of connection points, the sequence of connection points can be defined for individual
symbol variants to where they match the function definition: The individual symbol
variant connection points are each assigned to a function definition connection point.
Because most variants are just rotations and mirrors of the template variant (one of
eight default variants), they are analyzed during the symbol transfer, and each
identified with one of the A-H variants. Some of them can be securely assigned while
others do not allow a secure assignment. Because the Function definition
assignment - <Symbol library> dialog displays all of the variants of every symbol
as well as the basic symbol with its four associated variants, and the connection point
numbers are displayed in the symbol preview, you can recognize in one glance
whether the transferred symbol variants are different from the basic symbol variants.
If a difference is found, proceed as follows:
Preconditions:
EPLAN Training 9
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
You have selected an EPLAN 5 symbol library for transfer and defined the
appropriate entries in the EPLAN 5 symbol library import dialog.
The function definition matches the first variants for the symbol.
The 1, 2, 3, and 4 variants have a rotation angle of 0, 90, 180 and 270.
2. In the Symbol variant assignment dialog you assign a basic symbol variant
to the variants of the imported symbol.
The variant number of the basic symbol (A-H) is saved as the variant
number on the imported symbol and the connection points from the basic
symbol variant are written to the variants of the imported symbol. In addition,
the P8 variant (A-H) to which the previous EPLAN 5 variants 0-3 were
assigned are saved with the symbol. This information is necessary for
correctly assigning the connection point designations to the function in a later
project or macro transfers.
3. Click [OK].
4. Proceed in a similar manner for all other problems that may occur.
Symbols that have been edited in EPLAN 5, where P8 cannot identify the connection
points during the transfer, must be revised in the symbol editor.
Example:
EPLAN Training 10
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
In this case the program cannot recognize that "X3" is also mirrored. The PE
connection point should be on the left and not on the right. In this case, you also
have to switch the variant C connection points in the symbol editor to solve this
problem.
EPLAN Training 11
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
1. In the EPLAN 5 plot frame import select a master data drive from the Master
data drive drop-down list where you want to save the imported data. The
drives where an ...\EPLAN4\... directory can be found are displayed as the
default here.
3. In the Plot frame selection dialog select EPLAN 5 plot frame to be imported.
In doing so, the Path with <Selected_master data drive>:\EPLAN4\N is
made available. (The File type "Plot frame (*.skg)" can't be changed).
Multiple selection is not possible here.
Example:
EPLAN 5 is installed under C:\Programme\EPLAN4. The path is
C:\Programme\EPLAN4\N where the customer identifiers BMW and ESS are
located and each of them contain the plot frames.
4. Click on [Open].
EPLAN Training 12
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
6. Specify in the Find folder dialog where the file should be saved. In doing this
the default path specified in the settings will be given (Options > Settings >
User > Management > Directories).
7. Click [OK].
8. From the EPLAN 5 character set drop-down list select the character set (not
the language!) for the plot frame. The entry is prepopulated with 437.
9. Click [...] in the From field in the EPLAN 5 project parameters group box to
easily read out all of the necessary EPLAN 5 project parameters from the
project.
Or use the settings options below From in order to manually specify the
settings.
The plot frame is transferred and a progress bar shows the process.
EPLAN Training 13
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
1. In the EPLAN 5 plot frame import dialog, select one of the entries for the
path area from the Path areas drop-down list (1 to 45 and "User-defined").
The program suggests an entry automatically.
2. Click [Next].
3. In the EPLAN 5 project parameters dialog specify the project settings for the
path areas individually.
4. Click [OK].
6. Select one of the possible settings from the Page size drop-down list. The
system will again recommend a default setting. For every page size, there are
certain identifiers for the path areas that depend on the schematic logic.
EPLAN Training 14
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
7. In the Contact image position field specify a number in mm. The default
setting here is 58 mm. The EPLAN 5-specific value corresponds to the
property "Contact image spacing" (<12060>).
8. Click [OK].
The plot frame is transferred and a progress bar shows the process.
Note:
The EPLAN 5-specific schematics logic settings "DIN" and "JIC" are always
transferred with the report standard = "DIN / IEC" (property <12103>), and "USA"
settings are always transferred with the report standard = "JIC / NFPA".
EPLAN 5 JIC plot frames do not become P8 JIC plot frames because, in EPLAN 5,
only the view is rotated, and not the logic. For this reason, special plot frames in "JIC
/ NFPA" format are contained in the master data.
EPLAN Training 15
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
1. In theEPLAN 5 plot frame import dialog, click [...] in the From field of the
EPLAN 5 project parameters group box.
2. In the EPLAN 5 project selection dialog, select the EPLAN 5 project for
which you want to read out the parameters. (Multiple selection isn't possible
here). All drives where an ...\EPLAN4\... directory can be found are
displayed.
Under Projects all drives are displayed that have a letter assigned, i.e.,
regardless of whether a ...\EPLAN4\P\... directory exists.
4. Click [OK].
The EPLAN 5-specific project parameters are written into the settings of the
EPLAN 5 plot frame import dialog (group box EPLAN 5 project
parameters). They can be edited if you manually overwrite the settings or
click [Next] to edit the path area definition.
EPLAN Training 16
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
1. In the EPLAN 5 form import select a master data drive from the Master data
drive drop-down list where you want to save the imported data. The drives
where an ...\EPLAN4\... directory can be found are displayed as the default
here.
The Form file selection dialog is opened; the Path already contains
<Selected master data drive>:\EPLAN4\N. Default for the File type is
"All forms".
3. In order to only transfer certain form types from EPLAN 5, select the desired
types from the File type drop-down list.
5. Click on [Open].
EPLAN Training 17
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
7. Specify in the Find folder dialog where the files should be saved. In doing this
the default path specified in the settings will be given (Options > Settings >
User > Management > Directories).
8. Click [OK].
9. From the EPLAN 5 character set drop-down list select the character set (not
the language!) for the form. The entry is prepopulated with 437.
10. Specify the following settings for terminal diagrams using the checkboxes in
the Jumper display (terminals) group box:
Number of levels: This entry specifies how many wire jumper levels are set
up in the transferred terminal diagrams.
With angle / only with lines: In these option fields you specify whether
angles or lines should be used in the transferred terminal diagrams for
displaying jumpers.
The form / forms are transferred and a progress bar shows the process.
Note:
Most EPLAN 5 forms are not exactly DIN A3 size, but a bit smaller. They are
transferred as they are, i.e., even in P8 they do not correspond exactly to the DIN A3
standard size!
EPLAN Training 18
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
Warning:
Please note that parts data must be exported with the following settings to ensure a
correct transfer from EPLAN 5:
Separator = Tab
Format = ASCII.
These settings are specified in EPLAN 5 via the menu items Parts > Management >
Data exchange > Export (group box Output). If the format does not conform to this
specification, a message appears during the import and the transfer is interrupted.
Precondition:
1. In the General tab in the EPLAN 5 parts data import wizard dialog, make
the general entries to be taken into account in the import.
2. On the Parts tab, select the files exported from EPLAN 5 that are to be
imported.
4. Click [Finish].
EPLAN Training 19
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
If you select multiple files with the same part number, and if you have selected one of
the two settings Update existing parts data (General tab), every subsequent file
overwrites the data in the previous file.
Note:
The EPLAN 5 character set specified via Options > Settings > User > Interfaces >
EPLAN 5 language assignment is used here as the default.
EPLAN Training 20
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
Because even the "non-multilingual fields" in the various EPLAN 5 databases may
have been changed, a check box is offered for every source file during the transfer.
Select the Only translation check box if only the multilingual fields should be
transferred. If the check box is deselected, all of the fields will be transferred
according to the import options.
One language, or the "Language-neutral" setting, can be specified for every file. If the
"non-multilingual fields" in the foreign language EPLAN 5 files to be transferred have
been changed, these data can be imported into a separate parts database.
Designation 1
Designation 2
Designation 3
Remark 1 and Remark 2 (the entries are combined).
1. In the General tab in the EPLAN 5 parts import wizard dialog make the
general entries and click [Next].
EPLAN Training 21
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
4. Select the desired EPLAN 5 part export file from the Open dialog. In doing so,
the Path with <Selected_master data drive>:\EPLAN4\L is made
available. You cannot select multiple files here.
5. Click on [Open].
7. Select one of the possible dictionary languages from the Language drop-
down list.
8. If necessary, select another character set from the EPLAN 5 character set
drop-down list.
9. Proceed in a similar way for all other files you would like to import.
EPLAN Training 22
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
The contactor contacts are assigned in EPLAN 5 not only via the symbol type but
also via the symbol names. However, functions in P8 (corresponding to the symbol
types from EPLAN 5) are independent of symbol libraries and symbol names. There
are therefore many functions for differentiating between the contacts. Therefore,
assignment information must be available when transferring contactor data from
EPLAN 5. This information is located in the symbol library. For this reason, the
symbol library associated with the contactor definition must first be transferred before
the actual contactor definitions are imported. To do this the correct function
definitions must be already assigned.
When transferring contactor definitions you can use the fields in Contactor tab to
specify the EPLAN 5 symbol libraries appropriate for the contactor definition. The
program then checks whether the corresponding symbol library has already been
transferred. If that is not the case, the [Next] and [Finish] buttons in the wizard are
rendered inactive. If the symbol libraries have already been transferred, the assigned
symbol library is used and the corresponding function definitions are taken from it.
Part number
Type number
Product group
Product subgroup
Accessory designation (from the EPLAN 5 field Group)
Function definitions (via the symbol library)
Connection point designations.
The possible variants are also transferred. In the process, the variants are named
exactly the same as in EPLAN 5. The "Part number", "Type number", "Product group"
and "Accessory code" data are transferred exclusively from the first variant.
Note:
If in the General tab you have selected one of the options Update existing parts
data, only the function definitions (via the symbol library) and the connection point
designations will be updated for existing parts numbers.
EPLAN Training 23
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
Precondition:
You have already transferred the EPLAN 5 symbol libraries for the contactor
definition files (Project > EPLAN 5 / fluidPLAN import > Symbol library).
1. In the General tab in the EPLAN 5 parts import wizard dialog make the
general entries and click [Next].
5. Select the desired EPLAN 5 contactor definition file from the Contactor
definition file selection dialog. In doing so, the Path with <Selected_master
data drive>:\EPLAN4\N is made available. (The File type "Contactor
definition file (*.idx)" can't be changed).
Multiple selection is impossible here.
6. Click on [Open].
7. If necessary, select another character set from the EPLAN 5 character set
drop-down list. That can be necessary because the parts numbers may
contain special characters.
EPLAN Training 24
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
8. Click [...] in the EPLAN 5 symbol library cell.
9. Select the desired EPLAN 5 symbol library that is the basis for your contactor
definition from the Symbol file selection dialog. In doing so, the Path with
<Selected_master data drive>:\EPLAN4\N is made available. (The File
type "Symbol file (*.sym)" cannot be changed).
Multiple selection is impossible here.
11. Proceed in a similar way for all other files you would like to import.
Note:
In front of the EPLAN 5 symbol library column the Status column displays whether
the desired EPLAN 5 symbol library has already been transferred or not.
EPLAN Training 25
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
The shields are transferred as indicated in EPLAN 5, while any allocated index
information as well as the "Cable with / without external shield" setting is also taken
into account.
Example:
In EPLAN 5 the NYY-J cable has five conductors each with one cross-section
assigned to it. During the transfer, five parts are generated; one for each cross-
section.
This rule applies if the "cross-section" is to be taken into consideration for the Part
number format. Otherwise one part is generated.
1. In the General tab in the EPLAN 5 parts import wizard dialog make the
general entries and click [Next].
EPLAN Training 26
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
6. Select the desired EPLAN 5 cable type file from the Cable type file selection
dialog. In doing so, the Path with <Selected_master data
drive>:\EPLAN4\N is made available. (The File type "Cable type file (*.skg)"
can't be changed).
Multiple selection is impossible here.
7. Click on [Open].
8. If necessary, select another character set from the EPLAN 5 character set
drop-down list. That can be necessary because the parts numbers may
contain special characters.
9. Select the Part number format from the drop-down lists and input fields
below the table.
10. Proceed in a similar way for all other files you would like to import.
EPLAN Training 27
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 28
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
1. In the General tab in the EPLAN 5 parts import wizard dialog make the
general entries and click [Next].
EPLAN Training 29
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
7. Select the desired EPLAN 5 plug type file from the Plug type file selection
dialog. In doing so, the Path with <Selected_master data
drive>:\EPLAN4\N is made available. (The File type "Plug type file (*.kls)"
can't be changed).
Multiple selection is impossible here.
8. Click on [Open].
9. If necessary, select another character set from the EPLAN 5 character set
drop-down list. That can be necessary because the parts numbers may
contain special characters.
10. Proceed in a similar way for all other files you would like to import.
EPLAN Training 30
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
A terminal / plug numbering scheme with the same name is generated for every
scheme defined in EPLAN 5, and descriptions, quantities, and designations are
transferred in the process. The scheme is saved for each user depending on the part
type.
EPLAN Training 31
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
1. In P8, in the Parts management dialog, select the menu items [Extras] >
Export.
2. In the Export records dialog, click [...] in the File name field.
3. In the Open dialog enter a recognizable name for the file to be generated in
the File name field and select a Path where you want to save the file.
4. Click on [Open].
5. From the File type drop-down list, select the export format for the file to be
generated.
6. In the Part type group box select the part type to be considered during export
by selecting / deselecting the corresponding check boxes.
7. In the Trade group box select the trades to be considered during export by
selecting / deselecting the corresponding check boxes.
EPLAN Training 32
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
8. Click [OK].
The file is generated under the name provided in the specified directory.
9. In EPLAN 5 select the menu items Part > Management > Data exchange >
Import > EPLAN - ASCII format.
10. In the Import EPLAN ASCII format dialog, click [...] in the Source file (ASCII
file) field.
11. In the ASCII file selection dialog, select the file you exported previously.
13. In the Import EPLAN ASCII format dialog select one of the options Update
existing parts data from the Transfer group box.
The data is imported to EPLAN 5. Please note here that only data that
EPLAN 5 can save will be transferred and P8-specific information is lost.
EPLAN Training 33
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
The program also informs you if unassigned languages are found in the dictionaries
to be imported. You can specify the missing assignment under Options > Settings >
User > Interfaces > EPLAN 5 language assignment.
Precondition:
In EPLAN 5, you must export the language entries in CSV format (ASCII) (the
internal EPLAN OEM format), because this format can easily be interpreted. If the
format does not conform to this standard (e.g., if you have selected the EPLAN
format, ANSI with TABs entry, or any other format), an appropriate message is
displayed and the transfer is cancelled.
1. In EPLAN 5, select the menu item Utilities > Foreign languages > Language
files > Export.
2. In the Data export dialog, select CSV format (ASCII) in the File format group
box.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 34
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
A language assignment is then necessary when importing: The 26 possible
"Language identifiers" from EPLAN 5 are displayed in a column, with the associated
P8 language identifiers displayed in a second column. In the third column, an EPLAN
5 character set can be selected for each language assignment. There are default
values for all fields. The standard values can also be restored via the Popup menu>
Standard.
1. In the Import dictionary dialog select the previously exported file containing
the EPLAN 5 language entries.
2. Click on [Open].
3. In the Language assignment dialog, check the assigned ISO language code
for each EPLAN 5 language identifier and select a different value from the
drop-down list if necessary.
4. If necessary, select another character set from the EPLAN 5 character set
drop-down list. This may be necessary because the text also contains special
characters.
5. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 35
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
7. Click [OK].
The language databases are imported, i.e., the OEM text from EPLAN 5 is
converted to Unicode and transferred into the language database. The
progress bar shows the progress of the transfer.
Note:
Check the databases before using them in your project. In P8, there is no longer any
formatting in the language database entries, meaning that line breaks, for example,
are replaced with spaces, and EPLAN 5-specific placeholders are deleted.
EPLAN Training 36
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
2. In the Export dictionary dialog, select the File type "EPLAN 5 - CSV file"
from the drop-down list.
3. In the File name dialog specify the name of the export file and, if necessary,
select a different directory (the default here is the directory specified for
translation files under Options > Settings > User > Management >
Directories).
4. Click [Save].
5. If the current dictionary contains multiple languages, select the one that you
would like to export in the Select languages dialog. Multiple selection is
possible here.
6. Click [OK].
The language entries are exported and a progress bar shows the process.
7. Click [Close].
EPLAN Training 37
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
In EPLAN 5 proceed as follows:
4. If desired, add entries for other languages present in P8 but not in EPLAN 5.
5. Click [OK].
7. In the Open file dialog, select the file you exported previously.
8. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 38
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
Example:
test_mse.ema
The directory structure is also taken into account during the transfer. As an example,
D:\eplan4\M\bosch\auftrag_A\*.mf? is stored under
D:\EPLAN\Basic\Makros\bosch\auftrag_A\*.*.
Precondition:
The symbol libraries used in EPLAN 5 macros have already been transferred, and if
necessary, must be revised so that the function definitions can be correctly set up in
the macros.
1. In the EPLAN 5 macro import wizard, select a master data drive defining the
location of the data to be imported, from the Master data drive drop-down list
on the Macros tab. The drives where an ...\EPLAN4\... directory can be
found are displayed as the default here.
The Macro file selection dialog is opened; the Path already contains
<Selected master data drive>:\EPLAN4\M. The default for the File type
is "All macros".
EPLAN Training 39
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
3. To transfer only certain macro types from EPLAN 5, select the desired types
from the File type drop-down list.
The display of the macros in the upper portion of the dialog is automatically
updated.
5. Click on [Open].
7. Specify in the Find folder dialog where the files should be saved. In doing this
the default path specified in the settings will be given (Options > Settings >
User > Management > Directories).
8. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 40
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
10. In the Save macro project as dialog, specify the location and filename under
which the macro project should be saved. Once you've done this, the default
path specified for projects in the settings is used (Options > Settings > User
> Management > Directories).
13. In the EPLAN 5 project selection dialog, select an EPLAN 5 project that suits
the macros, where "suits" means that the macros in this EPLAN 5 project can
be inserted without problems. Suitable symbol libraries are critical here.
15. Select the checkboxGenerate macros automatically if you want the macro
export to begin directly after the macro import, so that the macros are
immediately available in the correct format.
16. Select the checkbox Synchronize imported parts data with the database if
you want the parts data transferred with the macros to be directly
synchronized with the database after the macro transfer. This is only useful if
the EPLAN 5 parts data have already been imported into the parts database
as part of the master data transfer, since otherwise the synchronization
process won't find any data, and the search will waste valuable time.
EPLAN Training 41
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
17. Select the check box Automatic change of status for JIC projects if all
EPLAN 5 projects created with the Schematic logic = "JIC" project parameter
should be converted directly during the data transfer.
EPLAN Training 42
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
1. In the Macros tab of the EPLAN 5 macro import wizard dialog select the
macro to be imported and click [Next].
2. From the ISO language code drop-down list in the Language assignment
tab select the language you would like to assign to the EPLAN 5 language
identifier.
3. From the EPLAN 5 character set drop-down list select the associated
character set (not the language!) that contains the special characters
necessary for the various languages. The entry is prepopulated with 437.
5. From the EPLAN 5 character set for non-translatable texts tab select the
character set to be used for language-neutral and non-translatable texts.
6. Click [Next].
Path: File path where the EPLAN 5 symbol library was originally saved (write-
protected)
Standard library: Library for all standard cases that can be assigned using the
default table (write-protected)
User library: Library that in the comparison was shown to contain "different"
customer symbols
Exception library: Library for all exceptions (composite symbols) found based
on the default assignment table (write-protected).
Note:
If you select a table from the Origin drop-down list, the entries in the Standard
Library (target) and the Exception Library (target) are automatically updated.
1. In the Macros tab of the EPLAN 5 macro import wizard dialog select the
macro to be imported and click [Next].
EPLAN Training 44
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
3. In the Symbols tab click [...] in the User library (target) field of an EPLAN 5
symbol library whose status symbol shows that no assignment has yet been
specified.
4. Select a symbol library in the Open dialog. The File type is predefined with
"Symbol library (*.slk)". (Multiple selection isn't possible here).
5. Click [Open].
9. Click [Finish]. (This button is active once all of the EPLAN 5 symbol libraries
are assigned reference).
The symbols are stored in the macro project and a reference to the symbol
is saved in the individual macro files.
Note:
Forms and plot frames are not used in the EPLAN 5 macros, but parts are transferred
like a project transfer.
EPLAN Training 45
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 46
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
Warning:
Please note that only error-free projects can be correctly transferred. This does not
mean that projects with errors can't be transferred. They just won't be error-free and
will need revisions.
There is another very helpful wizard available that supports the following EPLAN 5
project formats:
"normal" projects, i.e., projects that are neither packed nor filed off
packed projects that are automatically unpacked before the data transfer
E-mail projects (*.Z13) that are automatically unpacked before the data transfer
*1: When selecting these projects a warning appears that infoms you that the projects
in question are filed off for external editing. You can then decide whether you still
want to transfer the project.
Note:
Archived projects are not transferred, because the data in such projects are not
saved on the hard drive!
After the transfer, the projects are available as "normal" projects, neither packed nor
filed off, and can therefore be edited.
The following two different modes are available for the project transfer:
Default mode
One-button mode
EPLAN Training 47
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
Project > EPLAN 5 / fluidPLAN import > Project
1. In the EPLAN 5 project import wizard select a master data drive from the
Master data drive drop-down list where you want to save the imported data.
The drives where an ...\EPLAN4\... directory can be found are displayed as
the default here.
3. In the EPLAN 5 project selection dialog, select the EPLAN 5 projects you
want to transfer. Multiple selection is possible here. The drives where an
...\EPLAN4\P... directory can be found are displayed.
Under Projects all drives are displayed that have a letter assigned, i.e.,
regardless of whether a ...\EPLAN4\P\... directory exists.
5. Click [OK].
7. Specify in the Find folder dialog where the files should be saved. In doing this
the default path specified for projects in the settings is used (Options >
Settings > User > Management > Directories). (Project names and the
directory structure of EPLAN 5 source projects are automatically taken on).
8. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 48
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
9. Select the Synchronize imported parts data with the database check box if
parts data transferred in the projects should be directly synchronized with the
database after the project transfer. This is only useful if the EPLAN 5 parts
data have already been imported into the parts database as part of the master
data transfer, because otherwise the synchronization process will not find any
data and the search will waste valuable time.
10. Select the Generate automatic cable check box if the automatic cable should
be automatically generated during the transfer. Deselect the check box in
order to accelerate the transfer.
11. Select the check box Automatic change of status for JIC projects if all
EPLAN 5 projects created with the Schematic logic = "JIC" project parameter
should be converted directly during the data transfer.
12. Click [Next] if you want to specify the language and symbol library
assignments. (This is the so-called Default mode.)
Or click [Finish] if you have already specified the language and symbol library
assignments or want to accept the default settings. (This is the so-called One-
button mode.)
The message management for each project (Project data > Messages >
Management) contains additional detailed information on the individual
projects.
Notes:
The representation type "external" is assigned to automatic cables that do not
exist in EPLAN 5. (They are cable connections, but do not lead to cable
EPLAN Training 49
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
generation in EPLAN 5; instead, they were generated during the data transfer
because of their shields.)
EPLAN Training 50
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
In the Language assignment tab you can specify the necessary settings for cases
that deviate from the defaults. The available characters for language identifiers in
EPLAN 5 are displayed here in a list. These cannot be changed here. Based on the
defaults (Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > EPLAN 5 language
assignment), however, the specific ISO language codes and character sets can be
assigned to the EPLAN 5 language identifiers and can be changed.
For the transferred projects, the EPLAN 5 parameters you specified under Utilities >
Parameters > Project > General > Foreign language can be assigned to the
settings for display and translation languages (Options > Settings > Projects >
"Project name" > Translation > General).
Note:
When selecting multiple projects (Projects tab in this wizard) the language
assignments apply for all selected projects.
2. From the ISO language code drop-down list in the Language assignment
tab select the language you would like to assign to the EPLAN 5 language
identifier.
EPLAN Training 51
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
3. From the EPLAN 5 character set drop-down list select the associated
character set (not the language!) that contains the special characters
necessary for the various languages. The entry is prepopulated with 437.
5. Or select Popup menu > Default in order to reset the values to the EPLAN-
specific defaults.
6. From the EPLAN 5 character set for non-translatable texts tab select the
character set to be used for language-neutral and non-translatable texts.
7. Click [Next].
EPLAN Training 52
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
Path: File path where the EPLAN 5 symbol library was originally saved (write-
protected)
Standard library: Library for all standard cases that can be assigned using the
default table (write-protected)
User library: Library that in the comparison was shown to contain "different"
customer symbols
Exception library: Library for all exceptions (composite symbols) found based
on the default assignment table (write-protected).
Note:
If you select a table from the Origin drop-down list, the entries in the Standard
Library (target) and the Exception Library (target) are automatically updated.
EPLAN Training 53
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
3. In the Symbols tab click [...] in the User library (target) field of an EPLAN 5
symbol library whose status symbol shows that no assignment has yet been
specified.
4. Select a symbol library in the Open dialog. The File type is predefined with
"Symbol library (*.slk)". (Multiple selection isn't possible here).
5. Click [Open].
EPLAN Training 54
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
9. Click [Finish]. (This button is active once all of the EPLAN 5 symbol libraries
are assigned reference).
The program checks whether symbol assignments are still missing. If that
is the case, a message will appear and you can decide if you would like to
proceed. Otherwise, the transfer is started and a progress bar shows you the
status of the transfer.
The message management for each project (Project data > Messages >
Management) contains additional detailed information on the individual
projects.
Note:
The names and directory structure of EPLAN 5 projects are automatically transferred,
whereby the directory structure of the source and indeed after the EPLAN 5-
specific customer identifier is automatically recommended. If a target project of the
same name already exists, you will be prompted whether the project should be
overwritten or not.
EPLAN Training 55
Data Transfer from EPLAN 5
EPLAN Training 56
Data Import from EPLAN 21
EPLAN Training 1
Data Import from EPLAN 21
EPLAN Training 2
Data Import from EPLAN 21
1. In the EPLAN 21 symbol library import dialog, click [...] in the Source field.
2. In the Select symbol library dialog select the EPLAN 21 symbol library to be
imported. Multiple selection is not possible here.
3. Click on [Open].
4. Select the Transfer from schematic symbols option and specify the
assignment table in the Original library drop-down list.
Or select the Transfer of mounting panel symbols option.
6. Specify in the Browse For Folder dialog where the new symbol library should
be generated.
7. Click [OK].
The symbols are transferred and a progress bar shows the process.
Original EPLAN 21 symbols are not converted, but rather assigned to the
corresponding symbols. Symbols generated or changed by the user, on the
other hand, are saved in a new symbol library and any problems are stored as
properties in this symbol library.
EPLAN Training 3
Data Import from EPLAN 21
the EPLAN 21-specific properties "Coils / contact function <4115>" and
"Device class <4003>" as well as the number of connection points in order to
assign the correct function definitions to the symbols in the new symbol library.
It is then checked as to whether the respective function definition matches. If
the function definition was only allocated based on the device class, or it did
not match, a property is saved for the symbol, which helps to select inaccurate
function definitions. In this case a function definition was assigned by the
system that was determined from the separate assignment "EPLAN 21
properties for function definitions". These are only partially correct (NO
contacts, but never delayed NO contacts).
8. Click [Close].
9. Click [OK] in the window that informs you about the status of the data transfer.
Note:
All properties that are also activated in EPLAN 21 are placed on the symbols. The
properties are then placed on the corresponding layers and docked next to one
another in the sequence they were shown in EPLAN 21. The text sizes for the
properties are set to From layer.
EPLAN Training 4
Data Import from EPLAN 21
Any problems that occurred during the data transfer are shown in the upper right
portion of the dialog. One click on a property will select the corresponding symbol in
the list. If the problem is solved, the property can be manually set to "Completed".
Precondition:
You have selected an EPLAN 21 symbol library for transfer and defined the
appropriate entries in the EPLAN 21 symbol library import dialog.
2. Click [...] in the Function definition field of the Symbol data group box (right
portion of the dialog).
3. Select a project from the Opened projects list in the Project selection dialog.
4. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 5
Data Import from EPLAN 21
5. Select the appropriate function definition in the Function definitions dialog.
6. Click [OK].
9. In the Completed column select the check box to indicate that the problem
has been "solved".
10. Proceed in the same way for all other symbols you would like to revise.
Note:
Default for the basic symbol library is Base_DIC if "DIC", "DIN", or "IEC" occur in the
symbol library names. If the symbol library name contains the character string "JIC",
the Base_JIC basic symbol library is set. The same process applies to "MSR"
(Base_MSR), "Single" (Base_Single) and "PNE" (Base_Pneumatic).
EPLAN Training 6
Data Import from EPLAN 21
This functionality is only available for certain module packages. Info
EPLAN Training 7
Data Import from EPLAN 21
Because most variants are just rotations and mirrors of the template variant (one of
eight default variants), they are analyzed during the symbol transfer, and each
identified with one of the A-H variants. Some of them can be securely assigned while
others do not allow a secure assignment. Because the Function definition
assignment - <Symbol library> dialog displays all of the variants of every symbol
as well as the basic symbol with its four associated variants, and the connection point
numbers are displayed in the symbol preview, you can recognize in one glance
whether the transferred symbol variants are different from the basic symbol variants.
If a difference is found, proceed as follows:
Preconditions:
You have selected an EPLAN 21 symbol library for transfer and defined the
appropriate entries in the EPLAN 21 symbol library import dialog.
The function definition matches the first variants for the symbol.
The 1, 2, 3, and 4 variants have a rotation angle of 0, 90, 180 and 270.
2. In the Symbol variant assignment dialog you assign a basic symbol variant
to the variants of the imported symbol.
The variant number of the basic symbol (A-H) is saved as the variant
number on the imported symbol and the connection points from the basic
EPLAN Training 8
Data Import from EPLAN 21
symbol variant are written to the variants of the imported symbol. In addition,
the P8 variant (A-H) to which the previous EPLAN 21 variants 0-3 were
assigned are saved with the symbol. This information is necessary for
correctly assigning the connection point designations to the function in a later
project or macro transfers.
3. Click [OK].
4. Proceed in a similar manner for all other problems that may occur.
Symbols that have been edited in EPLAN 21, where P8 cannot identify the
connection points during the transfer, must be revised in the symbol editor.
Example:
In this case the program cannot recognize that "X3" is also mirrored. The PE
connection point should be on the left and not on the right. In this case, you also
have to switch the variant C connection points in the symbol editor to solve this
EPLAN Training 9
Data Import from EPLAN 21
problem.
EPLAN Training 10
Data Import from EPLAN 21
1. In the EPLAN 21 symbol library import dialog, click [...] in the Source field.
2. In the Select symbol library dialog select the EPLAN 21 symbol library to be
imported that contains the mounting panel symbols. Multiple selection is not
possible here.
3. Click on [Open].
5. From the Original library drop-down list select the table to be used for
assigning old and new symbols. Based on an internal comparison the program
suggests an assignment table here. If no suitable table can be found, the
drop-down list remains empty and you can select the table manually.
EPLAN Training 11
Data Import from EPLAN 21
7. Specify in the Browse For Folder dialog where the new symbol library should
be generated.
8. Click [OK].
In the default macro directory, a folder is created that adopts the name of
the symbol library and generates macros from the symbols. Only graphics and
not connection points are transferred. Use the graphic dimensions to generate
the special "Parts placement " symbol and exchange the placed properties
with property placements.
9. Click [OK] in the window that informs you about the status of the data transfer.
EPLAN Training 12
Data Import from EPLAN 21
The following information can be stored in the EPLAN 21 symbol library plugs.sym:
Plug graphic
Symbol description
Number of plug contacts
Connection point designations
Potential types
Function texts
Symbol references.
Taken altogether, this data provides the graphic for the symbols and their device
information.
Note:
The symbol references are references to other symbol libraries, for example
DIC_WUP.SYM, or customer-specific symbol libraries. The function definitions are
therefore taken from them. It is recommended that you transfer the symbols for plugs
before transferring the plug types. If a symbol library with symbol references has
already been transferred, the function definitions are taken from the P8 library.
The plug contacts defined in the symbol library plugs.sym are each assigned one of
the following function definitions:
If you select one of the two options Update existing data for the data transfer, only
the following data will be updated for existing part numbers:
EPLAN Training 13
Data Import from EPLAN 21
Function template
Color / no.
Potential.
With this type of imported data you can then copy the "technical data" into parts
management in order to add it to parts with just sales data.
The part number is automatically generated from the EPLAN 21 symbol library
names and the symbol names.
Example:
Plugs_Harting 16+PE" for the symbol "Harting 16+PE" from the plugs symbol library
Because the plug functions in EPLAN 21 must also be transferred to the parts
database as plug numbering schemes, a separate menu item is available here for the
data transfer. Proceed as follows:
1. Click [...] in the Source field of the EPLAN 21 plug data import dialog.
2. In the Select symbol library dialog select the EPLAN 21 symbol library for
plugs to be imported. plugs.sym is the default symbol library. Multiple
selection is impossible here.
3. Click on [Open].
5. In the Select parts database dialog select the parts database to which the
plug symbols are to be transferred.
EPLAN Training 14
Data Import from EPLAN 21
6. Click on [Open].
7. In the Import group box select one of the options for handling existing / new
parts records.
8. Click [OK].
If the parts database does not have a part with one of the numbers defined here, new
parts are created, in which the following fields will be filled in:
The save location for macros is the default macro directory. Because this is known,
the graphic macro can be predefined for the new part. The plugs symbols are also
converted to plug numbering schemes i.e., plug schemes are generated from the
EPLAN 21 symbols. The scheme automatically contains the symbol name; the
symbol description is saved in the scheme description; and the contact designation is
saved in the designations.
EPLAN Training 15
Data Import from EPLAN 21
Note:
Instead of the transferred symbol, a macro is saved in parts management for the
panel layout. This is necessary because the graphics for the symbols may not be
scaled. In order to use EPLAN 21 symbols for the panel layout, you must transfer the
symbol library with the plug symbols one more time via the option Transfer from
mounting panel symbols. The graphic is only saved as a macro with part
placement once that is done.
EPLAN Training 16
Data Import from EPLAN 21
1. In the EPLAN 21 plot frame import dialog, click [...] in the Source field.
2. In the Select plot frame dialog select the EPLAN 21 plot frames to be
imported. You can select multiple files here.
3. Click on [Open].
5. Specify in the Find folder dialog where the files should be saved. In doing this
the default path specified in the settings will be given (Options > Settings >
User > Management > Directories).
6. Click [OK].
The plot frames are transferred and a progress bar shows the process. The
plot frame name is generated automatically from the original file name and the
file type is assigned automatically based on the P8 format options. Possible
problems are saved as properties in the plot frame and, if necessary, can be
viewed under Utilities > System messages.
EPLAN Training 17
Data Import from EPLAN 21
7. Click [OK] in the window that informs you about the status of the data transfer.
EPLAN Training 18
Data Import from EPLAN 21
Note:
Most EPLAN 21 forms are not exactly DIN A3 size, but a bit smaller. They are
transferred as they are, i.e. they are not exactly DIN A3 size in P8.
1. In the EPLAN 21 form import dialog, click [...] in the Source field.
2. In the Select form dialog select the EPLAN 21 forms to be imported. You can
select multiple files here.
3. Click on [Open].
5. Specify in the Find folder dialog where the files should be saved. In doing this
the default path specified in the settings will be given (Options > Settings >
User > Management > Directories).
6. Click [OK].
The forms are transferred and a progress bar shows the process. The form
name is generated automatically from the original filename and the file type is
assigned automatically based on the P8 format options. Possible problems are
EPLAN Training 19
Data Import from EPLAN 21
saved as properties in the form and, if necessary, can be viewed under
Utilities > System Messages.
7. Click [OK] in the window that informs you about the status of the data transfer.
Warning:
"Text view" type EPLAN 21 forms are transferred as undefined forms (file type
*.efa) and can thus no longer be used.
EPLAN Training 20
Data Import from EPLAN 21
Note:
It makes sense (but is not required) to start the Transfer from mounting panel
symbols (option in the EPLAN 21 symbol library import) before the parts transfer
because the EPLAN 21 symbols for the mounting panel is converted to macros and
the panel layout is only functional once this takes place.
Proceed as follows:
1. In the EPLAN 21 parts import dialog, click [...] in the Source field.
3. Click on [Open].
5. In the Select parts database dialog, select the parts database to which the
data is to be imported. You cannot select multiple files here.
EPLAN Training 21
Data Import from EPLAN 21
6. Click on [Open].
7. In the Import group box select one of the options for handling existing and
new parts records.
8. Click [OK].
The parts data is transferred and a progress bar shows the process.
9. Click [OK] in the window that informs you about the status of the data transfer.
Notes:
During the import, the function definitions are set up as effectively as possible
(e.g., "Terminal", but not "PE terminal 4").
The EPLAN 21-specific contactor and cable data are created as a part with
equal value.
The EPLAN 21 parts property "CAD no. <8014>" uses newly generated macros
created according to the following rules instead of the using the previous
symbol references:
$(EPLAN)\Macros\<Customer code>\<Symbol library name>\<Symbol
name>_<Variant as number>.
Almost 100 attributes can be defined for a part in EPLAN 21. For customers who
want to transfer this type of parts data, there is a configurable assignment
table for EPLAN 21 attributes for P8-specific "free properties". Contact support
for any questions.
EPLAN Training 22
Data Import from EPLAN 21
Parts can be exported directly from EPLAN 21 into the parts database. Proceed as
follows:
1. In P8, in the Parts management dialog, select the menu items [Extras] >
Export.
2. In the Export records dialog, click [...] in the File name field.
3. In the Open dialog, enter a recognizable name for the file to be generated in
the Filename field and select the path where you want to save the file.
4. Click on [Open].
5. From the File type drop-down list, select the "Text" export format for the file to
be generated.
6. In the Part type group box select the part type to be considered during export
by selecting / deselecting the corresponding check boxes.
7. In the Trade group box select the trades to be considered during export by
selecting / deselecting the corresponding check boxes.
EPLAN Training 23
Data Import from EPLAN 21
8. Click [OK].
The file is generated under the name provided in the specified directory.
9. In EPLAN 21 browser select the menu items Utilities > Parts management >
Parts management.
10. In EPLAN 21 parts management dialog select the menu items File > Import.
11. In the Import from file dialog, click [...] in the Source field.
12. In the Open file dialog, select the file you previously exported.
14. From the Mode drop-down list select one of the options for handling existing
and new parts records.
The data is imported to EPLAN 21. Please note here that only data that
EPLAN 21 can save will be transferred and P8-specific information is lost.
EPLAN Training 24
Data Import from EPLAN 21
The program also informs you if unassigned languages are found in the dictionaries
to be imported. You can specify the missing assignment in the Languages tab under
Options > Settings > User > Interfaces > EPLAN 21 data import.
Precondition:
In EPLAN 21, you must export language entries in Unicode Tab format because this
format can be easily interpreted. If the format does not fulfill this specification (if, for
example, you selected the ANSI_tab.ff format or another format), a message will
appear and the transfer will be interrupted.
1. In EPLAN 21 browser select the menu items Utilities > Translation module
> Export.
2. In the Export language entries dialog specify the scope of the export by
either expanding or reducing the entries in the Selected languages list with
the copy button.
3. Click [...] if the entry in the Format file field is not unicode_tab.ff.
5. Click on [Open].
EPLAN Training 25
Data Import from EPLAN 21
6. Click [...] in the Export file field.
7. In the Export file dialog specify the save location and the name of the export
file to be generated.
8. Click [Save].
9. Select the Only export missing entries check box if only the language
entries to be written to the export file are those that still have missing
translation texts in at least one language.
The data is exported under the specified file name to the specified
directory.
After you have exported the language entries in Unicode Tab format from EPLAN 21,
proceed as follows for the import:
1. In the Import dictionary dialog select the previously exported file containing
the EPLAN 21 language entries.
EPLAN Training 26
Data Import from EPLAN 21
2. Click [Open].
4. Click [OK].
5. If one of the languages to be imported is not yet in the dictionary, you must
specify whether this language should be created and the language entries
should be imported.
6. Depending on the settings regarding how identical data sets are to be treated,
you still have to confirm or decline the overwrite of certain translations.
The language entries are imported, i.e. the texts from EPLAN 21 are
transferred to the dictionary. The progress bar shows the progress of the
transfer.
EPLAN Training 27
Data Import from EPLAN 21
2. In the Export dictionary dialog, select the File type "EPLAN 21 tab-delimited
Unicode file (*.txt)" from the drop-down list.
3. In the File name dialog specify the name of the export file and, if necessary,
select a different directory (the default here is the directory specified for
translation files under Options > Settings > User > Management >
Directories).
4. Click [Save].
5. If the current dictionary contains multiple languages, select the one that you
would like to export in the Select languages dialog. Multiple selection is
possible here.
6. Click [OK].
The language entries are exported and a progress bar shows the process.
7. Click [Close].
EPLAN Training 28
Data Import from EPLAN 21
Warning:
An export with two different languages (pt_PT and pt_BR) that would result in one
language in EPLAN 21 (PT) is not possible. In this case the export is interrupted with
an error message.
1. In the browser select the menu items Utilities > Translation module >
Import.
2. Click [...] if the entry in the Format file field of the Import language entries
dialog is not unicode_tab.ff.
4. Click [Open].
6. In the Import file dialog, select the file you previously exported.
7. Click on [Open].
EPLAN Training 29
Data Import from EPLAN 21
8. Click [Apply].
The language entries are imported and a progress bar shows the process.
9. Click [Close].
EPLAN Training 30
Data Import from EPLAN 21
Precondition:
The symbol libraries used in EPLAN 21 macros have already been transferred, and if
necessary, must be revised so that the function definitions can be correctly set up in
the macros.
1. In the EPLAN 21 macro import wizard, click [Settings] in the Macros tab to
view and possibly edit the settings for directories, languages, and general
parameters.
2. Click [OK].
4. In the Select macro dialog, specify in the Files of type drop-down list whether
you want to transfer an EPLAN 21 archive file (*.ez) or individual macros
(*.mac).
5. Select the files to be imported. Multiple selection is possible for macro files.
EPLAN Training 31
Data Import from EPLAN 21
6. Click on [Open].
8. In the Select target project dialog, specify where and under what filename
the macro project should be saved. In the directory selected, an additional
subdirectory will be created with the name of the macro project, and the
macros stored there.
9. Click [Save].
The EPLAN 21 macros are analyzed and the Symbols tab displays the
symbol libraries used in them. You can accept these or replace them with
existing symbol libraries.
EPLAN Training 32
Data Import from EPLAN 21
The symbols are stored in the macro project during the transfer and a reference to
the symbol is saved in the individual file macros.
1. In the Macros tab of the EPLAN 21 macro import wizard dialog, select the
EPLAN 21 macros and the target project to be imported and click [Next].
2. In the Symbols tab click [...] in the Target file field of an EPLAN 21 symbol
library whose status symbol shows that no assignment has yet been specified.
3. Select a symbol library in the Select symbol library dialog. The file type is
then predefined with "Symbol library (*.slk)". (Multiple selection isn't possible
here).
4. Click on [Open].
EPLAN Training 33
Data Import from EPLAN 21
6. Or click [Convert].
7. In the EPLAN 21 symbol library import dialog proceed as you would when
transferring symbol libraries.
8. Click [Finish]. This button is active once all of the EPLAN 21 symbol libraries
have been assigned a P8 reference.
The macros are imported, the newly created macro project is opened, and
a status bar displays the progress of the transfer.
Note:
Forms are not used in EPLAN 21 macros, and plot frames are taken from the
specified EPLAN 21 plot frame directory and stored in the macro project. Parts are
transferred exactly like a project.
EPLAN Training 34
Data Import from EPLAN 21
Warning:
Please note that only error-free projects can be correctly transferred. This does not
mean that projects with errors can't be transferred. They just won't be error-free and
will need revisions.
ObjectStore databases cannot be imported, but P8 can read the project data in
EASY format.
A wizard is available for project transfers and it is supported in the following transfer
modes:
Default mode
One-button mode
Precondition:
The symbol libraries used in EPLAN 21 projects have already been transferred, and
must, if necessary, be revised so the function definitions can be correctly set up.
1. In the EPLAN 21 project import wizard, click [Settings] in the Projects tab
in order to view and possibly edit the settings for directories, languages, and
general parameters.
2. Click [OK].
EPLAN Training 35
Data Import from EPLAN 21
4. In the Select project dialog, specify in the File type drop-down list whether
you want to transfer an EPLAN 21 archive file (*.ez), individual projects
(*.prj), or project templates (*.tpl).
5. Select the files to be imported. Multiple selection is possible for projects and
templates.
6. Click on [Open].
8. Specify in the Find folder dialog where the files should be saved. In doing this
the default path specified for projects in the settings is used (Options >
Settings > User > Management > Directories). (Project names and the
directory structure of EPLAN 21 source projects are automatically taken on).
9. Click [OK].
10. Click [Next] if you want to specify the symbol library assignments. (This is the
so-called Default mode.)
Or click [Finish] if you have already specified the symbol library assignments
or want to accept the default settings. (This is the so-called One-button mode.)
11. Depending on the settings you still have to confirm or decline the overwrite of
certain data.
EPLAN Training 36
Data Import from EPLAN 21
Notes:
It is not possible to transfer all projects in a directory as well as all of the
subdirectories at the same time.
When transferring archive files (*.ez) it can happen that differently named data
backups contain projects with the same names. Therefore, during the transfer
an additional folder with the name of the archive file is created for every
archive file.
EPLAN Training 37
Data Import from EPLAN 21
Edited by: Last user to edit the EPLAN 21 symbol library, write-protected
Created from: Assignment table that was identified as suitable for the original
file; drop-down list where a different table can be selected. If you select the
"empty entry" here, the assignment function for the symbols is deactivated. In
this case the symbol library is transferred 1:1.
Target file: File name of the symbol library where the symbols are to be saved.
This can be changed by clicking [...].
The directory and filename of the unpacked EZ file are displayed for symbol libraries
saved in an *.EZ file.
1. In the Projects tab of the EPLAN 21 project import wizard dialog, select the
EPLAN 21 projects and the target project to be imported and click [Next].
EPLAN Training 38
Data Import from EPLAN 21
2. In the Symbols tab click [...] in the Target file field of an EPLAN 21 symbol
library whose status symbol shows that no assignment has yet been specified.
3. Select a symbol library in the Select symbol library dialog. The file type is
predefined with "Symbol library (*.slk)". (Multiple selection isn't possible here.)
4. Click [Open].
7. In the EPLAN 21 symbol library import dialog proceed as you would when
transferring symbol libraries.
EPLAN Training 39
Data Import from EPLAN 21
8. Click [Finish].
The program checks whether symbol assignments are still missing. If that
is the case, a message will appear and you can decide if you would like to
proceed. Otherwise, the transfer is started and a progress bar shows you the
status of the transfer.
The message management for each project (Project data > Messages >
Management) contains additional detailed information on the individual
projects.
EPLAN Training 40
Data Import from EPLAN 21
EPLAN Training 41